Class. QrVj 7 [ 

Book I 

Copyright^ 

COPYRIGHT DEPOSIT. 



PALDINGS 

ATHLETIC LIBRARY ^fl? 



OFFICIAL HANDBOOK 




Army 



Navy 

1 Athletic 
\/ Training 

r Use of K. of C. Athletic Directors 




merican Sports Publishing Co. 

45 Rose St., New York 




A.G.SPALDING &BROS. 

MAINTAIN T14E1R. OWN HOUSES 
FOR DISTRIBUTING THE 

SPALDING 

COMPLETE LINE OF 

ATHLETIC GOODS 

IN THE FOLLOWING CITIES* 



NEW YORK 

124-128 Nassau St. 
Vp!».»-528 Fifth A venae 

NEWARK, N. J. 

680 Broad Street 

PHILADELPHIA, PA. 
1210 Chestnut Street 

BOSTON, MASS, 

74 Summer Street 


CHICAGO 

211-217 So. State St. 
INDIANAPOLIS, IND. 
1 36 N. Pennsylvania St. 

CINCINNATI, O. 

110 East Fifth Avenue 
CLEVELAND, O. 

741 Euclid Avenue 

COLUMBUS, O. 

107 South High Street 


SAN FRANCISCO 

156-158 Geary Street 
OAKLAND, CAL. 

416 Fourteenth St. 
SEATTLE, WASH. 

1204 Second Avenue 
LOS ANGELES, CAL. 

435 South Spring St. 
PORTLAND, ORE. 

Broadway at Alder 
SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH 
331 Main Street 


PITTSBURGH, PA. 

608 Wood Street 

BUFFALO, N. Y. 

611 Main Street 

SYRACUSE, N. Y. 

357 So. Warren Street 


DETROIT, MICH. 

121 Woodward Ave. 

WASHINGTON, D. C. 
613 14th Street, N.W. 

LOUISVILLE, KY. 

328 West Jefferson St. 


ST. LOUIS, MO. 

415 North Seventh St. 
KANSAS CITY, MO. 

1120 Grand Avenue 
MILWAUKEE,, WIS. 

379 East Water Street 
PES MOINES, LA. 

803 Locust Street 


ROCHESTER, N. Y. 

40 Clinton Ave., North 
ALBANY, N. Y. 

52 State Street 
BALTIMORE, MB. 

110 E. Baltimore St. 


ATLANTA, GA. 

74 N. Broad Street 

NEW ORLEANS, LA. 

140 Carondelet Street 
DALLAS, TEX. 

1518 Main Street 


DENVER, COL. 

622 Sixteenth Street 
MINNEAPOLIS, MINN. 

52 Seventh St., South 
ST. PAUL, MINN. 

386 Minnesota Street 


LONDON, ENGLAND 
317-318, 

High Holborn, W. C. 
78, Chcapside, E. C. 

LIVERPOOL 

72, Lord Street 

BIRMINGHAM, ENG. 

New Street House 


MANCHESTER, ENG. 
4, Oxford St. and 
1, Lower Mosley St. 

BRISTOL, ENG. 

42, High Street 

EDINBURGH, SCOT. 

3 So.Charlotte St.<c«-. Prtawst > 

GLASGOW, SCOTLAND 
68 Buchanan Street 


MONTREAL, CANADA 

360-71 Se Catherine St- W. 

TORONTO, CANADA 

207 Yonge Street 

SYDNEY, AUSTRALIA 
204 Clarence Street 

PARIS, FRANCE 

25-27 Rue Troncliet 



Commoiilealloas directed lo A. 6. SPALDING & B89S., aLaay el the a»sv« addresses, will r< 




inH 



UNCI 



gniiii 



LINEUP OF KNIGHTS 01- COLUMBUS WAR SERVICE VEHICLES IN THE PLACE DE LA CONCORDE. PARIS 

















'* 


35 .1 «» ' - •' 

1 i 
II fc( 


J3|JI Jjl 





UFi 



Spalding Athletic Library 
Auxiliary Series 



Army and Navy 
Athletic Training 

Compiled for the use of K. of G. 
Athletic Directors 




Compliments of 

A. G. Spalding & Bros. 

New York Chicago San Francisco 

| □! Paris : 27, Rue Tronchet |~Fj 

Copyright, 1919, by American Sports Publishing Company. 



Contents 

Page 



Officers of Knights of Columbus 5 

The Knights of Columbus — in Peace and War 7 

What I Saw in Europe 14 

Hints From Experience 17 

Jim Sullivan's Dope 23 

Value of Athletic Training in the Army 29 

100 Up Exercise — A Remarkable Aid to Training 31 

Competitive Events for Large Numbers 35 

MediciDe Ball Race 35 

Gun (or Flag) Relay 35 

Equipment Race • 36 

Centipede Race 37 

Crew Race 37 

Rescue Race 37 

Chariot Race 39 

Slow Mule Race 39 

Tug-of-War 41 

Obstacle Race 41 

Sack Race 41 

Three-Legged Race 41 

Potato Race 41 

Wall Scaling 41 

Skin the Snake Relay 42 

Sample Field Day Programme 42 

Suggestions for Officials 43 

Sample Holiday Programme of the Army 45 

Training for Athletic Events 46 

Ethics of Competition 52 

How to Lay Out an Athletic Track 55 

How to Lay Out a Tennis Court 216 



AND 

OFFICIAL RULES 

FOB 

AMATEUR ATHLETIC UNION TRACK AND FIELD EVENTS 
BASKET BALL VOLLEY BALL BASE BALL 

INDOOR BASE BALL SOCCER 
PUSH BALL BOXING (A.A.U.) WRESTLING (A.A.U.) 

HAND GRENADE THROWING 
TRENCH BALL QUOITS HAND BALL 

Acknowledgment is made for the use of their official rules to the Young Men's 
Christian Association, Amateur Athletic Union of the United States, the National 
Collegiate Athletic Association and Spalding's Athletic Library. 




JAMES A. FLAHERTY, 
Supreme Knight. 



KNIGHTS OF COLUMBUS 



SUPREME OFFICERS 

JAMES A. FLAHERTY Supreme Knight 

MARTIN H. CARMODY Deputy Supreme Knight 

WILLIAM J. M-cGINLEY Supreme Secretary 

D. J. CALLAHAN Supreme Treasurer 

JOSEPH C. PELLETIER .....Supreme Advocate 

REV. P. J. McGIVNEY Supreme Chaplain 

THOMAS J. McLOUGHLIN Supreme Warden 

DR. E. W. BUCKLEY Supreme Physician 



Supreme Board of Directors 

Dr. N. A. Dussault John F. Martin 



W. D. Dwyer 
William F. Fox 
Luke E. Hart 
William P. Larkin 
Paul Leche 



J. J. Meyers 
J. J. McGraw 
George F. Monaghan 
William J. Mulligan 
John H. Reddin 




WILLIAM J. MULLIGAN, 
Chairman Committee on War Work Activities. 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



The Knights of Columbus — in Peace, in War 

By John B. Kennedy 

The war work of the Knights of Columbus, work that has earned 
the praise of every American in military and civilian life, from 
the President down to the youngest and rawest private, and that 
has won support from the heads of gigantic corporations down 
to the humblest day laborer, is both a culmination and a stage 
in development. The K. of C, springing from the brain of a devout 
Catholic priest, was founded to serve two purposes, to provide an 
attractive fraternal and social organization for Catholic men and 
to found a Catholic society purely patriotic in spirit. The K. of C. 
has ably fulfilled the purpose of its origin. 

No sooner had the first Council been formed in the New England 
city where the order originated — New Haven, Conn. — than its growth 
was rapidly progressive. Spreading all over New England, the order 
sprang eastward and westward, entering New York, reaching up 
to the banks of the St. Lawrence and advancing steadily towards 
the Middle West, the Rocky Mountains, the far West, the Pacific 
Slope and up into Canada. Then, when the time was ripe, after 
the work of the pioneers like Dr. E. W. Buckley, William J. Dwyer 
and others, was fruitfully consummated, John H. Reddin, a Denver 
attorney, went into Mexico city and gave the Mexican republic its 
first Council of the Knights of Columbus. 

Into Porto Rico and Panama the order has gone. It has been a 
story of continual growth that cannot be adequately summarized 
but that will some day be related in historic fullness as a tribute to 
the zeal and devotion of the true men and good citizens whose 
energy and foresight led them to work unceasingly that the order 
might grow and become great. 

Their work has been singularly rewarded in the able part the 
Knights have played in making the world safe for democracy. 

ORIGIN OF WAR WORK. 
The K. of C. first entered the ranks of war relief work agencies 
during the Spanish-American war, when the Knights voted a large 
appropriation to care for Southern soldiers in Northern training 
camps. At the Mexican border, in 1916-17, the Knights went into 
war relief work on a much larger scale than their first effort. 
Spending many thousands of dollars on the constructoin, equipment 
and maintenance of a chain of recreation buildings at the border, 
they stepped into a perilous gap between the soldiers' leisure hours 
and the varied temptations to which the men were subjected during 
that monotonous campaign of watchful waiting. Raymond B. Fos- 
dick, special investigator at the border for the Secretary of War, 
has gone on record as a witness to the splendid work achieved 
there by the Kniffhta. 



WILLIAM P. LARKIN. 

American Director Overseas Work. 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



9 



No sooner had war been declared against Germany by the United 
States than the Supreme Board of Directors of the Knights of 
Columbus met and offered wholeheartedly and without qualification 
their total resources of the order to the national cause. This 
generous offer was promptly accepted by the War Department, and 
the K. of C. became one of the authorized agencies for the pro- 
vision of recreation and religious facilities to the millions of young 
men being summoned to the colors. 

Over thirty-five per cent, of the enlisted personnel of the Ameri- 
can army being Roman Catholic, and that proportion being greatly 
exceeded in the Navy, while the proportion of Roman Catholic men 
defending their country was, and is, far in excess of their total 
proportion of Catholic population, it was apparent that, with the 
peculiar obligations of the Catholic faith considered, something 
especial must be done for our Catholic fighting men. Quietly and 
unobstrusively, without any fuss and feathers, the K. of C. did 
it. A per capita tax was levied against the membership, and by 
this means approximately a million dollars — the nucleus of the 
K. of C. war fund, was raised. Thus, before any appeal had been 
made to the Catholic public, still less to the general public, the 
K. of C. war work was in full swing, financed by the Knights 
themselves, but benefiting every man under the Flag, regardless 
of color or creed. 

MERITS SOON RECOGNIZED. 

The merits of this work were quickly recognized by the general 
public, whose sons and brothers and husbands praised highly the 
work of the K. of C. as they came into contact with it in the 
camps. Then the Knights went before the public in an appeal for 
funds, and the response with which they met was a sure and 
satisfactory guarantee of the manner in which they are regarded 
by their fellow-citizens. 

Over twelve millions of dollars were poured into their coffers, for 
their policy of making everybody welcome and of charging for 
nothing made an instantaneous hit with the generous American 
public. The result was that the Knights were able to conduct their 
work on a most ambitious scale. They went into every camp 
in the country, erecting buildings everywhere and service clubs in 
some of the larger cities. They went overseas to France, placing 
huts and secretaries and chaplains and a system of motor distri- 
bution of their gifts of candy, smokes, chewing gum, etc., to the 
boys in the fighting zones. They did, in short, everything that could 
be expected of them, and they did it rapidly and wonderfully well. 

ATHLETIC WORK STRESSED. 
And in doing their work they paid attention to all the soldiers' 
needs, minimizing none and not giving any undue proportion. The 
religious, social and educational wants of the men were amply 





til 







D. J. CALLAHAN, 
Supreme Treasurer. 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



11 



provided for, and the Knights, realizing- how dear to the heart of the 
American youth is his variety of national pastimes, provided fully 
for athletic diversion among" the men of the army and navy. Tons 
and tons of equipment were shipped to the camps at home and to 
the American Expeditionary Forces in France, England and Italy. 
Men with special qualifications as athletic instructors were sent 
overseas in the K. of C. uniform — some of the most famous names 
in the various realms of sport were enlisted to aid the K. of C. in 
making- our American boys feel that America was very near to them 
no matter to what points of the earth duty mig-ht send them. 

Emphatically the K. of C. made good. Whether it was providing 
a movie or vaudeville entertainment in a home camp building- o-t* 
abroad; whether it was to provide classes in French or mathematics 
for ambitious young- fighting- men; whether it was to provide the 
consolation of religion to boys in need of it; whether it was to 
visit the sick during the awful influenza plague that stalked through 
our camps; whether it was to cheer the boys on their way overseas 
and to welcome back the wounded; whether it was to go right in 
under the shells and their taking care of the men, meeting the risks 
the fighters met and succoring the fighters when they fell, giving 
them, in the face of enemy fire, the little comforts that mean so 
very much in a fighting man's primitive mode of life — the Knights 
were there, in full force, every minute of the time. A K. of C. 
secretary left his habits of sleep and restfulness in his civilian 
clothes at home. He became a soldier of succor the moment he 
entered K. of C. service. 

ALSO IN PEACE. 
But the record achieved by the Knights in this war, splendid 
and permanent though it may be, is by no means the sum of their 
accomplishment. Through their eighteen hundred odd Councils 
throughout this country and Canada they have always aided the sick, 
helped the widowed and orphaned and stimulated patriotic thought 
and action everywhere. They have endowed one of the greatest seats 
of learning in America — the Catholic University of America, and 
with foresight and liberality they have combated, by a system of 
free, educational lectures delivered by highly qualified men, what- 
ever forces of disorder and anarchy, of militan.t socialism, showed 
their threatening faces above the turmoil of our civil and industrial 
life. The Knights of Columbus are a sound fraternal insurance 
society, they are a steadying influence in the society of the nation, 
for while they stand for social justice they are solidly opposed to 
irrational radicalism; they are truly American, through and through, 
carrying out in their every public act, the lesson taught by the 
gigantic spirit of the man whose name they wear, Christopher 
Columbus, the discoverer of the hemisphere that has given to God 
and the world the mightiest nation in recorded history. 



4 




WILLIAM J. McGIXLEY, 
Supreme Secretary. 



LAWRENCE 0. MURRAY, 
Overseas Commissioner for the Knights of Columbus, 
Former Comptroller United States Treasury. 



14 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



What I Saw in Europe 

By John B. Kennedy, 
Publicity Director Knights of Columbus War News Service. 

The writer recently returned from France, where he had an opportunity of 
getting many closeups of the American fighting man, and he returns with 
the verdict, substantiated by volumes of evidence, that the Doughboy con- 
siders sport the salvation of his many, long, waiting hours. Without base 
ball and boxing and the other manly means of competition, but especially 
those two forms of athletics, your sons and brothers and husbands on the 
other side would be a bored and disgruntled crowd. With base ball and 
boxing they are the cheerfullest bunch of watchful waiters or waiting 
watchers that the world has ever known. 

It is something, indeed, to be able to record that the grand old national 
pastime has been played on the banks of the Rhine. 

There are now about one hundred Knights of Columbus secretaries serving 
our boys in the Rhineland with all manner of athletic supplies. Up at Alt- 
weid, Remangen, Coblenz, Treves and in other historic cities, K. of C. club- 
houses are located, and each clubhouse serves as a sort of depot where the 
athletic equipment, besides the stores of K-C candy, cigarettes, stationery, 
etc., are stored. These clubhouses are also athletic headquarters for the 
boys forming units of the American Army of Occupation in these areas. 

It is strange how soccer has made a headway with the American troops. 
The Knights have sent over a thousand soccer balls abroad, in addition to 
something like five or six thousand American foot balls. The soccer balls 
have had a hard time at the feet of the boys. Although the game is not as 
widely played in the United States as the college style, it is probable that 
the returning boys will popularize it — they have certainly adopted it with 
zest abroad whenever they had the opportunity of doing so. 

There have been times, and many of them, when a base ball at the front 
stood emphatically for morale with a capital "M," and stories are told, 
which I, for one, do not doubt, that fractious German prisoners have, before 
now, been quelled by the sight of stout K-C base ball bats bearing the auto- 
graph of the renowned John Evers. Numerous and exciting are the base 
ball contests under K-C auspices between teams from different companies, 
battalions, regiments and divisions. They are a most important part of the 
general programme of diversion for our lads. 

And as for boxing, no sport is more popular with the men. Almost literally, 
they "eat it up." At the Cinema des Arts and the Salle Wagram, Paris, 
where the Knights conduct weekly boxing tournaments, the boys jam the 
house, applauding vociferously at the success of the buddies against the 
French poilus, while the French spectators, who are numerous though never 
a majority, cheer on their fighting compatriots. 

So successful has been the K-C boxing programme that American General 
Headquarters has notified the Knights that they are to have sole charge of 
all boxing with the A.E.F. A plan is now in operation, the result of which 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



15 



will be the holding of a great championship tournament — men of different 
weights from the various divisions of the A.E.F. competing for K. of C. 
trophies. 

There is, also, as a sort of piece de resistance of the K. of C. programme 
of outdoor sports for the men of the A.E.F. , the great regatta to be held 
on the Seine. Rowers of the Army and Navy will compete for K-C. trophies. 
The teams are being trained at time of writing by K-C experts such as 
Yarley. who won the world's sculling championship at the St. Louis world's 
fair. Johnson, the great oarsman, is also aiding in the production of the 
regatta which, if the great success it promises to be, will be repeated on 
the Rhine for the benefit of the boys forming the body of the Army of 
Occupation. 

All told, the Knights are just as eager to give the boys all the athletic 
nourishment they demand as the boys are to get it. And it pays. German 
prisoners told the writer that our boys went through a worse hell than they 
would ever have endured. The French and British, who, after a four years' 
strain, are not given to admiring anybody very much, will certainly say 
something of the same kind. And what's the reason? Here it is. The 
great battles in France were won on the backlots of America, and the 
Knights of Columbus, by providing means for the boys to continue their 
national games abroad, have contributed in no small way to the victory that 
belongs most especially to those boys. And by providing a constant stream 
of athletic supplies, the Knights are keeping the boys contented with their 
lot as sentinels over the humiliated but rather fractious enemy. 




EDWARD L. HEARN, 
Past Supreme Knight and Overseas Commissioner, 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



Hints From Experience 

The writer has been asked to set down his own experiences as a 
welfare athletic man for the purpose of helping- out the K. of C. 
man who is doing- this sort of work both "over there" and here. 
Let me state at the start that I do not set down my own ways of 
working as the only means of accomplishing the end, because I've 
found that about every man who tackles this sort of a job gets 
results by different means. There are, however, some very clear 
facts that one must know in order to put the thing over in a big 
way. He who neglects them, while he may succeed, would do ten 
times a bigger work had he played with these forces. 

When it came to winning the war it seems that Uncle Sam gave 
every man in the army and navy a definite job except the athletic 
welfare worker. Secretary Baker had only to gather, train and 
send overseas a huge army. General Pershing had only to lick the 
Huns with this, the flower of our youth. Of course, there were 
various details to be worked out by others, men who were generals, 
colonels, majors, captains, lieutenants, non-coms, high privates and 
buck privates, each concerned with making the Huns hors du combat, 
as the French say it, but on the whole each man had a clearcut 
and definite piece of work to do. When it came to the welfare 
athletic secretary nobody outlined his work. 

It was a mighty g-ood thing this has been the case. It put the 
job of finding his job up to the welfare worker. That he made 
good is self-evident, and that he made good under the conditions 
he played under — that of a civilian without military standing, deal- 
ing with the most serious professional men in the world — goes to 
show that the welfare worker was as much interested in his definite 
and real task, that of helping to win the war, as were the military 
and naval men themselves. 

The welfare athletic man who first tackled the proposition; indeed, 
those who still contemplate tackling it in its present state, can only 
be compared to a corporation with a Delaware charter — in a position 
to do about anything in the world. This broad field opened the 
way for a big piece of work. That this opportunity was grasped is 
common knowledge. In fact, so splendidly did the welfare worker 
grasp his opportunity that the job assumed definite form. Others 
could -make ordnance, or build ships, or control food and fuel or 
make war, but no one else could manufacture morale like the wel- 
fare boy. He became the cheer-up kid of the army. He still is, 
and he is needed about as much today as he was when the Yanks 
were turning the tide in France last July. 

There has been a good deal of nonsense written about getting 
close to the men, the privates and non-coms. "Personal contact" is 
all right in its way, and far be it from me to protest against the 
idea, but my own experience, and that of many others, has been 
that the more you cultivate the officers, especially those controlling 
athletics and morale, the bigger the job becomes. Let me illustrate: 

Suppose you are a crack base ball player. You can do one of two 
things. You can develop a fine nine that will furnish a lot of 
entertainment, or you can also get the idea of every unit playing 
base ball through military co-operation. In short, you can either 
amuse most of the men by "big league" games once or twice a 
week, or you can, by gaining military co-operation through the 
officers, combine with this base ball for every unit in camp. True, 
the "big league" contests will likely get your name in the papers 
and the other won't. But the other part is the first big job in the army. 

Co-operation with the military authorities is the way to put 
things over in a big way. There is no doubt of this, even though 
some may not agree. We are instructed in this work to utilize the 
leisure time of the soldiers. That has been mostly at night and 
Saturdays and Sundays. But with peace at hand there is more 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



19 



leisure time than ever and less to keep the boys on edge. Nearly 
every doughboy in France wants to come home. The sight of the 
Statue of Liberty will thrill him as did nothing- else but the signing 
of the armistice. Consequently cheering- him up is a big- job. 

Now, we may work among- these fellows, doing- "personal contact" 
at all their leisure moments, starting- games and all that, but why 
not work among the officers, the athletic officers as well, and cover 
the whole thing through military channels? Proceeding by this 
means does not mean proceeding by military order. But the com- 
manding officer can suggest such and such being done during the 
leisure time of the men, and, by making it interesting enough, it 
will result in 100 per cent, efficiency. Again let me illustrate: 

During the recent "flu" quarantine, when we had over 10 per cent, 
of our men very sick, and the morgue in camp overflowing, we were 
very much limited in our athletic activities. Just a few informal 
sports were permitted. The boys were as blue and downhearted as 
it is ever permitted a soldier to get. We got the C. O.'s ear and 
changed that camp within a week. Put on big athletic meets, mass 
competition between companies, holding the preliminaries each Sat- 
urday and the finals each Sunday afternoon. The thing went so 
big that as many as five thousand men competed each day. The 
bands were out, too, and by the time we were running the last 
meet everybody in camp was out to play or participate. It was a 
big, cheer-up affair all the way through. But without official aid 
very little would have been accomplished. 

To accomplish the athletic job from a welfare standpoint one 
needs more personality than athletic experience. The likable fellow 
who is capable as well has it all over the athletic star who has 
nothing else to pull him along. Indeed, it has been a question in 
my mind if the athletic star is the man for this army job. They 
don't think right about it. A man who is a crack foot ball coach 
and who tackles this job can see little else than foot ball. Now, 
while he may be worth $10,000 a year as a college coach and while 
he may produce a championship army team while doing welfare 
work and get unlimited publicity in doing so, it is quite likely that 
in teaching several dozen soldiers something of foot ball he has 
neglected sport for the thousands not on the team. 

Major sport teams are all right in college, but in this he-man's 
army of Uncle Sam the doughboy is not in a position to travel with 
the team to see its games and, furthermore, he wants a little of the 
sport himself. 

My own experience in handling twenty-odd welfare directors in 
one cantonment is that the fellow who has the personality and who 
was either a groceryman or a furniture dealer or a landscape archi- 
tect always did the job better than the trained physical director or 
coach. It seems to be that he weighs one sport against another 
and sees no great advantage in either. He will push volley ball as 
much as he will base ball or foot ball, and he has time to start 
games of quoits, soccer or any of the other numerous activities that 
will interest the many. He's busy on everything. The average 
American athletic coach is a specialist and above the ordinary 
games which are full of fun for the soldier. He can't see them. 
That's all there is to it. 

A mistake a welfare athletic man may often make is in trying to 
do too much. One thing at a time is the best rule. Get a plan well 
thought out in advance, then put it on paper concisely and intelli- 
gently — if you can chart it like an efficiency engineer, so much the 
better — and have it all ready when you tackle the athletic officer of 
your unit. Make it snappy. That saves him time and he likes that. 
But don't start anything else until you have the first thing under 
way. If you do, you will be like the choir leader who began worry- 
ing about the next hymn when in the middle of the first one. You'll 
be a discord, to say the least. The competent man will find that 
the athletic officer will be his best friend and steadfast supporter, 



J. MEYERS, GEO. F. MONAGHAN, 
Iowa. W. D. DWYER, Michigan. 
Minnesota. 

J. McGRAW, W. F. FOX, 

Oklahoma. Indiana. 



A GROUP OF SUPREME DIRECTORS. 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



Z- 21 



and common sense and diplomacy will smooth his way when athletic 
reputations without those adjuncts will fail miserably. 

Another thing- to remember in the mass athletic programme is not 
to make it severe. While we read much of mass athletics no one 
has yet produced a system, even in the army, whereby all men 
become good athletes. The mass athletic programme in the army 
has been built up on fun and amusement, the two factors, which 
more than any other, dominate army sport, especially at this time. 

Indeed, the job today is to furnish amusement more than any- 
thing- else. How that is to be done is indefinite. Your job, Mr. 
Athletic Secretary, is to solve the detail of it. You are a morale 
manufacturer, speaking in a dignified way, but, in the language of 
the men you are to work with, you will be the "Cheer-up Kid" if 
you make good. How, when and by what means, you alone can 
solve. The rules are simple and the field big, but whatever else 
you are, be a gentleman and play the game square. Don't go forth 
with the idea that the officer, or the general, or whoever you may 
bump into, is a better man than you are, as some folks have done. 
Show him you are a fine fellow, not only willing, but able, to make 
good. And when you have made good, you will carry mig-hty 
pleasant memories with you up to the time you, too, "go West," 
where we all hope to continue those priceless good times we once 
enjoyed with the boys "over there" who will not come marching 
home with Johnny. 




OLYMFIC* GAMES AT STOCKHOLM. SWEDEN, 1912. 
Three American Flag-s raised in the Stadium when American athletes scored 
first, second and third in 100 Meters, S00 Meters, 16-lb. Shot, 110 Meters. 
Hurdle, and Pole Vault. 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



23 



Jim Sullivan's Dope 

By William G. Shepherd, 
Author of "The Scar that Tripled," etc. 

(Reproduced by permission from "Everybody's Magazine," November, 1918.) 



I spent several hours, one Sun- 
day recently, in my old seat in 
the press stand at the Olympic 
stadium in Stockholm. 

From that same seat, in the 
summer of 1912 — in the golden 
age before the war — I had seen 
the best athletes of the earth 
win the highest honors their 
world had to give. 

The stadium is thronged, tier 
upon tier, this afternoon, just as 
it was during the great events of 
1912. Canopies of royal purple 
shelter, in the same old royal 
box, the same royal family and 
the same gaunt, gracious king. 
Boys and girls, in thousands, 
selected from every corner of 
Sweden for the charm of their 
voices as well as for their physi- 
cal beauty, move about in a be- 
wildering phantasmagoria of color, each clad as some wild 
flower of Sweden, singing a vast and beautiful chorus. 

The occasion is a benefit entertainment for Swedish orphans. 

But I can not see the children clearly; their great, sweet 
song is murmurous and distant, for, as I sit here, I am over- 
whelmed by ghosts. 



Jim Sullivan's Dope Filters 
Into Germany 
"The quality of the men must 
be characterized as remarkable. 
They carry themselves well and 
are well developed, and from 
eighteen to twenty-eight years 
of age. Only a few of the men 
are pure American by race. 
The majority of them are sons 
of foreign parents. These half- 
Americans, most of whom were 
born in America and have never 
before seen Europe, express, 
without hesitation, purely Amer- 
ican sentiments." — Report of 
German officer to German In- 
telligence Department, after in- 
terviewing American prisoners 
taken at Bouresches in June. 



The Olympic Games of 1912 

Here, in these seats about me, had been gathered press cor- 
respondents of all the countries of civilization. There, in that 
seat, for instance, is the ghost of the bewhiskered and literary 
Frenchman from the big Paris daily; there is the shade of 
that plump, linguistic reporter from Holland, who stood ready 
to serve as interpreter between any two correspondents of 
any known tongues on earth; there is the hulking ghost of 
that sporting editor from Berlin who grunted noisily whenever 
a German was beaten; and here are clustered the shadows 
of the reporters from the London dailies who tried in vain 
to analyze each British setback. 

Here is the ghost of the likable reporter from Athens, whose 
French was so Grecian, and who was the proudest man of 
us all because, some twenty or thirty centuries ago, his country 
had inaugurated these illustrious games. 

All about me were ghosts of those trim Boy Scouts of 
8weden, who acted as our messenger-boys, and especially of 
the little blond chap who used to stand proudly beside my 
seat, ready to run with my messages to the nearby telegraph 
booth and start them off on their journey under the seas to 
the United States. He had caught the romance of journalism — 
that boy. 



24 



SPAIiDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



And out on the track and in the infield — there are the 
grimmest ghosts of them all. The singing- flower-clad children 
can not lay them for me. Over there, on the green grass, 
Alvah Richards, from our "Wild West," wearing- a stretched 
sweater and a merry widow straw hat part of the time, hum- 
bles into the dust, at the running- high jump, a German officer 
named Liesche, the haughtiest German that came to Stockholm 
Out there, in the center of the field, are the ghosts of those 
trimly clad German teams, marching- shoulder to shoulder, fifty 
©f them, a hundred of them, each man looking- like all the 
others, each man walking-, striding-, jumping, spreading- legs 
and arms, waving his members, throwing out his chest, just 
like everybody else — massed formation in sport, with no indi- 
viduality, no personal responsibility, except to see that you do 
your best to win the coveted cup by crushing- your individuality 
and doing- everything- as everybody else does it. I remember 
how, even in those days, when everybody thought a German 
was all rig-ht, we used to laugh at the machine-like movements 
of those competing Germans and wonder how a man could 
prize a cup that was given for such banalities. The day was 
to come when we would shudder at what we laughed at then. 

Here, at this turn on the track, Braun, the German runner, 
claimed that an American had fouled him and raised an uproar 
that disgusted the twenty-five thousand onlookers. 

Here, also, swinging through the masses of the singing 
children, goes the ghost of that beaten but unbeatable solitary 
Russian, who, being outdistanced by the champion walkers 
of the world, had found himself three laps behind at the end 
of the race and insisted on finishing the course, thoug-h for 
many minutes he walked alone and unashamed before the gaze 
of thousands of amused people. 

Ghosts 

Here, at this corner of the field, is a group of excited 
g-hosts. It is the day when Kolehmainen, from Helsingfors, 
astounded the world by defeating the greatest runners that 
had come to Sweden. The Finnish flag has oeen run up on 
the honor-pole and a group of Russian officials had hurried 
down onto the track and insisted that this must be counted 
a Russian victory; the Russian flag must be run up; if the 
officials of the course care to do so they may raise a Finnish 
pennant beneath it. I see again that Finnish flag come down 
and again I see that flag of a proud czar mount in its stead; 
and then the Finnish emblem crawls up, shamefacedly, be- 
neath it. How the grand stands cheer, in sympathy, for the 
Finns! 

I wonder where they are now, those ponderous, powerful 
Russians? 

The memories of those first days slip by me; those days 
before we knew the boys from the United States could con- 
quer the athletes of the world. And then there grows again 
In my heart the pride that came to us all, as the American list 
of victories began to grow. 

Comes to me again, my Boy Scout messenger with a cable- 
gram from my editor in the United States, which reads like 
this: 

Please cable 500 words explaining- recent successes 
of Americans and telling whether or not America will 
win. 

That telegram had been too much for me. I was not an 
expert at athletics. On my trip across the Atlantic on the 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



25 



Finland with those two hundred and fifty life-filled American 
boys and a score of clean-cut, upstanding- American men who 
were leaders in amateur athletics in the United States, I had 
discovered that there was an inwardness to the institution of 
amateur athletics, a world of past records and data as to 
human physical possibilities, of which I was ignorant. And so 
I had decided not to write my five-hundred-word cablegram 
hastily, but to have expert advice. 



Why We Won Then 

And there comes an evening, in a grove in the beautiful 
Djurgarden. I am dining with James E. Sullivan, the chief of 
American amateur athletics. In our evening clothes, wearing 
such decorations as some of us possess, we sit in the white- 
ness of the northern light until it grows chilly. The waiters, 
after the Swedish summer-garden fashion, bring us huge, thick 
blankets which they throw about our shoulders. And there 
seated next to Jim Sullivan, his glistening shirt front and a 
small jeweled stone therein throwing out furtive rays from 
the cavelike recesses of his half-folded blanket, I put to him 
the questions that have come to me over the cable: Will 
America win; and why? 

"Can't you write an answer to that, young fellow?" he asks 
me with a note of surprise in his voice. 

"No, No!" I answer impatiently. "I'm no sporting editor. 
This is all new to me." 

"But sport hasn't anything to do with it," he says. "This 
Isn't a study in athletics. It's a problem in Americanism. 
I've been at four of these international Olympic games and 
I know just what is going to happen at this one. It has 
always been the same way. It's , my dope and you can't g-o 
wrong on it. We aren't through the woods, yet; there's two 
weeks of fighting before us, but no matter how things go, 
no matter what happens, we'll win; listen: 



"American Blood" 

"You take those boys we have on our boat" — he points out 
through the trees to the harbor where the Finland, lights 
out, boys asleep, swings at anchor — "and study their names. 
How many different nationalities do you suppose they repre- 
sent? We've got Americans of German blood who are going 
to beat Germans from Germany. We've got Italians on our 
team who are going to beat Italians from Italy. We've g"ot 
boys of English blood who are going to beat Englishmen, 
and boys of French blood who will outrun or outjump their 
brothers from France. Why, we've g-ot men from almost every 
nationality in the world in our American team who'll beat 
fellows of their own blood from Europe. 

"There's no such thing as American blood, yet," continues 
Sullivan, expressing an idea that was new to most of us in 
1912; an idea that only an Olympic contest could bring- to 
light. "Maybe we'll g-et an American blood, in time. Jim 
Thorpe, the Indian, from Carlisle, is the only original American 
in the whole team. Our boys are all of the blood of Europe. 

"Now, here's my dope: These boys on our team are the 
sons of parents who had nerve and backbone. Their parents 
wanted something more in life than Europe had to offer them. 
And so they tore up their home anchorages and went to the 
United States. It takes a good man or woman to do that; 



26 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 

healthier and more ambitious than their neighbors. Men and 
women like that are going to have fine children; ambitious 
children with lots of red, good blood and brimming health. 
They'll be better children than the average run of their cousins 
back in Europe. 

"That's why we'll win these Olympic games, this time and 
every time, until we cease to attract the pick of the folk 
from Europe. We'll win the games; it was all decided years 
ago, by the fathers and mothers of these boys of ours. 

"No matter how things go, no matter what turn things may 
take or what surprises we meet, the percentages are all in our 
favor. We won't lose. It's all a matter of mathematics, from 
now on. That's my dope." 

And in the white northern night, in far away Sweden, I 
see America for the first time as it really is. 

The Olympic games, that were to have been held in that 
great stadium on the outskirts of Berlin, in 1916, are being 
held in French and Flemish fields and in Italian mountains. 
These are Olympic games that Jim Sullivan, who piloted 
American teams to victory, through three Olympiads, will not 
attend, for he is dead. 



Why We'll Win Now. 

Our Olympic team has gone to Europe, and Jim Sullivan's 
dope is good and sure. His confidence of victory was not a 
vague optimism; it was based on a mathematical calculation 
of how strong our boys were, and how hard they would try. 

Our confidence ought to be like his. 

The result of this war is not a thing to be decided in the 
future. It has been decided in the past. Through all the de- 
parted decades of building and growing, through all those 
years when great tides of strong, fresh blood were pouring 
into our veins past the Statue of Liberty, we were deciding 
it; we were creating something too precious to lose. 

"No matter how things go, no matter what turns things 
may take, no matter what surprises we meet, the percentages 
are all in our favor." 

By Jim Sullivan's dope we can do the job; all we have to 
do is to go ahead and do it. 

[Since the foregoing was written, the war has ended; how 
and where, we all know. "Jim Sullivan's Dope" was true to 
form.] 



JOHN J. EYEKS, 

Former Chicago and Boston National League player, in the uniform he wore 
while serving the Knights of Columbus in France. 

Photo by International Film Service. 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



29 



Value of Athletic Training in the Army 

By James S. Mitchel 

Mr. Mitchel is known to all followers of track and field athletics in 
America during the last quarter of a century for his prowess in the weight 
throwing events, the discus and the javelin, his record for the 56-lb. weight 
standing for many years. Although known to most persons only as a weight 
thrower, Mr. Mitchel started his career in athletics as a sprinter, and his 
intimate association with the leading competitors and trainers of America 
and Europe entitles his instructions to more than passing interest. Mr. 
Mitchel has been a member of Olympic teams, represented the New York 
Athletic Club in national championships and is a student of athletics. He 
is a journalist and in addition to his newspaper work has contributed to the 
literature of sport in many publications. 

The value of light training- to the soldier and sailor has never been 
more forcibly brought home to the Army and Navy authorities than 
in the late war, and while in future there may be no necessity of a 
set enforcement of routine calisthenics in schools, colleges, and 
military organizations, it would not be a bad plan to introduce 
a series of lig-ht exercises which would help the development of a 
quick, flexible, muscular condition among the youth of the country. 
Prior to the outbreak of the war the experts agreed that, the day 
of the cavalry horse, and, of course, the cavalryman, the lancer, 
and, incidentally, the infantryman, had passed; and that all big" 
future battles would be fought from the aeroplane and with the 
long range high explosive guns. To a certain extent the decision 
was brought about by these new implements of warfare, but a glance 
backward at some of the critical moments reveals the fact that the 
cavalryman, the lancer and the man with the piece of cold steel 
in a pair of strong, active arms, and with an accurate eye to pick 
out the soft spots on the opposing line, were of wonderful use. 
For instance, in the first battle of the Marne — which by the way 
might be put down as Germany's Waterloo — it was the English 
cavalry — all polo players, with well developed sword arms — that 
mowed swaths of the German ranks to pieces, and although the 
Britishers paid a heavy toll, when the truth is known, they saved 
the day. Again, at^ Cambrai, and still later, it is worth while to 
remember what the^American cavalry did once more on the bloody 
banks of the Marne when they made ribbons of the much vaunted 
Prussian Guard, and really created the turning point of the war, 
when the horse came into play again. The wonderful work of our 
Marines and subsequently of the Rainbow Division at the Ourcq 
River and Chateau Thierry are forceful instances that there is 
still a lot to do for the man of small arms, not to speak of the 
airmen. 

Here, it might be remarked, that no fighting man needs to be In 
better shape physically than the birdman, and very early in life 
should begin with a series of exercises which will tend to strengthen 
every part of his anatomy. It is absolutely necessary that the 
limbs and every part of the flier should have the widest and freest 
range of motion. An equably free circulation of the blood is in- 
dispensable to the flier, for this contributes a sound stomacn, which 
at all times means a perfect balance of the entire muscular system, 
and an absence of vertigo, dizziness and other minor ills which 
have caused so many accidents in the past. One thing to be kept in 
mind by the roamer of the clouds is that he should never for a 
moment indulge in any exercises which will in the least degree 
tend to make him muscle-bound around the shoulders or chest. 

The principle of all military training of the new order should be 
a vigorous elastic condition of the muscular and nervous systems, 
and here is where the superiority of light gymnastic exercises be- 
comes more in evidence. The method which exercises the entire 



30 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 

frame without creating 1 any tiresome detail in the mind is fast 

working" its way among- those who are interested in athletic and 
military training-. The old methods were based upon building- up a 
man with big- shoulders and big- inelastic muscles, who was, of 
course, of no use in an active way. He might look well posing for 
a moving- picture camera, or in front of a powerful projecting 
light, but all the world cannot be posers, and other fancy men of 
muscle. An instance of how utterly foolish is this class of muscle 
building: was shown at one of the physical culture shows held 
some years ago in New York. In one of the events which made 
up an all-around contest the man who subsequently won the posing 
tried to g-et over a jump somewhere around four feet high. The 
effort caused him such a contortion that he fell prone on his back, 
bringing- down the cross-bar with him. Then, what was still more 
pitiable, he had to be helped to his feet, or, in other words, he 
was so muscle-bound that he could not arise without assistance. 
Of what use would such a class of man be in the field of battle? 
The chances are that if he was forced to undergo a sustained 
effort for fifteen minutes he might drop dead. It was with much 
of this same 'class of muscle-clad warriors that the Kaiser had 
planned to conquer the world, but the idea proved a signal failure. 

Still our system here can be improved by the institution of a 
series of light exercises which did so much for Belgium, France, 
and England. These exercises need not be made compulsory, but 
could be introduced into the schools on much the same plan as track 
and field sports. For instance, half an hour exercise daily with the 
Grecian hand rings, the wand, or the newest of all, the sandbag; 
which has become greatly in vogue abroad, will fit a youngster in 
a very short time for any sort of military training. The sandbag 
especially, tossed from arm to arm, will pull his shoulders and ribs 
Into a healthy and natural position, thereby giving- the lungs and 
heart plenty of space to perform their natural functions. Every 
young- man possessed of the average amount of vitality should in- 
dulge in some form of field sport — base ball, tennis, foot ball — 
games which require accuracy, courage, presence of mind, quick 
hand, and with eye, and, in fact, the complete movements of the 
human frame. 

Of the two great points to be considered in the recommendation 
of athletics and calisthenics to the army and navy is the choice 
between light and heavy exercises. Flexibility and elasticity are 
to be commended as being- most desirable. Of course, no man, or 
even woman, can be strong to an extent without being flexible. 
One has but to observe the tiger in his cage, and while he gives 
no sign whatever of bunchy muscles, he bears all the supreme 
evidence of flexibility backed by unlimited strength, with all the 
requirements that go with ease of movement. It may seem ridicu- 
lous enough that a man who continually juggles a two-pound 
dumb-bell will acquire more elasticity and natural strength than 
the great bulk of humanity who toys with a bell weighing fifty 
pounds or more. The latter is of the carthorse type, and is of no 
use but to lift great burdens. Nobody ever heard of a truck horse 
being of use as a cavalry horse or charger and the same rule applies 
to the man. 

If a man is to be of use in the army or navy he will gain more 
speed and accuracy by playing base ball, foot ball or tennis, throwing 
the javelin, the light hammer or hurling the bombs than by the 
pursuit of all the known heavy gymnastics. Running and walking 
are cheap exercises and within the scope of all, yet they contribute 
more to the stamina of the brain and nerves than all the heavy 
movements ever invented. It was the man who could run and 
jump and do quick active work, that did the big things for our 
side in this war. 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBBAET. 



31 



'•100 Up" Exercise— A Remarkable Aid to 
Athletic Training 

By W. G. George 

The following- article on the "100 up" exercise was so highly 
thought of by the late Mr. James E. Sullivan that he included it in 
his book on Marathon Running, with the following- introduction: 

"One of the best books ever written on the subject of athletic 
training- is that by W. G. George, of England, the world's most re- 
markable and famous runner, and it is with pleasure that they are 
reproduced here for the benefit of those in America who have 
not had the pleasure of reading Mr. Georg-e's book." 

"Now I come to the part of my system of training which I 
consider had more to do with my success in competition than 
anything- else. I am equally confident that when training for 
health's sake or for the prevention of breakdowns, there is no better 
exercise than this which I have christened '100 up.' Some of the 
advantages of this splendid exercise briefly are these: The short 
time and the little space required for its practice; it brings into 
play the entire muscular system; the heart and lungs are reasonably 
exercised; the reduction of adipose tissue, especially that designated 
fatty inside; the particular strengthening- of the muscles of the 
back and abdomen; the non-necessity of stripping- (although it is 
better to do so when time permits), and the fact that any shoes 
or boots and even stocking-ed feet will serve. The '100 up' can be 
practiced on any ground floor, the space required being- not more 
than six feet square. 

"A. — Preliminary practice for preparing- the leg muscles for the 
more severe strain required of them for the '100 up' exercise. 

"Draw two parallel lines on the ground, eighteen inches long- 
and eig-ht inches apart. Place one foot on the middle of each line. 
Stand flat-footed, the feet lying- perfectly straight on the lines. 
The arms should be held naturally, loosely and nearly straig-ht, 
with a slig-ht forward inclination, the body being upright and 
straight (Plate No. 1). Now raise one knee the height of the hip 
(Plate No. 2) — that is precisely the same way as in walking-, only 
the knee action is higher, and bring-s the foot back and down again 




to its original position, touching- the line lightly with the ball of 
the foot; repeat the raising- and lowering- of the leg* ten to thirty- 
times, and repeat with the other leg-. Practically, this amounts 
to balancing 1 the body on one leg- while exercising" with the other. 
Care must be taken that the knee comes to the level of the hip 
every time. This may not be found easy at first, but practice will 
soon bring- about the desired result. Great attention must be paid 
to keeping- the body uprig-ht and the leg-s and feet quite straig-ht 
while exercising". Practice slowly until the necessary balance is 
acquired and the exercise accomplished with ease. Otherwise the 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



33 



'100 up' will be found unsatisfactory. Having- thoroughly mastered 
the correct form, the student may turn his attention to — 

"B. — The major or '100 up' exercise. 

"Before giving" particulars, I should like again to impress the 
necessity of maintaining form in every practice. My advice is, 
directly the correct form is lost, stop. Beginners should start the 
major exercise slowly and on no account strain or overexert them- 
selves. Nearly all breakdowns and failures are the result of hurried 
and injudicious training, or fast work while the system is unprepared 
for it. On the other hand, slow, well considered, steady practice, 
rarely, I might also say never, is injurious; while breakdowns are 
practically unknown among those who start their training slowly, 
gradually increasing distance, time or pace as the heart, lungs 
and muscles grow accustomed to the strain which is put upon them. 

"Prepare lines as for the preliminary practice. Stand on them 
as before, except that the body must be balanced on the ball of 
the foot, the heels being clear of the ground, the head and body 
being tilted very slightly forward, and the hands down by the side. 
Now spring from the toe, bringing the knee to the level of the hip 
(Plate No. 3) as in the slower exercise — letting the foot fall back 
to its original position; repeat with the other leg, and continue 
raising and lowering the legs alternately. This action is exactly 
that of running, except that instead of the legs moving forward, 
the foot drops into its original position on the ground. 

"The main point is, Correct Action. The knees must be brought 
at each stride up to the level of the hip, while, as the knee comes 
down, the foot should not be carried further backwards than level 
with the back. When the knee is brought higher than the hip, 
the body is thrown out of its perpendicular backwards (Plate No. 

4) ; when the foot is thrown out behind further than level with 
the back, the body is correspondingly forced forward (Plate No. 

5) . Either is a hindrance to form and pace — the two objects striven 
for by those who train, whether for health or competition. All 
such will, undoubtedly, derive more benefit from doing their prac- 
tice correctly than the reverse. While doing the '100 up' use the 
arms as in running — i. e., hold them almost at full length and 
swing them half way across the chest, forward and backward a few 
inches behind the back as each stride is taken. A good practice 
is to stand still on the lines and use the arms as in running, 
putting plenty of force into the work, so as to loosen the muscles 
of the shoulders, and make the upper part of the frame active and 
pliable, in order that it may act in perfect union with the legs 
when the '100 up' is performed. 

"I advise nobody to attempt more than twenty up at the start, 
ten for each leg. Very few can manage even so many in form 
at the outset; but practice makes a world of difference, and once 
the twenty has been accurately accomplished the number may be 
steadily increased. Let me warn you, however, against a too rapid 
progress. This may result in a strain, or what is even more likely, 
a loss of correct form. The knees will not be parallel to the straight 
line or the body will be dragged forward. Do not expect to get 
true action in a moment. Probably the first few attempts will be 
disappointments. Be not, however, discouraged. Keep steadily on, 
and the correct action will come sure enough. Once proficient in 
that you can work gradually to the '100 up,', and by Judicious varia- 
tion of pace and number, according to the distance of the race you 
desire to compete in, you will get as fit as you can possibly desire. 

"Finally, '100 up' stands unrivalled as an aid to training for 
walking, running, cycling, rowing, boxing, foot ball and cricket, 
and, in fact, every kind of sport; while for general health's sake 
it is absolutely the best" . 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 35 



Competitive Events for Large Numbers 

The descriptions of the following races have been contributed by- 
Mr. M. P. Halpin, chairman committee on athletics of the New York 
Athletic Club. The latter organization, the leading- body of its kind 
in the United States, withdrew its teams from representative athletic 
competition as soon as America entered the war and devoted its 
activities to promoting- athletic competition among the soldiers and 
sailors stationed at the various forts and naval bases in the metro- 
politan district. The prizes in a number of events were donated by- 
members of the club, who in many cases had won the trophies in 
former years themselves and took this means of showing their 
patriotism by contributing their highly cherished emblems of victory 
for such a worthy cause. In addition, the club made a specialty of 
equipping service teams with base ball and foot ball paraphernalia, 
and also army transports, practically every ship in the latter service 
leaving New York being the recipient of medicine balls and other 
equipment suitable for use while at sea. 



MEDICINE BALL RACE. 

The medicine ball race consists of a competition of teams, made 
up, usually, of ten to twenty men on a team. The number of 
teams is unlimited. The ordinary medicine ball is used, although a 
basket ball or soccer foot ball can be substituted. The members of 
a team line up, one behind the other, not too close, with their legs 
spread apart, to allow the ball to roll freely between. All con- 
testing teams are lined up, with the captain, or No. 1, on the mark 
and the individual members behind him, as previously noted. The 
contesting teams are spaced about 10 feet apart, or with room 
enough for a runner to run freely. At the report of the starter's 
pistol the first man on the line rolls the ball between the arched 
legs of his team mates, who help its progress as it tends to slacken 
in speed by tapping it with their hands. Every man is not obliged 
to touch it, however. As the ball reaches the last man on the line, 
he picks it up and runs with it to the head of the line — each mem- 
ber of the team moving back one space, so that the new man may 
toe the starting line — and rolls the ball as the first man did. This 
action is repeated until each member of the team has had a turn at 
rolling the ball. When the captain, by this process, has reached 
the last position on the line and receives the ball he runs with it 
to a line — 5 yards is enough — in front of the original starting line. 
The first man to cross the finish line, of course, wins. If the ball 
should escape from between a man's legs it must be brought back 
to the point from which it left the line and rolled through from 
that point. 

Instead of rolling between the legs, the medicine ball may be 
passed overhead from one to the other, and the procedure followed 
as noted in previous paragraph. 

As each team entered is going through the same performance, 
the excitement becomes intense as the competition nears the end, 
and care must be exercised to see that no mistake is made in 
picking the winner. It is well to have individual judges to pick 
the men who finish in the various positions, the judges sighting 
along the finish line as they would for a regulation running race. 



GUN (OR FLAG) RELAY. 

Teams may be made up of twenty men each, lined up behind each 
other on opposite sides of the field at a distance of 60 yards — more 
or less — the odd number, on one side, even numbers on the other 



36 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 

("odd" and "even" numbers are mentioned here that the explanation 
may be clearer; the runners do not have to wear numbers). No. 1 
starts across the open space separating- the two teams of his side, 
and runs around the last man of the opposite group (the even num- 




bers), coming- up to No. 2, who is standing- at the head of his line, 
to whom he hands the rifle. No. 2 then runs across and around 
back of the odd numbers, coming- up to and handing- the rifle to 
No. 3. Each runner, as soon as he has finished his run, takes his 
place at the end of the line where he finished, so that eventually 
the odd and even numbers find themselves on the opposite sides of 
the open space from which they were originally lined up. This 
method of progression is followed until No. 20 has the rifle and 
does his tour. When he has finished, the race is ended, and if he 
was fortunate enough to finish first, his side wins. To facilitate 
the progress of the runner around his lined-up team mates, the 
latter grasp each other by the waist and keep as close as possible, 
to lessen the distance that has to be run around them. At some 
of the cantonments on a field day it was not unusual to see as 
many as fifty teams — a thousand men — in such a contest at one 
time. 

Instead of two groups of one team, the relay is sometimes run 
with one group, the men running- around a post or a man stationed 
at the proper distance from the starting line. Instead of a gun a 
small American flag may be carried, and sometimes in large entries 
a flag with the number of the team in good-sized figures is carried 
instead of a rifle or the national emblem to help distinguish the 
various teams. 

To enable the judges to keep track of the progress of the race, 
as the succeeding runners who have finished their run take 
their places at the foot of the line, and move along as each new 
man comes along, it is well to place a citizen or someone in a dis- 
tinguishing uniform at the foot of the line of odd numbers before 
the race begins. Each succeeding runner, whose race finishes at 
that side, takes his place behind this man. As the latter moves 
up toward the front the judges can distinguish more readily how 
the race is progressing. As No. 20 — if a twenty-man team — or 
whoever may be the last contestant of his group, finishes, he raises 
his hand as a signal, and thus the winner can be more easily deter- 
mined. 

EQUIPMENT RACE. 

A course of 60 yards, which distance may be varied as circum- 
stances dictate, is laid out, with marks at 60, 45, 30 and 15 yards, 
respectively. The contestants begin by removing their hats at the 
farthest mark, and if a rifle is included in the equipment, that is 
also deposited along with the hat. The blouse is next left at the 
45-yard point; leggings at 30 yards, and shoes at 15 yards. The 
competitors then lie on their backs at the starting line, their heads 
resting on the line. At the starter's pistol they arise, run to their 
shoes and put them on, the leggings, blouse and hat being acquired 
in order, after which each hurries back to the starting line, the 
winner being the first to cross the latter. Each piece of apparel 
must be put on properly and adjusted on the mark on which they 
lie. For instance, the shoes must be put on and properly laced 
before the competitor leaves the 15-yard mark. However, the race 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



37 



is not always to the swift, as immediately after finishing' each con- 
testant must line up for inspection, and if each article is not in its 
proper position and adjusted correctly on his person, the competitor 
is disqualified. The equipment race can be held indoors or outdoors. 



CENTIPEDE RACE. 

Another team race that furnishes unlimited fun is the "centipede" 
race. Ten men — although a team is not necessarily confined to that 
number — straddle a pole 16 to 20 feet long- and try to reach the 
finish line, usually 100 yards distant, first. The team reaching- the 
finish line first, with all its members in position, wins. When a 
man falls the team is not allowed to continue, with the possibility 
of the fallen man arising- and securing- his position a-straddle the 
pole, while his team mates keep on toward the goal. The team 
must stop and may not proceed until the man who fell is in posi- 
tion, under penalty of disqualification. 



CREW RACE. 

As many "crews" may compete as the space will permit. A crew 
usually consists of ten men and a coxswain. The distance is gen- 
erally 50 yards. The men line up at the starting point, one behind 
the other, each grasping the man in front of him firmly at the 
waist, with their backs toward the 50-yard line, the coxswain being- 
the only one facing- the line, or, in other words, exactly as they 
would be arranged in a boat. At the report of the starter's pistol 
the crews start and run backward as fast as possible, being- guided 
by the coxswain, "left" or "right," as may be necessary. When the 
line is crossed by the last man of the crew, they reverse the direc- 
tion and return, now facing- the starting line, but still retaining- 
their firm hold on each other's waists, the coxswain running along- 
side his crew. The first crew to cross the starting- line with its 
members in position wins. This race is productive of much fun and 
excitement, as, unless with a lot of practice, there are sure to be 
numerous tumbles. 

RESCUE RACE. 

This competition requires two men for each team. One strong-, 
fast man and a lighter one is the usual combination. The dis- 
tance is dependent upon the space at command, 60 yards being- a 
popular figure. The men who are to be "rescued" are arrang-ed at 
the desig-nated distance, and lie perfectly flat upon their backs, 
while the "rescuers" are lined up on the starting- line. At the re- 
port of the starter's pistol each contestant runs towards his partner, 
turns him over, face down, lifts him to his shoulders and returns to 
the starting- line. The first to cross the line with his burden wins. 
The rescued man is not allowed to assist in the slightest, but must 
remain perfectly helpless, otherwise disqualification will result. 

To make the event spectacular as well as competitive, it is cus- 
tomary to equip the men who are to take the role of the rescued 
with rifles. At the word, of command given by an officer back of 
the starting- line, the men go forward in skirmish formation, shoot- 
ing and reloading as they progress — or going- through the actions 
of doing- so — and finally ending- at the line agreed upon, when a 
volley is fired and they fall over helpless. The rescuing- competi- 
tors, who have been held on the starting- line, are not allowed to 
go forward until the singal is given by the starter's pistol. This 
event may be held indoors or outdoors. 

This race can be varied by using tw* men with a litter or 
stretcher to rescue the "wounded" man. 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



39 



CHARIOT RACE. 

The origin of the chariot race is due to Mr. George V. Brown, 
naval athletic director for the New England district, with head- 
quarters at the Charlestown Navy Yard. Mr. Brown, previous to 
the beginning of the war, was the manager of athletics for the 
Boston Athletic Association, which organization, like many other 
prominent organizations, has devoted its entire efforts and equip- 
ment to furthering the recreative interests of the soldier and sailor. 

For this purpose regulation snow toboggans are used, but boards 
may be substituted if toboggans are unobtainable. The course is 
preferably laid out on grass or on sand, where the "chariot" may 
have a smooth surface. By referring to the illustration an idea of 
the method of arrangement of an individual team may be obtained. 
The picture shows a contest on the noted Belmont Park race track, 
Long Island, N. Y., as one of the features of an aviation carnival 
given to raise money to furnish athletic equipment for that branch 
of the service. 

In this race six men originally started in the front row and four 
in the second row, about 5 feet separating the first row from the 
second, and the latter runners were about the same distance from 
the toboggan. The poles were about 16 feet long. The distance 
traversed was 100 yards for each team, from the starting post, A, 
to a turning post, B, f)0 yards distant. Five groups of men com- 
peted for each team, the total distance being 500 yards, and fifty- 
one men (including the charioteer) comprising the full team. Five 
teams ran abreast. Each relay team as it reached the starting line 
had to round post A before it could be relieved by the waiting relay 
team. In this particular contest, which wf,s held on the dirt track, 
officials were stationed on the starting line, and the outer turning 
point, represented posts A and B, respectively, for each team. 

The distance and the number of men comprising a team can be 
varied to suit circumstances. 



SLOW MULE RACE. 

This race affords unlimited fun. Each competitor rides his mule 
to the starting mark, and at the command, "Change mounts," dis- 
mounts and remounts on the animal next to him. For instance, if 
there are five entered in the race, No. 1 rider mounts No. 2 mule; 
No. 2 rider mounts No. 3 mule, and so on, No. 5 rider going" to 
No. 1 mule. 

The distance depends upon the space and view that will be best 
for the spectators. 

At the sound of the starter's pistol each rider urges the mule on 
which he is mounted to the utmost, with the hope that the mule on 
which he rode to the starting point will be last, as the slowest 
mule wins the race, and although riding another animal, the rider 
has not lost interest in his original mount, as the prize is won by 
the mule's performance, irrespective of what rider he may have in 
the contest. 

Where the actual animal cannot be obtained, human "mules" may 
be substituted, but in this case it is obvious that the race would 
have to be decided by the fastest runner winning, and there would 
be no object in changing mounts. A system of handicaps could be 
arranged, however, based upon the combined weights of rider and 
mount, and allowing possibly for any superior running ability that 
the "mules" may possess. This system would afford close contests 
and undoubtedly keen rivalry. 

The relay idea may be introduced in this "mule" race also, by 
having relays of "mules" at certain distances, the rider mounting" 
and dismounting as his "animal" carries him to each in succession. 



O 
P 

9 



w 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 41 

TUG OP WAR. 

Rules governing- tug of war will be found in the rules of the 
Amateur Athletic Union, printed elsewhere in this book. The num- 
ber of men on a side may comprise as many as fifty men, and 
sometimes, instead of sitting on the ground, the pull is a stand-up 
affair. 

OBSTACLE RACE. 

The make-up of this race depends largely upon local conditions. 
Crawl through a barrel, jump over a stream or hurdle, and similar 
impediments, which the ingenuity of the athletic director will cre- 
ate, will furnish a great deal of fun for both contestants and 
spectators. 

RULES FOR SACK RACING. 

The regulation sack is to be of strong burlap or similar material; 
its dimensions 36 inches wide throughout by 6 feet long, with a 
strong running cord at the top. 

Competitors must be tied securely in their sacks with arms inside 
and sacks drawn close about the neck, and must finish with arms 
inside, sacks still tied and intact as at start. 



RULES FOR THREE-LEGGED RACE. 

Competitors must be tied securely together at the thighs and 
ankles of one leg each. The fastenings at the thighs to be such as 
to keep them practically in contact. At the ankles there may be 
an interval not exceeding 4 inches. Competitors must finish with 
fastenings intact so far as these requirements provide. 



POTATO RACE. 

Upon the starting line there shall be placed for each competitor 
one receptacle not more than two feet in height, and having an 
opening not more than 36 inches in circumference. Upon a straight 
line drawn from said receptacle at right angles to the starting line 
shall be placed, at distances of two yards apart, eight light objects, 
ovoid in shape, having the greatest diameter not to exceed four 
inches and the smallest diameter not less than two inches. The 
first of said objects snail be placed two yards from the receptacle. 

Each competitor must pick up each of said objects singly and 
place the same in his own receptacle, and after having picked up 
one of said objects he must deposit it in the receptacle before pick- 
ing up another. After all the objects are placed in the receptacle 
the competitor must cross the finish line, which shall be five yards 
behind the receptacle. 

In handicap competitions, the marks shall be given from behind 
the starting line. 

RULES FOR WALL SCALING. 

Wall Scaling shall consist of a run of 50 yards and return over a 
course which includes, at its midpoint, a wall of smooth sides. 
This wall shall be 10 feet high, with a base and top of 6 and 4 
feet, respectively. It shall be of sections not more than 12 feet 
long, set 6, or more, inches apart, of which there shall be one for 
each team competing simultaneously; or, if several sections be built 
together, it shall be divided into sections of the foregoing length 
by bands, 4 inches in width, of a color in strong contrast to that of 
the remainder of the wall. 



42 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 

Teams shall consist of eight men equipped with the service rifle, 
or a dummy of not less weight, tog-ether with cartridge belt, bayo- 
net scabbard, bayonet, and wearing a service hat. The character of 
shoes worn is left optional with each team. 

Teams shall start as a squad (four) in double rank, cross the wall 
without touching any part of an adjoining section, and the arms 
shall not be thrown or dropped. 

The passing of arms, except by hand, or the encroaching of any 
member upon adjoining sections shall constitute a foul. Each and 
every foul shall be penalized by the addition of two seconds to the 
actual time of the team. 

Every member of a team shall return to the finish with each 
article of equipment that was carried at the start. 

The time of a team shall be the time that elapsed between the 
start and the return to the starting line of the last man of the 
team, plus two seconds for each foul committed by its members. 

SKIN THE SNAKE RELAY. 

This has been used very successfully at some of the largest canton- 
ments. Prom eight to twenty may be used on each side. Each man 
spreads his feet, puts his right hand between his legs and reaches 
back to grasp the left hand of the man back of him. At a signal the 
last man in each line lies on the ground on his back and all the men 
in each line walk backwards with legs spread until all men are lying 
down. Last man touches head to the ground, then rises and starts 
forward, pulling up entire line, one at a time. The team which is 
first to complete the skin-the-snake wins. Hands must be kept 
grasped during the entire game. 

SAMPLE FIELD DAY PROGRAMME. 

Selections from the following events, in addition to those from 
the regular A. A. U. athletic programme (see Athletic Rules of the 
Amateur Athletic Union of the United States, elsewhere in this 
book), have been successfully used in field days at various canton- 
ments and naval bases. 

Medicine ball relay. Swimming races and fancy diving. 

Rifle relay. Wagon driving. 

Flag relay. Fancy horseback riding. 

Marathon run (modified distance). Wall scaling. 

Push ball. Broncho busting. 

Mass ball. Rescue race. 

Chariot race. Obstacle race. 

Centipede race. Sack race. 

Crew race. Potato race. 

Equipment race. Three-legged race. 

Slow mule race. Trench ball. 

Motorcycle relay. Grenade throwing. 

Motorcycle race. Throwing base ball. 

Motorcycle jumping. Rowing races. 

By reference to the Amateur Athletic Union rules, elsewhere in 
this book, the complete list of events in the national programme Is 
given, from which selections can be made to suit local ^conditions, 
time at command, etc. In many of these athletic events, the larger 
men are often overlooked in favor of the track athlete. Keen com- 
petition can be aroused and interest stimulated by featuring events 
that will appeal more strongly to the larger or older men, such as 
javelin and discus throwing, the 16-lb. hammer, and 56-lb. weight 
for distance or height. In the latter competition it will be neces- 
sary to have an uprigkt with a cross-arm, which should be mov- 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 43 

able, and from which is suspended a disk of some kind that will 
help in determining- whether the implement has attained the height 
at which the mark has been set. 



SUGGESTIONS FOR OFFICIALS. 

A handkerchief tied to the arm of the captain of a team will 
help to distinguish him, especially in large group events such as 
medicine ball, flag and gun relays. 

Before a race appoint one man to select the first to finish; another 
to pick the second man; another for third. Each of these should 
watch exclusively for the man he is to pick, paying no attention to 
the place in the race other contestants may secure, and if the 
latter are not wearing competitors' numbers, follow the man 
selected and keep in touch with him until his name and the group 
from which he has entered has been secured by the clerk of the 
course. 

To prevent confusion, as soon as a team race or group contest Is 
finished, the competitors should be lined up and brought immedi- 
ately to "attention" before being dismissed. 

Before the start of a contest, verify the number of men lined up 
on each side and watch that each competitor keeps his place and 
competes in his proper turn. 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



45 



A Sample Holiday Programme of the Army 



In celebration of Liberty Day, Battalion Commanders will arrange 
the following - programmes for athletic contests Saturday and Sunday: 

1. A track meet Saturday, October 12, at such time as will not inter- 
fere with other programmes in observance of the day on that part of 
the parade grounds adjacent to their area. The meet to be an inter- 
company affair. 

2. An inter-battalion track meet at 2 P. M., Sunday, October 13, at 
the camp base ball diamond, between the winning teams from each 
battalion in each event held Saturday, October 12. \ 

Company Athletic Officers will be responsible for organization of 
teams for the various events and for participation of all available 
men. 

The meet of Saturday, October 12, will be an inter-company affair 
in each battalion, points to be scored as follows: 



Each battalion will appoint one officer to act as scorer. His duty is 
to record the points scored by each company and the event in which 
these points are scored. At the conclusion of the meet on Saturday 
he will present the list of winning teams in each event to the Athletic 
Officer, who will be responsible for these teams appearing at the camp 
base ball diamond on Sunday to compete in the inter-battalion meet. 

The events to be competed for in the meets Saturday and Sunday 
are as follows: 

1. 100-yard Shuttle Race — Teams of 20 men from each company. 

2. Tug-of-War — Teams of 10 men from each company. 

3. Equipment Race — Distance, 100 yards. Teams of 1 man from 
each company. At 25-yard mark men remove hats; at 50-yard mark 
men remove shirts; at 75-yard mark men remove regulation lace 
leggings and shoes; men run to 100-yard mark and return, replacing 
each article of clothing at point it was placed before continuing. 

4. Three-legged Race — 50 yards. Teams of 2 men from each com- 
pany. 

5. Rifle Shuttle Race — 100-yard relays. Teams of 4 men and 1 rifle 
from each company. 

6. Medicine Ball Relay — Teams of 20 men from each company. 

7. Rescue Race — 25 yards. Teams of 2 men from each company. 

8. 100-yard Dash — One man from each company. 

9. Jockey Race — Teams of 10 men and 1 rider. Each team lines up 
in file, men 10 yards apart, with rider on back of first man. At start 
first man carries rider on his back to second man, whom rider must 
get on without touching ground. Second man carries him to third, 
and so on. Last man runs 10 yards to finish line. Course is 110 yards. 

10. Hat Race (same as Potato Race) — Teams of 10 men and 1 
runner from each company. Ten men line up in file back of starting 
line, their hats being placed on a line in front of the file in the same 
order the men stand. No. 1 has his hat on ground 30 yards in front of 
him. At 2-yard intervals the hats are placed on ground. Runner 
stands in front of file and at signal runs out and gets No. l's hat, 
hands it to him and returns for No. 2's hat, and so on. When No. 10 
gets his hat the runner runs to finish line 30 yards in front of No. 1. 

11. Squad Drill — One squad from each company. Mistake by man 
in any squad disqualifies it. To be judged by officers from other or- 
ganizations. 

On Sunday, Event No. 2A will be a Tug-of-War contest between IQ 
officers from each battalion. 



Bulletin No. 57. 



October 9, 1918. 



First place.— 
Second place. 
Third place... 



5 points 
3 points 
1 point 



46 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



Training for Athletic Events 

By James S. Mitchel 

The following- was written originally for the information of those 
in civil life who were taking" up athletics for the first time, but the 
information is just as applicable in general to adaptation by the 
soldier or sailor who desires to devote his spare time to track 
athletics. 

It is an impossibility to give information or instruction on train- 
ing; which will apply to everyone. Different surroundings and con- 
ditions are the principal reasons. I shall endeavor to give a few 
ideas on work, diet, etc., which, if followed, will certainly do no 
one harm and ought to prove of benefit to anyone. 

Trials should not be taken in any event until one has been work- 
ing at least three weeks. In running long" distances but one trial 
at the full distance should be run and that at least ten days before 
date of competing-. In jumping", pole vaulting", weight throwing 
and short distance running once a week is often enough to have a 
trial, and that should be taken at least four days before date of 
competition. 

Broad jumpers often make a mistake in trying at their event too 
often and continuously. After getting the run and take-off, which 
should be carefully measured and noted, and which is the first 
thing you should be perfect in, a day's jumping - , not for distance, 
about twice a week, and sprinting on the other days, is all that is 
necessary. A trial about once in two weeks will be enoug"h. I 
know good broad jumpers who never try it except in competition. 
The same is true of high hurdle running. After one has mastered 
the step for about three hurdles, practice at sprinting is all that is 
needed. Go into all the games you can, as you will then become 
accustomed to competition, and it will give you confidence and 
make you less nervous. 

DIET. 

While wholesome food is necessary to training", a man should not 
deny himself everything". As far as possible, beef and mutton for 
meats and eggs and fish occasionally should be the principal articles 
of diet. Pastry should be dispensed with; by that is meant pies, 
fancy cake and puddings. Plain cake, rice, bread or tapioca, and a 
few other similar plain puddings, may be eaten. 

Many trainers consider it does a man more harm to g"o without 
something he really craves than it does to occasionally eat it. It is 
not the use, but the abuse of such things which will bring" harm to 
a man's training. 

Ag-ain, a man can digest things while training" which would 
trouble him ordinarily. A man should drink as much water as he 
wants, but liquors and beer should not be allowed under any cir- 
cumstances. Eat all digestible vegetables; avoid soups, tea or 
coffee, also milk, unless it really agrees with you. Use a moderate 
amount of fat; the fats of beef and mutton are best, and only a 
small quantity of butter. Fat will aid nature in training", and a 
little of it is absolutely essential. Have your meals always on the 
same hours on successive days. 

As regards to the amount the army or navy man should eat in 
training very little need be said, as they never eat too much, and 
for this reason their stomachs are always in the very best shape. 
A very prominent student of what was best to build up a man's 
vital forces and to renovate his intestines once advised that the 
best way to get a man's stomach in its proper working- capacity 
was to have him sent to prison for about a month. Kidiculous as 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 47 

the statement might seem, it possessed some philosophy, for during 
the term of incarceration the coating of the stomach would have 
had a rest which would superinduce the working- of the gastric 
juice, and the work daily would have given the quasi-convict 
enough of exhaustion to insure him a sound sleep, allowing all the 
vital organs of the body a complete rest. 

It is a singular fact that a majority of the world's greatest 
athletes paid little or no attention to what they ate, but, of course, 
were sensible enough not to eat the foods that might be harmful 
to the stomach. W. G. George, the great English distance runner, 
once told the writer that he never gave a moment's thought as to 
what he ate, but he observed certain rules which went with good 
living; that is, his main items of diet were beef and mutton, green 
vegetables and poached eggs, with some side dishes of minor im- 
portance. The late Edward Hanlan, undoubtedly the world's great- 
est sculler, once remarked that he lost his first race because his 
trainer would not allow him to eat enough. Innumerable other 
instances could be quoted of great performers in all branches of 
sport who could almost eat anything, but their one great cry of 
warning to all beginners was: Never overeat.'. 



BATHING. 

Get a good size sponge. Draw warm and cold water into a bowl 
until the warm has just taken the chill off the cold. Dip your 
sponge in and squeeze it gently, but retaining some of the water. 
Wipe yourself off; wipe one arm and wring the sponge out in the 
water; repeat with the other arm and so go over the whole body, 
dipping the sponge in the water often. Then wipe perfectly dry 
with a rough towel. Don't bathe until you have ceased to perspire. 
Don't take a shower bath or get into a tub, and never use abso- 
lutely cold water. 

STARTING. 

With sprinters, the one essential thing is the start. Many a race 
is won at the beginning. Practice should be taken gradually and 
begun early in the season. Practice, if for only a few times each 
day. If one becomes too sore, let up for a few days. Always 
practice with someone and practice with anyone and everyone. 
This is the only way. Get someone who will hold you on your 
mark, to start you, either by pistol or word. Never try to beat the 
word or pistol, either at practice or at any time. To be ready for 
the pistol is the first thing and to immediately start after hearing 
it is the next. There are several different styles of starting, but 
experience has proven that the only one and the fastest for all 
sorts of men is the kneeling style. True, there are men who use 
ether styles to good advantage, but anyone can improve himself 
from one to two yards by the kneeling start if he gets it right. 
There are several styles of low starts and the one particularly 
referred to is as follows: 

Place the forward foot from one to four Inches back of the start- 
ing line. The reason this distance must vary is owing to the 
difference in length of arms of different men. A man with short 
arms must get nearer the mark, and one must use one's judgment 
and find from which distance one can most readily respond to the 
pistol. The distance of the back foot is similarly governed by the 
length of leg. Place the forward foot in its proper position and 
then crouch down, extending the rear foot until the lower leg 
(from the knee to the ankle) is parallel to the surface of the 
track. With the knee of the rear leg just touching the heel of the 
forward foot is the position for the rear foot. Measure this dis- 
tance from the starting line, put it down somewhere so that it will 



4S 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



not be forgotten. The distance of the rear foot from the starting 

line is about three feet two inches. Always use the same distance. 

The main thing is to start properly. The common fault with low 
starters is that they immediately straighten up when the pistol is 
fired. This is entirely wrong-. The runner should dive forward and 
not try to straighten until he has run at least three strides. This 
fault of straightening too soon is caused by runners putting the 
rear foot too near the mark. When they push off they can't help 
rising. If the foot is back far enough the runner will dive straight 
forward and that is where the quickness of the start comes in. 
From this position one will seldom go over before the pistol is 
fired. 

WORK. 

There is nothing one can do which will stand one in as good 
stead as running on the road in early season, and many prominent 
athletes have made their first start in athletics by starting in on 
the road, because at times it may be impossible to find a suitable 
track in one's immediate neighborhood. Here is where one will 
find use for a heavy suit. Never go out on the road without cover- 
ing the legs and knees perfectly. One may not notice it now, but 
in after life freedom from rheumatism will amply repay one for 
the trouble. Right here I would like to say that in the spring and 
fall one must keep covered up under all circumstances unless 
actually competing. 

In taking road work, begin with about two miles at an easy gait 
three times a week, running every other day. On the other days 
devote the time to the specialty it is intended to pursue. After a 
man has once brought himself to good condition very little work is 
necessary to keep there, and care should be used, after working 
steadily for four or five weeks, not to work too much. If one 
begins to feel lazy and tired after working, stop for two or three 
days. Work at the same hour each day, if possible, and have that 
hour correspond with the time at which the race for which you are 
training will be run. Most games are held in the afternoon and 
that is usually the most convenient time to work. 

HURDLE RACING. 

The hurdler must think and act quickly and be possessed of a 
fair amount of nerve and dash. "He who hesitates is lost" may be 
aptly applied to the hurdle racer. 

In the low hurdle race the runner should dash at the first hurdle 
with all possible speed; no hesitation. At first the novice will hesi- 
tate and be over careful. To overcome the tendency he should put 
up one hurdle at the proper distance, and, with a revolver starting, 
practice over the single hurdle about six or seven times every other 
day for about two weeks, or until he obliterates all traces of his 
hesitancy. He can now put up three or four more hurdles and 
practice over these four or five times a day on as many days during 
the week as his strength will permit, but never more than four or 
five times a week. A trial of the entire flight may be run once a 
week. After each day's practice he may run 130 yards on the flat, 
with a somewhat shortened and quickened stride in 15 seconds. If 
the spring is made off the right foot, turn the body slightly to the 
risrht while clearing the hurdle, and vice versa. He should abstain 
going over the hurdles for at least three days prior to a race, so 
as to avoid a chance of getting sore. Long walks should be 
avoided. This exercise is beneficial to health and the proper work 
for distance men, but hurdlers and jumpers are not benefitted by it. 
While it strengthens the heart and legs, and improves the wind, 
etc., it also stiffens and binds the muscles. Two or three mile walks 
on 4ays when not practising will fee found profitable. Be careful of 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



49 



overdoing-. When the first symptoms of staleness are detected, work 
should be stopped immediately, and not resumed until strength and 
snap return. A helpful exercise is to raise each leg- alternately, the 
knee reaching the level of the armpit, the motion being as nearly 
like as possible to that employed in clearing- a hurdle. This prac- 
tice will tend to enable the legs to be raised quicker and higher, 
and to clear the hurdle with the body close to the cross-bar. Every 
inch in height saved in clearing- a hurdle means a part of a second 
saved. 

In the 220-yards race the same routine of exercise should be pur- 
sued, except that being a longer distance, it would become neces- 
sary to run oftener than three times a day. 

RUNNING BROAD JUMP. 

In this game the take-off is the main thing to be guarded. In a 
competition, unless the jumper secures a good take-off, the jump is 
worthless. It matters little whether he be in the best of condition; 
if the joist is not properly reached all is wrong. It is necessary, 
therefore, to mark a starting point for the run which will fetch 
him to the jumping line exactly. This is a matter easily accom- 
plished with the aid of a friend. Have him stand at the joist and 
note where the foot strikes; should it strike six inches or two feet 
short of the line, then set the starting line six inches or two feet 
farther back. The jumper must run with all the speed at his com- 
mand, without hesitation, and be confident that the take-off will be 
properly met. Plenty of practice will be required to get the neces- 
sary confidence. Some jumpers have two marks, which is a good 
idea; a starting mark at say 110 feet distant from the take-off, and 
the second about 50 feet further on. The latter serves as a sort of 
check. The knees should be quickly raised as high as possible 
when the jump is made; additional impetus is thus given. Care 
should be taken not to shorten the stride while running. The nat- 
ural stride should prevail until the last two paces, when, if pos- 
sible, it should be lengthened by a few inches. The natural result 
of this lengthening of the stride is to throw the body up, which 
means a few more inches gained in distance. Long striders are 
generally the best broad jumpers. Short striders, unless they have 
great speed, seldom excel at the game. As speed is an important 
factor in broad jumping, the jumper should constantly practice at 
sprinting. Hopping about five hundred times a day is an excellent 
method of strengthennig the jumping leg. Cover about nine inches 
with each hop about seventy-five consecutive times, with a rest of 
a few minutes, and then the same thing over again until the de- 
sired number of times is reached. The jumper should never lose 
sight of the fact that it is important to rise as high as possible 
when jumping. During a competition, while awaiting his turn, he 
should carefully protect his legs from the cold air and exposure, 
keeping them thoroughly warm. It is impossible to jump well with 
cold and stiffened limbs. 

POLE VAULTING. 

Pole vaulting requires a strong pair of arms as well as a strong 
pair of nether limbs. As in the broad jump, a starting mark should 
be used, but the run need not be more than 75 or 80 feet. Speed is 
an important factor in this game, as in the running jump. 

Two of the commonest faults to be found with the pole vaulter 
are, first, the take-off foot is brought too close to the point of the 
pole in the ground; this prevents attaining the swing necessary to 
carry the jumper over; second, the arms are not used in raising the 
body, which should be done immediately on leaving the ground. 
Both these faults can easily be remedied, but either is fatal. The 
faster the vm tQ the fear, the more the impetus obtained, Whew 



50 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



clearing the bar the body should be turned so as to face the bar 
when the ground is reached. 

In taking- hold of the pole, the upper hand should be at a point 
about twelve inches below the height to be cleared, the lower hand 
from 2 feet to 2 feet 6 inches under the upper. 

The vaulter should grasp the pole as he would a rope in climbing 
upward; the thumbs pointing upward. 

The arms can be strengthened by all-round work on the horizontal 
bar. Another method is to hang a rope over the inside corner of a 
door, or on a hook in the wall; raise and lower the body by the 
arms, allowing the heels to remain on the floor. 

As in the broad jump, the speed and strength in the jumping leg 
should be developed, which can be accomplished by following the 
suggestions contained in running broad jump. 

EVENTS FOR BIG MEN. 

The proportion of big men in the army is necessarily much 
greater than that to be found on the roster of athletic clubs in 
private life, and for that reason it is the duty of the athletic 
director to devote at least a portion of his time to men whose size 
and weight precludes them from the track events in which speed Is 
the principal feature. 

Instead of being looked upon as a side issue, the weight events 
and javelin and discus throws can be made attractive and Interest- 
ing, not only to the contestants but also to the spectators, feats of 
strength and brawn always, and in all ages, commanding admira- 
tion and attention. And with the vast number from which to 
select, undoubtedly many men would be brought to the fore who 
would give the most experienced a race for honors. At the same 
time, with a little encouragement, these novices would soon over- 
come their crudeness of method and develop a form in their spe- 
cialty, which, with a love for the sport, would be the means of 
eventually disseminating the seeds of athletics in the most remote 
communities where previous to the war such contests were un- 
known. 

As previously noted, an army or navy man of two hundred 
pounds or more cannot sprint or jump, but he has to do something 
to keep his muscles in trim, and therefore suitable contests should 
be arranged to his liking. On this point, exercise with the 56- 
pound weight, the 16-pound shot, the discus, 16-pound hammer, and 
the javelin, at once suggest themselves to the instructors of mili- 
tary sports. Any one of the quintette will give the big men 
plenty of beneficial employment in the development of the shoulders 
and legs, as well as bringing about the condition of a quick, active 
muscle, found to be of the greatest advantage when handling the 
gun, and especially in bayonet drills, and the several requirements 
of the infantryman. Regarding the amount of work to be done by 
the big men, there is an unlimited margin. In fact, he may toy 
with the weights all day long and not do himself the least harm. 
The morning after a hard day's juggling weights, he may find his 
muscles a trifle sore and uninclined for any further indulgence, but 
here the old-time remedy may be brought into play; that is, if it is 
possible for him to procure a tepid bath he could throw a handful 
. of washing soda into it, and after a plunge the soreness will imme- 
diately pass away. 

For the big men of the army or navy who may be inclined 
toward flat feet or soft ankles, one of the very best exercises, and 
the latest remedy advocated by the scientists, is to spend ten min- 
utes every morning rising up and down on the toes, with the heels 
together, and, if found convenient, with the hands held above the 
head, or if this is found uncomfortable, with the hands pressed 
tightly on the waist. 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



51 



THE TRAINING SCHEDULE. 

To lay down any hard and fast schedule for the army or navy 
man who might go in for athletics is not an easy task, as all men 
are differently constructed, and then other conditions have to be 
considered. Still, if a man aspires to figure among the front rank 
in any of the branches of track or field competition he had better 
do some kind of work more or less at his specialty every day. The 
late Mike Murphy, and, in fact, nearly all the astute trainers of the 
present period, worked their squads every day. Of course, if a man 
did not feel right he should be laid off for a day and content him- 
self with a brisk walk of a couple of miles. When Murphy trained 
his great New York Athletic Club team for the big international 
meet of 1895 against England, he worked all the sprinters together, 
and he pursued the same tactics later while employed at Yale and 
the University of Pennsylvania, and while training the Olympic 
team that won so splendidly at Stockholm in 1912. This daily rou- 
tine of the sprinters consisted mainly of starts and short dashes of 
about thirty or forty yards, and always well up on the toes. Some- 
times a dozen starts were taken and sometimes less, as the needs 
of the competitors might be. These starts always wound up with a 
jog of perhaps 150 or 200 yards. Murphy was a great believer in 
the jog, the same as the Sheffield sprinters, as there is nothing 
better to improve the length and driving power of the stride, the 
development of the thighs and the body action. Much the same 
plan was followed by Murphy in preparing the men for the 220 
yards and quarter mile, only the quarter men were made to finish 
with a run of about 600 yards at top speed. One remarkable inci- 
dent about Murphy was his incessant admonition to the sprinters 
and quarter men to always run well up on the toes. It is an old, 
old theory among the Sheffielders, and a right good one to keep in 
mind. 

Of the track events the half mile and the amount of work at- 
tached, is unquestionably the most delicate to handle. Jogs of 
1,000 yards at about three-quarters speed have been found to be a 
good plan, with a brisk smash at the full distance twice a week, 
when the use of a watch will be found necessary. It is the easiest 
thing in the world to do too much work at the half mile, and here 
It is worth while remembering that Murphy had the hardest sort of 
a task to keep C. H. Kilpatrick, of New York, whose record stood 
for twenty years, from the track during the critical part of the 
preparatory work immediately preceding the meet. As to the tim- 
ing- of the candidates in the middle distance or the sprints, the use 
of the watch in the latter department is of minor importance. 
Murphy never bothered his head about holding a watch on the 
practice spins of the sprinters, and only in a real tryout did he 
bring the stopwatch into play. His contention was that a watch 
showed nothing in training trials, and was nothing less than a 
badge of the trainer to show his authority on the field. Similar 
views as to the utility of the watch prevailed among the more 
advanced professionals. Harry Hutchens once informed the writer 
that he never timed himself in trials or training; that the results 
of the watch showed nothing, adding that the man who was a 
judge of his own work always well knew when he was running: 
better or worse, and that it was enough for him to know just once 
before a race what he could do. Anyway, Hutchens could always 
do better in a contest than he could in a private trial, 



52 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



The Ethics of Competition 

OBEDIENCE TO RULES. 

It is impossible to conceive of games without rules; for all they 
are necessary. They have been carefully thought out by experts s 
with the intention of making- the games interesting, fair to all 
taking part, and, where great activity is required, as in basket ball, 
foot ball, soccer and base ball, to prevent injury to the players. 

Without question, before beginning any contest, these should be 
read and should be thoroughly understood. Then after a full 
understanding, the next thing is strict obedience to them. Unfor- 
tunately, this is not always the case; at times, in order to gain 
some advantage over an opponent, or opposing team, there is a 
temptation to infringe upon the rules, but when one stops to con- 
sider the ethics of this, he must confess that such action is abso- 
lutely wrong. It is taking an unfair advantage, and may also lead 
to further infringement, which will spoil the game. 



ABIDE BY THE DECISIONS OF THE JUDGES. 

To see that rules are strictly carried out, a judge, an umpire, or a 
referee is appointed, and he is expected to be perfectly unbiased in 
his decisions. But however careful he may be, now and then he 
may make a mistake. At such times, the players should realize the 
difficulty of his position, and should abide by his decision. 

Should, however, a decision be manifestly unfair, the captain of 
the team is the proper one to protest to the umpire; he is the one 
to do the talking, and while he is doing it, the other players should 
keep their places, for there is nothing more undignified than a 
crowd of baseball players, for instance, rushing towards the 
umpire and clamoring their protests. As a matter of fact, they 
can accomplish nothing because of their noise. Such disputes 
must be settled by cool heads with quiet argument, and the captain 
is the one to do it. 

If he is unable to make a satisfactory settlement, do not further 
delay the game, nor refuse to play, but continue under protest, and 
later such protest can be laid before the proper authorities for 
their decision. 

GENTLEMANLY CONDUCT. 

Sometimes, when games are being played, remarks are made 
about the personal appearance of an opponent, or his racial ancestry 
is held up to ridicule. Clearly this is not clean sport, and should not 
be indulged in for a minute. By all means avoid such personalities; 
ever keep in mind that rarely is a person responsible for his facial 
appearance, and that all human races have good qualities, and have 
produced great works. A broad minded person looks for good points 
in others, rather than for some peculiarity. 

Sometimes, when there has been a close or a wrong decision, 
individual players, or even whole teams, or their followers, or all, 
conduct themselves in a most unbecoming manner. They guy the 
umpire, hoot and yell, and sometimes indulge in bad language. The 
same thing sometimes happens when the game is sroing against a 
team, and then the opponents are treated in a similar way/ It also 
sometimes happens that players quarrel among themselves, and 
indulge in unbecoming remarks. Sometimes, after a game, a team 
and its followers quarrel with their opponents. 

All such conduct is not proper, and should be strictly avoided, 
Be courteous to your superiors, your umpires, and to one another. 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



53 



it frequently happens that emphasis is put upon the poor plays of 
the opponents, rather than upon the good plays of one's own team. 
It would seem better to applaud the good plays, rather than to jeer 
at the bad; be generous enough to appreciate and applaud the good 
plays of your opponents. 

A courteous player never attempts to do injury to another. 
Games won by such foul means were better lost. 



POSSESS GOOD NERVE. 

Frequently a team competes with one that is far its superior. 
This is the time when good nerve is required. Don't be discouraged, 
don't make petty complaints, don't give up the game, but play for 
all you are worth, and you will not only feel happier yourselves, 
but you will have the respect of others. 



TEAM WORK. 

When two or more players are on a side, they constitute a team. 
Clearly when teams play, the individual players must subordinate 
themselves for the general good of the team. Each must keep in 
mind that a great responsibility rests upon him in his position, and 
that as far as possible he should keep that position. It may seem 
to him, at times, that he should like to take a more active part in 
whatever play is being made at a particular time, but as a matter 
of fact failure to play his position might lose his side the game. 
During an entire game, he may not have opportunity to make any 
marked play, but if he has played his position to his utmost, he 
should be satisfied in the consciousness of having done his duty. 
It is this team work that means victory. 



HONESTY. 

Frequently, a participant is the only one who knows the truth 
about a play, under dispute, and by keeping silent, or by not tell- 
ing the truth, points would be gained by his side. At such times, 
the best course is honesty; tell the truth even though it may hurt 
your side. Get above the idea of winning at any price. 



CHARACTER. 

In all athletics, keep in mind that while you play to win there is 
something higher than this. It is Character. Get self-control, play 
fair, be courteous to all, and ever act like a gentleman. 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



55 



How-to Lay^Out^an. Athletic Track 

The recognition given to athletic sport by the Army and Navy, in 
addition to the interest manifested by the directors of large indus- 
trial establishments, who have come to realize the value of athletic 
contests as a healthful form of recreation, has led to numerous 
inquiries as to the best method of laying out an athletic track. 
An athletic field badly designed or constructed tends to lessen in- 
terest, and as in many cases it is difficult to obtain the information 
locally, we present herewith a sample diagram, which can serve as 
a basis for individual requirements. This track was designed for the 
1916 national championships of the Amateur Athletic Union of the 
United States, and is situated in Weequahic Park, Newark, N. J. 
The arrangement was conceded by leading athletic authorities to 
be ideal, and the fact that a number of new American records were 
established, testifies to the speed and construction of the track. 
While, of course, the construction might be too expensive or too 
detailed for temporary use, still the plans are given in full, and any 
portion may be adapted for local needs. It was designed and laid 
out by Mr. Frederick W. Rubien of New York, Secretary of the 
Amateur Athletic Union of the United States. Mr. Rubien, who is 
a civil engineer and surveyor, has had many years' experience in 
the construction of athletic tracks. At the request of the late Mr. 
James E. Sullivan, who, until his death in 1914, was the leading 
authority on athletics in the world, Mr. Rubien made the drawings 
for the Jamestown Exposition athletic track and McComb's Dam 
Park track in New York, also a track for the Massachusetts Insti- 
tute of Technology in Boston, which have been recognized as model 
tracks for their respective purposes. 

While the accompanying diagram is made exclusively for athletic 
competition, it also shows how a base ball diamond can be included, 
and, as the seasons change, the enclosure can be used for inter- 
collegiate or soccer foot ball, with space at the opposite end for 
open air basket ball and tennis. It is also available for mass exer- 
cises or meetings of any kind, and, in winter, could be turned into 
an open air skating rink, when the climate permits, on which 
hockey matches and speed and figure competitions could be given, 
in addition to general skating. 

METHOD OF CONSTRUCTION. 

An athletic field can be laid out on almost any level area and 
while no hard and fast rule can be laid down as to the selection 
of a plot, nevertheless if the ground is high and dry a better result 
will be obtained. 

It is generally conceded that a running track measuring four laps 
to a mile is the most popular size for outdoor sports. In addition 
to the track events proper, pole vaulting and the jumps may be 
contested without interruption, while the field competitions — javelin 
discus, shot, hammer and the heavy weight — can be carried on within 
sight of the spectators and with safety to contestants and ofllcials 
A very satisfactory base ball diamond can be laid out within the 
limits of the track, and the space is ideal for intercollegiate and 
soccer foot ball. Outdoor basket ball is practicable, while permanent 
tennis courts also can be included. 

A glance at the cross section will call attention to the Inexpensive 
and light, springy nature of the track as against the heavy, macadam 
construction so often employed. An all cinder track is absolutely 
worthless. The cinders will not pack, they tear up easily, and it 
is the hardest kind of a track to keep in condition. 



56 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



The track shown herewith was started in the late fall. A trench 
about a foot deep was cut the width of the track and brought to 
sub-grade. About 2,200 yards of clean, steam boiler cinders, of a 
very uniform grade, were carefully screened through a quarter-inch 
mesh screen. While this work was in progress, the curb was laid, 
the posts driven and curbing carefully set to grade, including the 
outer banked curbing on the turns. The first layer of coarse cinders 
was placed in position throughout. The next two-inch layer of 
three-quarter inch screenings was then laid and rolled. The top 

fMLASUAlBtWT 

L i Ll „i }iPl.ilm.Cii[ITNUT CvDBM, 

r 12 (HClia .Tor AID S*E FlAt.ce 

J TRACK LEVEL — SLIGHT BANK ON TURNS >IU " 

v 5imcm Bt& EqaAL Pahts Stea^'Boilcr Cinders amp Clay Screened TSjtT Mesh. 



Sub Surface drainage 



dressing of one-quarter inch screenings and clay, after careful mix- 
ing, was then spread to top of curb. The track, was fenced off and 
allowed to set for the winter and rolled with light rollers in the 
spring. Heavier rollers were used as the surface began to pack. 
The winter preliminaries did not prevent the use of the track, 
which is in a public park, from use during the entire summer, 
and when the date for the championship arrived — September 8 
and 9, 1916, held in conjunction with the celebration of the two 
hundred and fiftieth anniversary of the founding of the city of 
Newark — it required very little attention and was lightning fast, 
as attested by the time of the contestants in the various events. 
The infield, from curb to curb, is 212 feet wide, about 30 feet wider 
than the track in the famous Harvard Stadium. The turns are 
not as sharp as in the latter and the tangents are about 108 yards 
long. The entire track, which is spirit level throughout, except for 
the slight banking on the turns, is 24 feet wide, permitting six 
lanes for the sprints and five regulation width hurdles. It has a 
220 yard straightaway, the 440 yards was run with one turn and 
the 880 yards with two turns. The main seating accommodations 
were along the 220 yard straightaway. The jumping pits were 
located directly opposite the stand and about 15 feet inside of the 
curb, affording the greatest number of spectators an excellent view. 
This arrangement is preferable to having all of these events crowded 
at one end of the infield. The locations of the weight events are 
distributed about the infield and do not interfere with each other 
or place the officials or spectators in jeopardy from miscalculated 
throws. The running portions of the jumps were prepared in same 
way as the track. The pits were dug to a depth of one foot and 
filled with a springy mixture of top soil and excelsior. 

After a track has been built it should not be allowed to run down, 
constant attention being necessary to keep it up to a high standard 
of efficiency. It is simply money wasted to build an athletic track 
and then expect it to keep in condition without any further atten- 
tion. A groundsman should be employed, whose duty it should be 
to care for the track exclusively. In dry weather it should be 
sprinkled every day or two and gone over daily, scraped and rolled, 
and all uneven surfaces brought up to a level. The best made 
tracks will develop these depressions and the best way to discover 
them is to go out on the track immediately after a rainstorm and 
note where the puddles occur. Throw into each puddle a block 
of wood, to serve as a marker when the water has disappeared. 
These imperfections should have immediate attention. It is also 
a good plan to have several loads of the finest sieved cinders on 
hand, which should be worked in from time to time with the top 
dressing, rolled, scraped and watered. 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



59 



ATHLETIC RULES. 



TRACK AND FIELD EVENTS. 



RULE I. 

OFFICIALS. 

L All amateur meetings shall be under the direction of 
A Games Committee. 
One Referee. 
Two or more Inspectors. 
Four or more Judges at Finish 
One Chief Field Judge. 
Three or more Field Judges. 
Three Timekeepers. 
One Judge of Walking. 
One Field Doctor. 
One Starter. 

One Clerk of the Course. 
One Scorer. 
One Press Steward. 
One Official Surveyor. 
One Marshal. 

2. If deemed necessary, assistants may be provided for 
the Timekeepers, the Judge of Walking, the Clerk of the 
Course, the Scorer, the Press Steward and the Marshal, 
and an Official Announcer may also be appointed. 

RULE II. 

THE GAMES COMMITTEE. 

1. In championship meetings, the Games Committee 
shall be appointed by the Championship Committee. 

2. At any club meeting the Games Committee shall be 
appointed by the club holding the meeting. 



60 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



3. This Committee shall provide a place properly laid 
out and measured to conform to all the requirements of 
these rules and shall also furnish all implements and 
equipment necessary for the satisfactory competition of 
the events scheduled in the official program, and shall 
have jurisdiction of all matters not assigned by these 
rules to the Referee or other games officials. 



RULE III. 

REFEREE. 

1. The Referee shall enforce all the rules and decisions 
of the Amateur Athletic Union, and shall decide all 
questions relating to the actual conduct of the meeting, 
the final settlement of which is not otherwise assigned 
by said rules. 

RULE IV. 

INSPECTORS. 

1. It shall be the duty of an Inspector to stand at such 
point as the Referee may designate; to watch the com- 
petition closely, and in case of a foul or violation of the 
rules by a competitor or other person, to report to the 
Referee what he saw of the incident. 

2. Such Inspectors are merely assistants to the Referee, 
to whom they shall report, and have no power to make 
any decisions. 

RULE V. 

JUDGES AT FINISH. 

1 . There shall be four or more Judges at Finish, who shall 
decide the order in which the competitors finish in the 
competition. In case of a disagreement, the majority 
shall decide. Their decision as to the order in which 
the men finish shall be final and without appeal. 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY 



61 



RULE VI. 

FIELD JUDGES. 

1. The Chief Field Judge shall see that all implements 
and equipments are in accordance with these rules and 
that the field events are conducted expeditiously. 

2. The Field Judges shall measure, judge and record 
each trial of each competitor in all games, whose record 
is of distance or height. Their decision as to the per- 
formance of each man shall be final and without appeal. 

RULE VII. 

TIMEKEEPERS. 

1. Each of the three Timekeepers shall time every event. 
In case two of their watches agree, and the third dis- 
agrees, the time marked by the two shall be official time. 
If all watches disagree, the time marked by the watch 
giving the middle time shall be the official time. Time 
shall be taken from the flash of the pistol. 

2. Should assistants to the Timekeepers be provided, 
they shall perform like duties, but the time recorded by 
their watches shall only be accepted in the event of one 
or more of the watches held by the other Timekeepers 
failing to mark the time, in which case they shall be 
called upon in such order as may be previously decided 
upon ; so that on all races, where possible, three watches 
shall record the time. 

3. If, for any reason, only two watches record the time 
of an event, and they fail to agree, the longest time of 
the two shall be accepted as the official time. 

RULE VIII. 

JUDGE OF WALKING. 

1. The Judge of Walking shall have sole power to 
determine the fairness or unfairness of walking, and his 
rulings thereon shall be final and without appeal. He 



62 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



shall caution any competitor whenever walking unfairly, 
the third caution to disqualify, except that he shall 
immediately disqualify any competitor when walking 
unfairly during the last 220 yards of a race. He shall 
control his assistants, and assign to them such of his 
duties as he may deem proper. 
See Rule XLVIXL 

RULE IX. 

CLERK OF THE COURSE. 

1. The Clerk of the Course shall be provided with the 
names and the numbers of all entered competitors, and 
he shall notify them to appear at the starting line before 
the start in each event in which they are entered. 

2. In case of handicap events from marks, he shall place 
each competitor behind his proper mark; shall immedi- 
ately notify the Starter should any competitor attempt 
to advance himself after the Starter has warned them 
to "get ready and in time allowance handicaps shall 
furnish the Starter with the number and time allowance 
of each actual competitor. He shall control his assist- 
ants, and assign to them such duties as he may deem 
proper. In all track competitions run in lanes the choice 
of lanes shall be drawn for in each heat; in all other 
track competitions the positions shall be numbered from 
the curb or pole and shall be drawn for according to 
clubs in scratch events, and in handicap events the com- 
petitors shall be allotted their positions by the Clerk of 
the Course. 

RULE X. 

SCORER. 

1. The Scorer shall record the order in which each com- 
petitor finishes his event, together with the time furnished 
him by the Timekeepers, and the height or distance 
furnished him by the Field Judges. He shall keep a tally 
of the laps made by each competitor in races covering 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



63 



more than one lap, and shall announce by means of a 
bell, or otherwise, when the leading man enters the last 
lap. He shall control his assistants, and assign to them 
such of his duties as he may deem proper. 

RULE XL 

PRESS STEWARDS. 

1. Press Stewards shall obtain from the Clerk of the 
Course and Scorer the names of all starters in each event, 
the names of all point winners, and the times or distances 
of each winning or record performance, and keep the 
press thoroughly informed of all doings of the meeting. 

RULE XII. 

OFFICIAL SURVEYOR. 

1. The Official Surveyor shall survey the track and all 
courses for the distances which are to be contested and 
furnish a statement of same to the Games Committee 
or Referee before the games. 

RULE XIII. 

MARSHAL. 

1. The Marshal shall have full police charge of the en- 
closure and shall prevent any but officials and actual 
competitors from entering or remaining therein. He 
shall control his assistants and assign to them their 
duties. 

RULE XIV. 

STARTER. 

1. The Starter shall have entire control of the competi- 
tors at marks, and shall be the sole judge of fact as to 
whether or not any man has gone over his mark. 

2. All races shall be started by the report of a pistol, 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



except that in time handicap races the word "Go" shall 
be used, 

3. All questions concerning the start shall be decided by 
the Starter. 

4. When any part of the body of the competitor shall 
touch the ground in front of his mark before the starting 
signal is given, it shall be considered a false start. 

5. If, in the opinion of the Starter, a false start has been 
made, he can recall the competitors by a second pistol 
shot, and penalize the offender or the offenders. 

G. For all races up to and including 125 yards, the com- 
petitor shall be put back 1 yard for the first and another 
yard for the second attempt; in races over 125 yards 
and including 300 yards, 2 yards for the first and 2 yards 
for the second; in races over 300 yards and including 
600 yards, 3 yards for the first and 3 yards for the 
second; in races over 600 yards and including 1,000 
yards, 4 yards for the first and 4 yards for the second; 
in races over 1,000 yards and including 1 mile, 5 yards 
for the first and 5 yards for the second; in all races over 
1 mile, 10 yards for the first and 10 yards for the second. 
In all cases the third false start shall disqualify the com- 
petitor from the event. In relay races the penalty shall be 
according to the distance the offender is to run in the race. 

7. The Starter shall also rule out of that event any com- 
petitor who attempts to advance himself from his mark, 
as prescribed in the official program, after the Starter 
has given the warning to "get ready." 

8. The Starter must have at least two good cartridges 
in his pistol before starting a heat. 

RULE XV. 

OFFICIAL ANNOUNCER. ' 

1. The Official Announcer shall receive from the Scorer 
the result of each event and announce the same by voice 
or by means of a bulletin board. 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



65 



RULE XVI. 

THE COURSE. 

1. Each competitor shall keep in his respective position 
from start to finish in all races on straightaway tracks. 
On races with tracks of one or more turns, he shall not 
cross in front of a competitor until he is two yards in 
advance of his nearest competitor. 

2. In all championship races of the Amateur Athletic 
Union, or any of its Associations, at any distance under 
and including 300 yards, each competitor shall have a 
separate course (at least 3 feet), properly roped, staked 
and measured, whether the race be run on a straight path 
or around one or more curves. 

RULE XVII. 

ATTENDANTS. 

1. Except in distance races of five miles or over, no 
attendant or competitor who is not actually taking 
part in the race shall accompany any competitor on 
the mark or in the race, nor shall any competitor be 
allowed, without the permission of the Referee or Judges, 
to receive assistance or refreshment from anyone during 
the progress of the race, 

RULE XVIII. 

THE COMPETITION. 

1. Any competitor wilfully jostling, or running across, or 
obstructing another competitor so as to impede his 
progress, or competing to lose or to coach another com- 
petitor, either in a trial or final contest, shall forfeit hit, 
right to be in the competition, and shall not be awarded 
any position or prize to which he would otherwise have 
been entitled. > 

2. No competitor, after leaving the track, shall be 
allowed to rejoin a race either for the purpose of gaining 
a place or to pace or assist another competitor. 



66 



SPALDING'S ATHXETIC LIBRARY. 



3. When, in any but the final heat of a race, a claim of 
foul or interference is made, the Referee shall have the 
power to disqualify the competitor who was at fault, 
if he considers the foul intentional or due to culpable 
carelessness, and shall also have the power to allow 
the hindered competitor to start in the next round of 
heats, just as if he had been placed in his trial. 

4. When, in a final heat, a claim of foul or interference 
is made, the Referee shall have the power to disqualify 
the competitor who was at fault, if he considers the foul 
intentional or due to culpable carelessness, and he shall 
also have the power to order a new race between such 
of the competitors as he thinks entitled to such a privilege. 

5. Any competitor who shall refuse to obey the direc- 
tions of the Referee or other proper official, or who shall 
conduct himself in a manner unbecoming a gentleman, 
or offensive to the officials, spectators or competitors at 
any meeting held under the rules of the Amateur Athletic 
Union, may be disqualified by the Referee from future 
competition at the meeting, and if the Referee thinks 
the offense worthy of additional punishment he shall 
promptly make detailed statement of the offense to the 
Registration Committee in whose territory the offense 
was committed. 

RULE XIX. 

CHANGE OF PROGRAM. 

1. The order of events, as laid down in the official pro- 
gram, shall not be changed, nor shall the announced 
arrangement of heats in any event be added to or al- 
tered except by the Referee, who, however, shall have no 
authority after heats have been duly drawn or published 
in the program, to transfer a contestant from one heat 
to another. 

RULE XX. 

POSTPONEMENTS. 

1. The Referee shall have the power to call eft or post- 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



67 



pone to a future date any event even though the same has 
been actually commenced, if in his judgment the competi- 
tion cannot be conducted or completed in a satisfactory 
manner and in fairness to the competitors. 

2. Should any event have been actually commenced, it 
shall be conducted (between the competitors who re- 
ported on the first date) at a future date in the same 
manner as though the competition had never been 
started. 

RULE XXI. 

COMPETITORS. 

1. All competitors shall report to the Clerk of the Course 
immediately upon their arrival at the place of meeting, 
and shall be provided by that official with their proper 
numbers, which must be worn conspicuously by the 
competitors when competing, and without which they 
shall not be allowed to start. 

2. Each competitor shall inform himself of the time of 
Starting, and shall be promptly at the starting point 
of each competition in which he is entered, and there 
report to the Clerk of the Course. 

RULE XXII. 

FIELD EVENTS. 

1. The officials shall have the power to change the place 
of the competition in any field event if in their opinion 
the conditions warrant the same. 

2. All measurements must be made with a steel tape. 

3. In all scratch events the competitors shall take their 
trials in the order of their names as printed in the 
program. 

4. In all handicap events the competitor having the 
greatest allowance shall make the first trial, and so on, in 
regular order, up to the competitor at scratch or with 
least allowance, who shall have the last trial. 



*8 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. t 

RULE XXIII. 

WEIGHT EVENTS. 

1. In all weight events thrown from the circle, except 
Throwing the Heavy Weight for Height, the competitor 
must stay in the circle until his attempt is marked by an 
official. 

2. In all weight events thrown from the circle, the com- 
petitor may touch the inside of the circle. 

3. The circle shall be 7 feet (2.134 meters) in diameter 
for all weight events except Throwing the Discus, which 
shall be thrown from a circle 8 feet 2^ inches (2.5 
meters) in diameter. The circle shall be measured from 
the inside, and in outdoor competitions shall be sunk 
almost flush with the ground. In indoor competitions 
the circle may be marked on the floor. 

RULE XXIV. 

THE FINISH. 

1. The finish line shall be a line on the ground drawn 
across the track from finish post to finish post and the 
men shall be placed in the order in which any part of 
their bodies (i. e., "torso," as distinguished from the 
head, arms, feet or hands) crosses such line. 

2. For the purpose of aiding the judges, but not as a 
finish line, there shall be stretched across the track at 
the finish, 4 feet (1.22 meters) above the ground, a 
worsted string which shall not be held by the judges, but 
fastened to the finish post at either side, so it will always be 
at right angles to the course and parallel to the ground. 

3. No competitor shall be considered to have finished 
unless his entire body shall have crossed the finish line. 

RULE XXV, 

TRACK, MEASUREMENT AND THE DIRECTION OF RUNNING, 

1. All distances run or walked shall be measured upon a 
line 12 inches outward from the inner edge of the track. 



I SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 69 

except that in races on straightaway tracks the distance 
shall be measured in a direct line from the starting mark 
to the finish line. There must be a border of board, 
rope, cement, or other material. 
2. The direction of the running shall be left hand inside. 

RULE XXVI. 

USE OF IMPLEMENTS. 

1. A competitor may use his own implement, provided 
the same complies with the specifications hereinafter 
set forth. 

2. No competitor shall be permitted to use the imple- 
ment of another competitor without the special consent 
thereto given by the owner of such implement. 

RULE XXVII. 

OFFICIAL PEGS. 

1. In events where cross-bars and pegs are to be used, 
pegs shall be without rings and of uniform thickness 
and must not extend more than 3 inches from the up- 
rights. The cross-bar must be of wood, the ends of 
which must not project more than 6 inches beyond the 
pegs. 

* RULE XXVIII 

PROTESTS. 

1. Protests against any entered competitor may be made 
verbally or in writing to the Games Committee or any 
member thereof before the meeting, or to the Referee 
during the meeting. If possible, the Committee or 
Referee shall decide such protests at once. If the nature 
of the protest or the necessity of obtaining testimony 
prevents an immediate decision, the competitor shall be 
allowed to compete under protest, and the protest shall 
be decided by the Games Committee within one week, 
unless its subject be the amateur standing of the com- 
petitor or his eligibility to compete, in which case the 



70 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



Games Committee must report such protest within 
forty-eight hours to the member of the Registration 
Committee in whose territory the games are being held. 

RULE XXIX. 

TIES AND DEAD HEATS. 

1. In all scratch contests where results are determined 
by measurements of height or distance, ties shall be 
decided as follows: 

(a) If two or more competitors tie at any height in the 
standing or running high jump, the bar shall be lowered 
at the discretion of the officials and three more trials 
allowed, the competitor clearing it in the least number 
of trials to be the winner. 

(b) If there is a second tie, the bar shall be lowered and 
three more trials allowed, the competitor clearing it in 
the least number of trials to be the winner. 

(c) If there is another tie at any height, the bar shall be 
raised or lowered, at the option of the officials, and thj 
competitor clearing it in the least number of trials shall 
be declared the winner. All further ties shall be decided 
in the same way. 

(d) In case of a tie in the pole v^ult, the officials shall 
raise or lower the bar, at their discretion, and those 
competitors who have ties shall be allowed one trial at 
each height. 

(e) In case of a tie in a scratch contest at any other game 
decided by height or distance, each of the tieing com- 
petitors shall have three additional trials, and the award 
shall be made in accordance with the distances cleared 
in these additional trials. In case of a second tie, three 
more trials shall be allowed, and so on, until a decision 
is reached. 

(/) In case of a tie in any field event, the subsequent 
performances only determine the relative position of 
those who are competing to decide the tie. 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



71 



2. In case of a dead heat in any scratch track event 
the competitors shall not be allowed to divide the prize 
or points, or to toss for them, but must compete again 
at a time and place appointed by the Referee. 

3. In handicap contests, in both track and field events, 
the award shall be given to the competitor who received 
the least allowance. In case of a tie or dead heat be- 
tween two or more competitors who received the same 
allowance, the decision shall be made as in scratch con- 
tests. 

JUMPING. 
RULE XXX. 

EUNNING HIGH JUMP. 

1. The Field Judges shall decide the height at which 
the jump shall commence, and shall regulate the suc^ 
ceeding elevations. 

2. Three jumps are allowed at each height, and a failure 
at the third attempt shall disqualify. 

3. A competitor may commence at any height above the 
minimum height. 

4. At each successive height each competitor shall take 
one trial in his proper turn; then those failing, if any, 
shall have their second trial jump in like order, after 
which those having failed twice shall make their third 
trial jump. 

5. A competitor may decline to jump at any height in 
his turn, and by so doing, forfeits his right to again jump 
at the height declined. 

6. The jump shall be made over a bar resting on pegs 
projecting from the uprights, and when this bar is re- 
moved from its place it shall be counted as a trial jump. 

Neither diving nor somersaulting over the bar shall 
be permitted. 

7. A line shall be drawn 3 feet in front of the bar and 
parallel therewith, to be known as a balk line, and 
stepping over such line, in any attempt, shall be counted 



72 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



as a "balk," and two successive "balks" shall be 
counted as a trial jump. 

8. As soon as a competitor makes a spring in order to 
jump, this shall be counted as a trial jump. 

9. The distance of the run before the jump shall be un- 
limited. 

10. All measurements shall be made perpendicularly 
from the ground to the upper side of the bar where it is 
lowest. 

11. The employment of weights or grips of any kind is 
forbidden. 

12. A competitor may place a mark for his take-off in 
running broad or running high jump. 

13. The uprights shall not be moved during the competi- 
tion. 

14. The uprights shall be at least 12 feet (3.66 meters) 
apart. 

15. The take-off ground about the jump must be level. 

RULE XXXI. 

STANDING HIGH JUMP. 

1. The feet of the competitor may be placed in any posi- 
tion, but shall leave the ground only once in making an 
attempt to jump. When the feet are lifted from the 
ground twice, or two springs are made in making the 
attempt, it shall count as one trial jump without result. 
A competitor may rock forward and backward, lifting 
heels and toes alternately from the ground, but he may 
not lift either foot clear from the ground or slide it along 
in any direction on the ground. 

2. With these exceptions, the rules are the same as those 
for the Running High Jump. 

RULE XXXII. 

RUNNING BROAD JUMP. 

1. The length of the run is unlimited. Each competitor 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



73 



shall be allowed three jumps, and the five best shall be 
allowed three more jumps. Each competitor shall be 
credited with the best of all his jumps. 

2. When jumped on earth the take-off shall be from a 
joist sunk flush with the ground, the outer edge of which 
shall be called the scratch line. In front of the scratch line, 
over a width of 3.94 inches (10 centimeters), the ground 
shall be sprinkled with soft earth or sand to make it 
slightly higher than the take-off joist. The measure- 
ment of the jumps shall be made at right angles from the 
scratch line, or scratch line extended, to the nearest 
break in the ground made by any part of the body of the 
competitor. 

3. If any competitor swerves aside at the taking-off line, 
or the line extended, or touches the ground in front of 
the take-off joist with any part of his shoe or foot, such 
jump shall not be measured, but it shall be counted 
against the competitor as one jump. 

4. A line shall be drawn 6 feet in rear of the scratch 
line, to be known as the balk line, and stepping, or falling, 
over such line, or such line extended, in any attempt, 
shall be counted as a "balk," and two successive balks 
shall be counted as a trial jump. 

5. The rules for the Running High Jump shall govern, 
where applicable. 

RULE XXXIII. 

STANDING BROAD JUMPS. 

1. (See rules for the Standing High Jump, as well as, 
where applicable, for the Running Broad Jump.) 

RULE XXXIV. 

HOP, STEP AND JUMP. 

1. The competitor shall first land upon the same foot 
with which he shall have taken off, the reverse foot shall 
be used for the second landing, and both feet shall be 
used for the third landing. 



74 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



2. In all other respects, the rules for the Running Broad 
Jump shall govern. 

RULE XXXV. 

POLE VAULT. 

1. The height of the bar at starting and at each suc- 
cessive elevation shall be determined by the Field Judges. 

2. Each competitor shall be allowed three jumps at each 
height, and the competitor who fails at the third attempt 
shall be disqualified. 

3. A competitor may commence at any height above the 
minimum height. He must, however, jump at every 
following height until he has forfeited his right to com- 
pete further except in the all-around and decathlon com- 
petitions. 

4. The vault shall be made over a bar resting on pegs. 

5. As soon as a competitor has left the ground for the 
purpose of making a jump, the jump is counted as a 
trial. 

6. A line shall be drawn 15 feet in front of the bar and 
parallel therewith, to be known as the balk line, and 
stepping over such a line, or such line extended, in any 
attempt, shall be counted as a "balk," and two successive 
"balks" shall be counted as a trial jump. 

7. Any competitor shall be allowed to dig a hole not 
more than one foot in diameter at the take-off, in which 
to plant his pole. 

8. A competitor must not, in the moment that he makes 
a jump, or after leaving the ground, place his lower hand 
above the upper one or move the upper hand higher up 
on the pole. 

9. Poles may have a binding, but must not have any 
further support for the hands. 

10. If the uprights are moved, they shall not be moved 
more than two feet in any direction, and not more than 
one hole may be made by a competitor. The take-off 
ground about the jump shall be level. 



SPAUHNG'S ATHLETIC LIBRAEY. 



75 



11. The uprights shall be at least 12 feet (3.66 meters) 
apart. 

12. All measurements shall be made perpendicularly 
from the ground to the upper side of the bar where it is 
lowest. 

13. In the pole vault, if in making a trial the competi- 
tor's pole is broken, it shall not count as a trial. 

14. The rules governing the Running Broad Jump shall 
also govern the Pole Vault for Distance, except that when 
the man leaves the ground in an attempt, it shall be 
counted a trial. 

Note — If the uprights are moved, the Field Judges should 
make a re-measurement, because if there is any inequality in 
the ground at all, changing the uprights may make a difference 
varying from one inch to a quarter of an inch, and a competitor 
should not be allowed to obtain an advantage in that way. 



THROWING. 
RULE XXXVI. 

THROWING THE DISCUS. 

1. All throws, to be valid, must fall within a 90 degree 
sector marked on the ground. 

2. It shall be a foul throw if the competitor, after he has 
stepped into the circle and started to make his throw, 
touches with any part of his body or clothing the ground 
outside the circle before the discus strikes the ground. 
It shall also be a foul if the competitor steps on circle. 

3. The measurements of each throw shall be made from 
the nearest mark made by the fall of the discus to the 
inside circumference of the circle on a line from such 
mark made by the discus to the center of the circle. 

4. Each competitor shall have three trial throws, and the 
best five shall have three more. Each competitor shall 
be credited with the best of all his throws. 



76 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



RULE XXXVII. 

PUTTING THE SHOT. 

1. The shot st ; put from the shoulder with one 
hand only, and it must never be brought behind the 
shoulder. 

2. In the middle of the circumference of the circle, at 
the front half thereof, shall l:e pla:-;; a st :p-:: :ari. firmly 
fastened to the ground. In making his puts, the fret 
of the competitor may rest against but not on 

this board. 

3. A fair put shall be one in which no part of the person 
of the competitor touches the top of the stop-board, the 
top of the circle, or the ground outside the circle. 

4. The measurement of earn put shall be take:: at en- 
circle from the nearest mark made by the fall of the shot 
to the inside of the circumference of the circle on a line 
from such mark made by the shot to the center of the 
circle. 

5. Foul puts and letting go the shot in making an at- 
tempt shall be counted as trial puts without result. It 
shall also be a foul if the competitor steps on the circle, 
or leaves the circle before his throw has been m 

6. Each competitor shall have three trial puts, and the 
best five shall have three more. Each competitor shall 
be credited with the best of all his puts. 

RULE XXXVIII. 

JAVELIN THROWING. 

1. The-throwing shall take place from behind a scratch 
line properly marked, which snail re a board 2| inches 
(7 centimeters) in width and 12 feet s 3.66 meters) in 
length, sunk flush with the ground. 

2. The javelin must be held by the grip, and no other 
method of holding is admissible. 

3. No throw shall be counted in which the point of the 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



77 



javelin does not strike the ground before any part of 
the shaft. 

4. The throw is measured from the point at which the 
point of the javelin first strikes the ground to the scratch 
line or the scratch line produced. 

5. Each competitor shall have three trial throws, and 
the best five shall have three more. Each competitor 
shall be credited with the best of all his throws. 

6. The thrower must not place his foot or feet upon the 
board. 

7. In javelin throwing the competitor must not cross the 
line until his throw has been marked. 

8. In throwing the javelin, if the javelin breaks while 
in the air, it shall not count as a trial. 

RULE XXXIX. 

THROWING THE HEAVY WEIGHT. 

1. In making his throw, the competitor may assume any 
position he chooses and use both hands. 

2. Foul throws and letting go the weight in an attempt 
shall count as trial throws without result. 

3. It shall also be a foul if the competitor steps on the 
circle, or leaves the circle before his throw has been 
marked. 

THROWING FOR DISTANCE. 

4. A fair throw shall be one where no part of the body of 
the competitor touches the top of the circle or the ground 
outside the circle. 

5. The measurement of each throw shall be taken at the 
circle from the nearest mark made by the fall of any part 
of the weight or handle to the inside edge of the circum- 
ference of the circle on a line from such mark to the 
center of the circle. 

6. Each competitor shall have three trial throws, and 
the best five shall have three more. Each competitor 
shall be credited with the best of all his throws. 



78 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



THROWING FOR HEIGHT. 

7. A barrel head 3 feet in diameter shall be suspended 
horizontally in the air. 

8. The Field Judges shall determine the height at which 
the barrel head shall be fixed at the beginning of the com- 
petition, and at each successive elevation. 

9. A fair throw shall be one where no part of the body 
of the competitor touches the ground outside the circle 
before the weight touches the barrel head, and where any 
part of the weight or handle touches any part of the bar- 
rel head. 

10. The measurement of each throw shall be from the 
ground perpendicularly up to the lowest part of the barrel 
head. 

11. The method of competition shall be the same as in 
the Running High Jump. 

RULE XL. 

THROWING THE HAMMER. 

1. All throws to be valid throws must fall within a 90 
degree sector marked on the ground. 

2. A fair throw shall be where no part of the body of the 
competitor touches the ground outside the circle. 

3. It shall also be a foul if the competitor steps on the 
circle or leaves the circle before his throw has been 
marked. 

4. Each competitor shall have three trial throws, and 
the best five shall have three more. Each competitor 
shall be credited with the best of all his throws. 

5. The measurement of the throws shall be from the 
nearest edge of the first mark made by the head of the 
hammer to the inside circumference of the circle on a line 
from such mark made by the hammer to the center of 
circle. 

6. Letting go of the hammer in an attempt, or touching 
the ground outside the circle with any portion of the 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 79 

body while the hammer is in hand, are foul throws, 
which shall not be measured but which shall count as 
throws. 

7. In hammer throwing, if the hammer breaks while in 
the air, it shall not be considered a throw. 

RULE XLI. 

METHOD OF MEASURING. 

1. In all weight events and broad jumps, that portion of 
the tape showing the feet and inches must be held by 
the official at the take-off or at the circle. 



RULE XLIL 

HURDLES. 

1. Different heights, distances and number of hurdles 
may be selected for hurdle races. 

2. In the 120 yards hurdle race, each hurdle shall 
be 3 feet 6 inches high. They shall be placed 10 yards 
apart, with the first hurdle 15 yards distant from the 
starting point, and the last hurdle 15 yards before 
the finishing line. In the 220 yards hurdle race 10 hurd- 
les shall be used, each hurdle to be 2 feet 6 inches high. 
They shall be placed 20 yards apart, with the first hurdle 
20 yards distant from the starting mark, and the last 
hurdle 20 yards before the finishing line. 

3. In the 440 yards hurdle race 10 hurdles shall be used, 
each hurdle to be 3 feet in height. The first hurdle shall 
be placed 40 yards from the scratch mark, the remaining 
hurdles shall be placed 40 yards apart, and the distance 
from the last hurdle to the finishing line shall be 40 yards. 

4. In the 110 meter hurdle race there shall be 10 hurdles, 
each hurdle 1.06 meters (3 feet 6 inches) high. The 
distance from the scratch mark to the first hurdle shall 
be 13.72 meters (15 yards); the remaining hurdles shall 



80 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



be placed 9.14 meters (10 yards) apart, and the distance 
from the last hurdle to the winning post shall be 14.02 
meters (46 feet). 

5. In the 400 meter hurdle race, there shall be 10 nights 
of hurdles, each hurdle to be 3 feet in height. The first 
hurdle shall be placed 45 meters (49.213 yards) from the 
scratch mark, the remaining hurdles shall be placed 35 
meters (38.277 yards) apart, and the distance from the 
last hurdle to the winning post shall be 40 meters (43.745 
yards). 

6. In hurdle races of other distances, and with different 
numbers of hurdles, the hurdles shall be placed at equal 
intervals, with the same distance between the first hurdle 
and the starting point and the last hurdle and the 
finishing line as between each of the hurdles. 

7. In making a record it shall be necessary for the com- 
petitor to jump over every hurdle in its proper position, 
and no record shall be allowed unless all the hurdles 
remain standing after the competitor clears them. 

8. A competitor knocking down three or more hurdles 
or any portion of three or more hurdles in a race shall be 
disqualified. A competitor who runs around or trails 
his leg or foot alongside any hurdle shall be disqualified. 

9. In all championship hurdle races of the Amateur 
Athletic Union, or any of its Associations, up to and in- 
cluding 300 yards, each competitor shall have separate 
hurdles and a separate course marked out and measured 
independently, whether races are run straightaway or 
with turns. 

RULE XLIII. 

MAKATHON RACE. 

1. The Marathon Race shall be run on high roads. The 
start and finish may be on the athletic grounds. 

2. Each competitor must send with his entry a medical 
certificate, from a physician of standing, certifying to 
his fitness to take part in a race of this kind. 

\ 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



81 



3. No competitor, either at the start or during the prog- 
ress of the race, may take any so-called drugs on pain 
of immediate disqualification. 

4. A competitor must at once retire from the race if 
ordered to do so by a member of the medical staff, 
officially appointed. 

RULE XLIV. 

RELAY RACES. 

1. A line shall be drawn 10 yards on each side of the 
starting line of each relay to be known as the starting 
zone. Within this zone each runner must pass the baton 
to the succeeding runner. No member of a relay team 
in order to relieve his team mate can run outside of such 
zone. The baton must be passed, not thrown or dropped 
by a competitor and picked up by the one succeeding 
him. Violation of any of these rules by any competitor 
shall disqualify the team. 

2. No man can run two relays in any one team. 

3. The composition of a team cannot be changed 
after a trial heat has been run. No change can be made 
in the order of running, except in relay races where each 
competitor runs the same distance. 

4. The positions of the teams must be drawn for. 

5. In all relay races an announcement must be made 
as to the distance each competitor is to run in his relay. 
Any competitor failing to run the distance required shall 
cause his team to be disqualified. 

6. In the case of a handicap relay race the runner 
on the first relay is allowed the total handicap allowed 
each team. 

7. In all handicap medley races the longest distance 
must be run first. 

8. All teams entered in relay races shall be lettered, 
commencing with the letter "A." If any organization 
shall enter more than one team, each team shall have a 



82 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRAHY. 



different letter and it shall be the duty of the clerk of 
the course to check each individual member of said 
teams to see that they are wearing the proper letter. 

RULE XLV. 

TEAM RACES. 

1. Track team races may be divided, if necessary, into 
trial heats and a final heat. 

RULE XLVI. 

CROSS-COUNTRY RACE. 

1. The race shall be cross-country on a course properly 
marked and surveyed. The start and finish may be 
within the athletic grounds. 

2. The course must be properly marked, preferably with 
red flags to the left and white flags to the right, which 
must be observable from a distance of 125 yards. In 
all other respects the rules governing track competitions 
shall apply. 

RULE XLVII. 

STEEPLECHASE RACE. 

1. There shall be five jumps, including a water jump, 
to each quarter mile. 

2. The hurdles shall be not more than 3 feet high. The 
hurdles at the water jump shall be firmly fixed. 

3. Each competitor shall go over or through the water, 
and any one who steps to one side or the other of the 
jump shall be disqualified. The competitor must clear 
each jump, but may vault each obstacle. 

RULE XLVIII. 

WALKING. 

1. Walking is a succession of steps and, in contradistinc- 
tion to running (wherein both feet may be off the ground 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



S3 



at the same time) , in walking there must always be contact 
with the ground with some portion of one of the feet, 

2. In track races the following code of rules governing 
walking must be adhered to, or else disqualification will 
ensue: 

(a) Leg Action — As the foremost foot in taking a step 
touches the ground, the knee must not be bent. The 
heel must touch the ground first and the toe be the last 
portion of the foot to leave it. It is imperative that the 
heel of the foremost foot must touch the ground before 
the toe of the other foot ceases to have contact with it. 

(6) Carriage of Body — The body must be kept 
strictly upright. 

Note. — Discretionary power is given to the judge or judges of 
walking to decide whether, in the event of the body being in- 
clined forward, such attitude is the result of fatigue or arises 
from some cause beyond the control of the competitor; and if 
it be, and he or they are convinced that the rule has been broken 
for such reason only, ind that the competitor is still walking 
fairly otherwise, disqualification need not necessarily follow from 
this cause alone. 

(c) Carriage of Arms — The arms may be held in any 
way the walker likes, but it is advised that they be 
carried well up. 

3. A disqualified competitor must at once leave the 
track. 

COMBINED COMPETITIONS. 
RULE XLIX. 

PENTATHLON. 

1. The competition comprises the following events: 
Running Broad Jump, Throwing the Javelin, 200 meters 
flat race, Throwing the Discus, and 1,500 meters flat 
race. The events shall be contested in the above-men- 
tioned order. 

2. Three trials only are allowed in both jumping and 
throwing. 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



3. In the 200 meters flat race, groups of three men are 
formed by lot. If the number of runners is such that 
after the groups have been arranged one man is over to 
run alone, one man shall be drawn by lot from among 
the remaining competitors to run against him. 

4. In each event the winner shall receive 1 point, the 
second man 2 points, etc. 

5. Points are counted according to the result obtained. 
In the event of a tie, the competitors need not compete 
again. If thus two or more obtain the same result, those 
so tieing receive the same points, and the next man 
receives a point corresponding to the position in which 
he finishes relative to all the other competitors. 

6. All compete in the first three events. The total 
points of the competitors are counted, and the twelve 
best (i. e., those with the lowest numbers of points) shall 
qualify to compete in the Discus Throwing. If the 
counting of the points results in a tie for the twelfth' 
place, all such may start in the Discus Throwing. 

7. The points of the competitors entitled to compete in 
the Discus Throwing shall then be counted again with 
reference to their relative order in each of the first three 
events, their points being counted as if they alone had 
competed without reference to the placing of other com- 
petitors. The Discus Throwing and 1,500 meters flat 
shall then be started with the points thus awarded. 

8. After the Discus Throwing, the six best compete in 
the 1,500 meters flat race, to be run in one heat. 

9. If more than one tie for the sixth place after the Dis- 
cus Throwing, all such may compete in the 1,500 meters 
flat race. 

10. In the flat races, the time for each competitor shall 
be taken with three watches. 

11. The winner shall be the one who, on the completion 
of the 1,500 meters flat race, has obtained the lowest 
total points in the five competitions. 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



85 



12. If at the end of the competition one or more of the 
competitors obtain the same number of points, their 
respective positions shall be determined by the valuation 
of their result according to the Decathlon table. 



RULE L. 

DECATHLON. 

1. The competition comprises the following events: 100 
meters flat, Running Broad Jump, Putting the Weight, 
Running High Jump, and 400 meters flat, on the first 
day. Hurdle Race (110 meters), Throwing the Discus, 
Pole Vault, Throwng the Javelin, and 1,500 meters flat, 
on the following day. The events shall be contested in 
the above mentioned order. 

2. Three trials only are allowed in both jumping and 
throwing. 

3. Both in the 100 meters and 400 meters flat races, as 
well as in the hurdle race, three or four competitors start 
in each group. On the other hand, in the 1,500 meters 
race, five or six shall start. However, the Referee shall 
have the right, in case of necessity, to make alterations. 

4. The composition of the groups is decided by lot. 

5. The time for each competitor shall be taken with 
three watches. 

6. The winner shall be the one who has obtained the 
highest number of points in the ten divisions. 

7. For a result similar to the best result obtained at 
previous Olympic Games, 1,000 points will be awarded. 
Smaller results are valued in accordance with a special 
table which will be issued at a later date. If a result 
.jKceeds the best "Olympic" result, correspondingly higher 
•joints will be awarded. 

How to score the Decathlon. (See pages 118-126.) 



S6 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



RULE LI. 

ALL-AROUND COMPETITION. 

1. The competition comprises the following events: 
100 yards run, putting 16-lb. shot, running high jump, 
880 yards walk, throwing 16-lb. hammer, pole vault for 
height, 120 yards hurdle (10 flights. 3 feet 6 inches high)] 
throwing 56-lb. weight for distance, running broad jump, 
one mile run. The events shall be contested in the above- 
mentioned order. Each event shall be started five 
minutes after the event preceding it has been contested. 

2. In each event the World's best amateur record on 
the Amateur Athletic Union record book in 1893. when 
the scoring tables were adopted by this Union, shall be 
taken as a maximum, for which 1,000 points will be 
allowed. Then a standard or limit is established, and 
performances equal to or worse than these standards 
score nothing. For performances between the maximum 
and the limit, points are allowed in accordance with 
graded table shown in Section 7. For a performance 
exceeding the record, correspondingly higher points 
will be awarded. 

3. Three trials only are allowed in both jumping 
and throwing. 

4. In the 100 yards run and 120 yards high hurdle 
race, the time of the winner only is taken and the other 
contestants must be scored by their distance back of 
the winner. Tire final 10 yards of the course is marked 
off with whitewash lines one foot apart. The judges 
shall station themselves in such positions as will enaljle 
them to note accurately the distance from the finish 
line of the second, third, and fourth men at the moment 
the first man touches the tape. Xot more than four men 
shall start in any heat. If there are more than four men 
in the competition they shall be divided into heats of 
not more than three starters. The fastest three men. 
as nearly as the officials can judge, shall be placed m 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



87 



one heat; the next three in speed in the next heat, and 
so on down to the slowest three for the last heat. When 
the judges announce the distances between the con- 
testants, the scorers shall allow points as follows: 

100 yards — To the first man, the points allowed in 
the table for his time; to the second, third and fourth 
men, the points allowed for the first man's time, less 
seven points for each foot that each man is behind the 
winner. 

120 yards high hurdle — To the first man, the points 
allowed in the table for his time; to the second, third and 
fourth men, the points allowed for the first man's time 
less five points for each foot that each man is behind 
the winner. 

5. In the 880 yards walk and one mile run the time 
for each competitor shall be taken by three watches. 

6. The winner shall be the one who has obtained the 
highest number of points in the ten divisions. 

7. How to score the All-around : (See pages 127-130 .) 

RULE LIL 

TUG-OF-WAR WITHOUT CLEATS. 

1. The teams shall consist of equal numbers of com- 
petitors. The rope shall be of sufficient length to allow 
for a pull of twelve feet, and for twelve feet slack at 
each end, together with four feet for each competitor; 
it shall be not less than four inches in circumference and 
shall be without knots or other holdings for the hands. 
A center tape shall be affixed to the center of the rope, 
and six feet on each side of the center tape a side tape 
shall be affixed to the rope. A center line shall be marked 
on the ground, and six feet on each side of the center 
line a side line parallel thereto. At the start the rope 
shall be taut and the center tape shall be over the 
center line and the competitors outside the side lines. 
During no part of the pull shall the rope be tied or in 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



any way crossed by the anchor man, nor shall he wil- 
fully place either hand on the ground. 
2. There shall be one Judge and two Inspectors who 
shall be responsible for seeing that the rules are properly 
carried out. The Judge shall start the competition by 
word of mouth and take charge of the center and side 
lines, and give effect to the result of any pull by blow- 
ing a whistle. The Inspectors shall take charge of the 
teams and see that members of such teams do not 
wilfully touch the ground with any part of the body 
other than the feet, and report to the Judge any 
infringement of this rule. It shall be in the discretion 
of the Judge to disqualify the offending team and award 
the pull in question to the opposing side, or he may 
disqualify the offending team from the competition. A 
pull shall be won when one team shall have pulled the 
side tape of the opposing side over their own side line, 
or if any portion of the foot of any competitor of the 
opposing side goes beyond the center line. In the event 
of both teams leaving go of the rope before either side 
has pulled the side tape of the opposing side over their 
own side line, the pull shall be declared no pull and shall 
not constitute one of the requisite number of pulls. No 
competitor shall make any hole in the ground with his 
feet, or in any other way, before the start. In all com- 
petitions confined to certain weights, two Clerks shall 
be appointed who shall be responsible to the Judge for 
the correct weighing of the competitors before the start. 
All heats shall be won by two pulls out of three. All 
competitors shall wear boots or shoes as per regulation; 
heel and sides of heel (i. e., from the face to the seat) 
shall be perfectly flush. No prepared boots or shoes, 
heel plates (sunken or otherwise), projecting nails, tips, 
springs, Blakeys, rubbers, points, hollows or projections 
of any kind shall be allowed. 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



89 



3. No gloves or adhesive substance whatever shall be 
used on the hands or ropes. 

4. Where three teams only compete, the team drawing 
the bye shall pull off for second prize if defeated by the 
winner of the first round. 



1. The Tug-of-War shall be pulled on 8 wooden cleats, 
each 22 inches long, 6 inches high, and at least 4 inches 
thick. These shall be set on edge and bolted to a board 
base and shall be at least 6 feet 6 inches apart, with the 
first cleat, on each side of a central clamp, at least 6 feet 
distant therefrom. 

2. The clamp shall be equidistant from the first cleat 
on either side and shall be of sufficient strength to hold 
the rope in position until released, but not make an 
appreciable kink in the rope. 

3. The- rope used shall be of manila, three-stranded, and 
not less than 43^ nor more than 5 inches in circumference. 

4. No mechanical device shall be used for holding the 
rope, but a belt may be worn to protect the body of 
the anchor man, although the flanges to hold the rope 
in place around the belt shall not be constructed so as 
to bind on the rope in any position that the anchor 
may assume. The belt shall not weigh more than 20 
pounds. 

5. No knot of any kind shall be tied in the rope, and the 
rope shall not be passed more than once around the body 
of the anchor. 

6. Leather shields and gloves may be used by the con- 
testants and adhesive substances may be put on the same. 

7. Competitors shall not use weights in unlimited 
pulls, but in pulls limited to specific weights, competi- 
tors may use weights, provided the total weight of the 
team, including the weights, does not exceed the 
weight limit. 



RULE LIII. 



TUG-OF-WAR WITH CLEATS. 




/ 



90 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



8. When the competition is limited to teams of a given 
weight, competitors shall be weighed immediately before 
competing and shall be weighed as they pull, viz: 
including clothing, shoes, belt, etc. 

9. In no case shall any man pull on more than one team 
in a competition, and no substitute shall be allowed to 
pull on any team that has pulled a trial. 

10. The standard time limit for each pull shall be five 
minutes, and a rest of not less than ten minutes shall be 
allowed each competitor between trial pulls. A shorter 
or longer time limit may be agreed upon in other than 
championship contests. 

11. Any position may be assumed by the competitors 
before the start, which shall be made by pistol fire 
after the teams have been first notified to "get ready". 

12. In case a team gains 3 feet from its opponent, it 
shall be awarded the pull. 

13. Immediately before the competition the captains of 
the opposing teams shall draw their numbers and com- 
pete in a preliminary round to reduce the number of 
competing teams to 2, 4, 8, 16, and so on. (Thus if there 
are 3, 5, or 9 teams, have one preliminary pull to 
reduce to 2, 4, or 8; if 6 or 10 teams, have two pulls 
to reduce to 4 or 8; if 7 or 11 teams, have three pulls 
to reduce to 4 or 8, and so on). When the class is 
brought to a multiple of 2, 4, 8 or 16 the drawings 
proceed regularly to the final pull. 

14. The winner of the final pull receives first prize, 
the loser receives the second prize, and the two teams 
which were defeated by the teams winning the first and 
second prizes in the previous round of pulls, shall again 
pull to determine the winner of the third and fourth 
prizes. 

15. In all drawings where the numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, etc., 
are drawn, number 1 competes with number 2; 3 with 4, 
and so on. 



SPALDING'S OFFICIAL BASKET BALL GUIDE. 



Official Basket Ball Rules for 1918-19 

Copyright, 1918, by the Joint Rules Committee (representing the Young Men's Christian 
Association, the Amateur Athletic Union and the National Collegiate Athletic 
Association) and the American Sports Publishing Company. 

AS ADOPTED BY COMMITTEES REPRESENTING THE 

Young Men's Christian Association 
Amateur Athletic Union 
National Collegiate Athletic Association 

THE GAME. 

The game of Basket Ball is played by two teams 
of five men each, the ball being passed from one 
player to another. The purpose of each team is to 
sr^^e as many points as possible by tossing the ball 
into its own basket, and at the same time prevent 
the other team from securing possession of the 
ball or scoring. 

RULE 1. 
EQUIPMENT. 

Section 1. The Playing Court shall be a rect- court: 
angular surface with a rectangular end zone 2 feet in 
depth and extending the full width of the court. 
The court shall be free from obstructions and shall Dimensions, 
have maximum dimensions of 90 feet in length by 
50 feet in width and minimum dimensions of 60 
feet in length by 35 feet in width. 

NOTE — By mutual agreement of the captains, 
Section 1 and the distance of the boundaries from 
obstructions named in Section 2, may be changed. 

Sec. 2. The Court shall be marked by well de- Boundary lines, 
fined lines, which shall be not less than 2 inches 



SPALDING'S OFFICIAL BASKET BALL GUIDE. 9 

in width and which shall be at every point at least RULE t. 
3 feet from any fixed obstruction. The lines on Distance from 
the long sides of the court shall be termed the obstructions - 
Side Lines, those on the short sides, the End Lines; 
that is, the outside lines of the end zones shall be 
the end lines. (See diagram on page 8.) 

Sec. 3. The Center Circle shall have a radius Center circle, 
of 2 feet and it shall be marked in the center of 
the court. (See diagram on page 8.) 

Sec. 4. The Free Throw Lines shall be marks Free throw linei. 
24 inches in length and 1 inch in width, the middle 
points of which shall be on the straight line con- 
necting the middle points of the end lines. They 
shall be marked in the court parallel to, and at a 
distance of 15 feet from the inner boundaries of 
the end zones and 17 feet from the inner edges of 
the end lines. (See diagram on page 8.) 

Sec. 5. The Free Throw Lanes shall be spaces Free throw lanes, 
marked in the court by lines perpendicular to the 
end lines at a distance of 3 feet on either side 
from the middle points of the end lines. These 
perpendicular lines shall be terminated and the lanes 
further marked by arcs of circles having a 6-foot 
radius and centers at the middle points of the free 
throw lines. (See diagram on page 8.) 



RULE 2. 

Section 1. Backboards must be provided, the backboards! 
dimensions of which shall be 6 feet horizontally and Slzeandmatenal - 
4 feet vertically. These backboards shall be of 



10 



SPALDING'S OFFICIAL BASKET BALL GUIDE. 



RULE 2. plate glass or wood, painted white, or any other 
material that is permanently flat and rigid. 

Position of Sec. 2. The backboards shall be located in a 
ac oar s. p OS j t i on at eac h en( j a j- right angles to the floor. 

Their centers shall lie in the perpendiculars erected 
at the middle point of the inner boundaries of the 
end zones. 

Spectators kept Sec. 3. The backboards shall be protected from 



3 feet from 
backboards. 



spectators to a distance of at least 3 feet. 



RULE 3. 

baskets 3 Section 1. The Baskets shall be nets of cord 
Mate potition! or °ther material, suspended from metal rings 18 
inches in inside diameter. The nets shall be so 
constructed or tied as to check the ball momentarily 
as it passes through the basket. 

Position of rings. Sec. 2. The rings shall be rigidly attached to 
the backboards at a point 1 foot from the bottom 
and 3 feet from either side, supported by a hori- 
zontal arm which if extended would pass through 
the center of the rings. The rings shall be placed 
in such a position that they shall lie in a horizontal 
plane 10 feet above the floor and so that the nearest 
point of the inside edge shall be 6 inches from the 
playing surface of the backboard. 

RULE 4. 

ball: Section 1. The Ball shall be round; it shall be 
\ anoTweight! m ade of a rubber bladder covered with a leather 
case; it shall be not less than 30 nor more than 32 



SPALDING'S OFFICIAL BASKET BALL GUIDE. 



11 



inches in circumference; and it shall weigh not less RULE 4. 
than 20 nor more than 23 ounces. The home team 
shall provide a new ball, or two good used balls 
satisfactory to the Referee. If used balls are 
provided, the visiting team shall choose the one 
with which the game shall be played, and they shall 
have it as their practice ball. If a new ball is pro- 
vided, neither team shall use it in practice. 



RULE 5. 

PLAYERS AND SUBSTITUTES. 

Section 1. Each team shall consist of 5 players, weams. 
one of whom shall be captain. 

Sec. 2. The captain shall be the representative captain: 
of his team and shall direct and control its play. Dutiesand 

1 J powers. 

He shall, before the game starts, furnish the 
Scorers with names, numbers and positions of 
players and substitutes. He may address any offi- 
cial on matters of interpretation or to obtain 
essential information when necessary, if it is done 
in a courteous manner. 

Sec. 3. A substitute before going upon the court Substitution, 
shall report to Scorer, giving his name, number and how made - 
position. He shall not enter the court until play has 
been suspended and shall not participate in the 
game until he has been recognized by the Referee. 
A player who has once left the game shall not 
re-enter it. As soon as the ball is dead for any 
reason, or whenever play can be suspended without 
disadvantage, the Referee shall allow the substitute 
to enter the game. 



12 



SPALDING'S OFFICIAL BASKET BALL GUIDE. 



RULE 5. Sec. 4. A player may not leave the playing 
Player leaving court without permission of the Referee or the 
court, umpire until time is called at the end of the half. 
Players to be Sec. 5. All players shall be numbered with plain 
numbered, num k ers a j- i eas t- s ; x i nc hes high and one inch wide 

f astened securely on the backs of their shirts. 
RULE 6. 

OFFICIALS AND DUTIES OF OFFICIALS. 

officials. Section 1. The officials shall be a Referee, an 
Umpire, two Timekeepers, and two Scorers. 

NOTE — It cannot be too strongly emphasized 
that the Referee and Umpire of a given game 
should not be connected in any way with either 
of the organizations represented, and that they 
should be thoroughly competent and impartial. The 
Referee and Umpire should wear uniforms distinct 
from those of either team. The officials have no 
authority to agree to changes in the rules except 
those mentioned in Rule lj Section 1 Note and Sec- 
tion 2. 

Duties of Sec. 2. The Referee shall put the ball in play; 
Referee, gj^jj decide w h en the ball is in play, when the 
ball is dead, to whom it belongs and when a goal has 
been made. He shall call fouls, shall administer 
all penalties, shall recognize substitutes, and shall 
order "time out" when necessary. He shall an- 
nounce each goal as made, indicating w r ith his 
fingers the point value of the goal. He shall also 
publicly announce the score at the end of each half. 
This final announcement terminates his official con- 
nection with that game. 



SPALDING'S OFFICIAL BASKET BALL GUIDE. 



13 



Sec. 3. The Referee shall remove from the RULE 6. 
game a player who has made four personal fouls, 

Referee 

or a player who has committed a disqualifying foul. rem <>ves. 

Sec. 4. The Referee shall have power to call Referee decides 
fouls for unsportsmanlike conduct, or to make de- rules, 
cisions on any points not specifically covered in 
the rules. 



Sec. 5. Neither the Referee nor the Umpire Not to question 

each other 
decisions. 



shall have authority to set aside or question de- 6 



cisions made by the other within the limits of their 
respective duties as outlined in these rules. 

If the Referee and the Umpire make approximate 
simultaneous decisions on the same play and the 
decisions involve different penalties, the one draw- 
ing attention to the graver of the two shall take 
precedence. 

Sec. 6. The Referee and the Umpire shall have Time and piact 
power to make decisions for violations of rules f or decislons - 
committed either within or outside the boundary 
lines; also at any moment from the beginning of 
play to the call of time at the end of the game. 
This includes the periods when the game may be 
momentarily stopped for any reason. Fouls may be 
called on any number of players at the same time. 

Sec. 7. The official calling the foul shall desig- Designation of 

nate the offender. A personal foul shall be indi- foul8, 
cated by the official raising his own hand over his 
own head. 

Sec 8. The Referee shall call "time out" in case Referee calls 

of injury to players. The Umpire may stop the ^^ ncaseof 
game by blowing his whistle in case of injury to a 



14 



SPALDING'S OFFICIAL BASKET BALL GUIDE. 



RULE 6. player which the Referee does not see, but "time 
out" is taken only upon order of the Referee. 

feutiesof Sec. 9. The Umpire shall call fouls committed 
Umpire, an y pi a y er> but he shall pay particular attention 
to the players in the back field away from the ball. 
He may, when requested by the Referee, assist in 
out of bounds decisions and shall co-operate with 
him in enforcing the rule against coaching. 

Duties of Sec. 10. The Scorers shall record the goals 
Scorers. m ade anc l the fouls committed; shall distinguish 
in their records between personal and technical 
fouls; and shall notify the Referee immediately 
when the fourth personal foul has been called on 
any player. Their records shall constitute the of- 
ficial score of the game. They shall compare their 
scores after each goal and any discrepancy shall 
be at once referred to the Referee. If they fail 
to notify the Referee at once, the latter shall decide 
in favor of the smaller score, unless he has knowl- 
edge that permits him to decide without reference 
to the scorers. The Scorers shall be provided with 
a horn with which to signal the Referee. 

NOTE — The sounding of the Scorers' horn does 
not stop the game. It is suggested thai the Scorers 
differentiate between personal and technical fouls by 
designating personal fouls P 1} P 2 , P z , etc., and 
technical fouls T. 



Duties of Sec. 11. The Timekeepers shall note when the 
tekeepers. g ame starts ; shall deduct time consumed by stop- 
pages during the game on ordfcr of the Referee; 



SPALDING'S OFFICIAL BASKET BALL GUIDE. 



15 



and shall indicate with a gong, pistol, or whistle RULE 6. 
the expiration of the actual playing time in each 
half or quarter. Upon the sounding of the Time- 
keepers' signal play shall cease instantly, except 
that if the ball is in the air on a try-for-goal when 
the Timekeepers' signal is sounded, play shall con- 
tinue until the ball has entered or missed the basket. 
The Timekeepers' signal terminates actual playing 
time in each half. 

NOTE — It is suggested that the Timekeepers 
use one watch placed on a table before them, or 
otherwise placed so that both may see it. 

Sec. 12. The officials shall blow a whistle Whistle blown, 
whenever necessary to make a decision. when * 

NOTE — It is desirable for all officials of a game 
to have different sounding signals. 



RULE 7. 

PLAYING TERMS. 

Section 1. A Goal is made when the ball enters Goal, 
the basket from above. when made. 

Sec. 2. Out of Bounds — A player is out of piayeroutof 

bounds when any part of his body touches the boun- bouxida - 
dary line or the floor outside of the boundary line. 
(See diagram on page 8.) 

The ball is out of bounds when any part of it Bail out of 

touches the boundary line, the floor outside the bounds - 
boundary line, any object outside the boundary line, 



16 



SPALDING'S OFFICIAL BASKET BALL GUIDE. 



RULE 7. when it is touched by a player who is out of bounds 
or when a held ball is declared in the end zone. 

NOTE — On courts where there is not room for 
the end zones and backboards are placed against 
the wall, the face of the backboard only is in 
bounds; thus if the ball strikes the edge of the back- 
board or the wall behind the backboard, it is out of 
bounds. When the end zone is used, any part of 
the backboard is in bounds. 

Who causes bail The ball is caused to go out of bounds by the last 
to *boundfc P^ a y er touched by it before it crosses the line, or in 
the case of held ball in the end zone, by the player 
whose own goal is at this end of the court. 

Held bail. Sec. 3. Held Ball is declared when two oppos- 
ing players of opposing teams have one or both 
hands on the ball, or when one closely guarded 
player is withholding the ball from play. 

•Timeout." Sec. 4. "Time Out" is declared whenever the 
game can be legally stopped without the loss of 
playing time. 

Foul. Sec. 5. A Foul is a violation of a rule for which 
a free throw is allowed. 

Dead bail. s EC> 6. The Ball is Dead and play shall cease 
until the ball is put in play again in a manner indi- 
cated by the Referee: 

a. When a goal is made. (Center ball.) 

b. When the ball goes out of bounds. 

c. When held ball is declared. 

d. When "time out" is declared. 



SPALDING'S OFFICIAL BASKET BALL GUIDE. 



17 



e. When a foul is called. RULE 7. 

/. After each of the two free throws fol- 
lowing a double foul. (Center ball.) 

g. At expiration of playing time. 

h. When the ball lodges in the supports of 

the basket. (Center ball.) 

i. After the first of two free throws fol- 

lowing two fouls on the same team. 
/. After an illegal free throw. (Center 
ball.) 

NOTE — If, on a try-for-goal, the ball is in the 
air when the signal is sounded, as in Sections d, e 
and g, the ball shall not be dead until it has entered 
or missed the basket. If, however, a foul is called 
on the team throwing for goal, the ball shall be 
dead at the time the foul is committed and the goal, 
if made, shall not count. 

Sec. 7. Running with the Ball is progressing Running 
more than one step in any direction while retaining Wlthba11 - 
possession of the ball. 

Sec. 8. A Dribble is made by a player giving Dribbiinar. 
impetus to the ball by throwing, batting, bouncing or 
rolling it and touching it again before it is touched 
by another player. The instant the ball comes to 
rest in either one or both hands or touches both 
hands simultaneously the dribble ceases. 

NOTE — A player may throw for goal after a 
legal dribble and if he succeeds in making it, it 
counts. Successive tries for goal shall not be con- 
sidered a dribble. 



lb 



SPALDING'S OFFICIAL BASKET BALL GUIDE. 



RULE 7. Sec. 9. Holding is personal contact with an 
Holding, opponent that interferes with the opponent's free- 
dom of movement. 
Blocking. Sec. 10. Blocking is impeding the progress of 
an opponent who has not the ball. 
Freethrow^ Sec. 11. A Free Throw for goal is the privilege 
given a team to throw for goal from a position 
directly behind the free throw line. 
Double toui. Sec 12. A Double Foul is made by both teams 
having fouls called against them simultaneously. 
Deifying game. Sec 13. Delaying the Game is unnecessarily 
interfering with the progress of the game by a 
player. 

Own goal. Sec. 14. Own Goal is the basket for which a 
team is throwing. 
Extra period. Sec 15. Extra- Period is the five-minute exten- 
sion of playing time necessary to break a tie score. 
Personal foul. Sec 16. Personal Foul is holding, blocking, 
tripping, pushing, charging, or committing any other 
form of unnecessary roughness, 
technical foul. Sec 17. Technical Foul is any foul not involv- 
ing personal contact. 
Disqualifying Sec. 18. Disqualifying Foul is rough play for 
fou1 ' which a player is removed from the game. 

RULE 8. 

PLAYING REGULATIONS. 

Section 1. The game shall be started by the 
Referee, who shall toss the ball up between two 
players of opposite teams, as provided in Sections 5 
Length of game, and 6 of this Rule. The game shall consist of two 
intermission, halves of 20 minutes each, with an intermission of 



SPALDING'S OFFICIAL BASKET BALL GUIDE. 



19 



10 minutes between the halves. This is the time of RULE 8. 
actual play. These times may be changed by mutual Time changed by 

1 J J ■ - p \ i • agreement. 

agreement of the captains. When a foul is com- 
mitted simultaneously with or just previous to the 
sounding of the Timekeeper's signal, time shall 
be allowed for the free throw. 

NOTE— In games between secondary schools or 
in playgrounds, etc., where the players are boys, it 
is recommended that the game consist of eight- 
minute quarters, with two-minute intermissions 
between the first and second quarters, and between 
the third and fourth quarters; and a ten-minute 
intermission between the second and third quarters. 
During the two-minute and three-minute intermis- 
sions the players shall not leave the floor, receive 
coaching or change goals. It is further recom- 
mended that for boys fourteen years and under 
the quarters be six minutes, with three minutes rest 
between quarters and ten minutes rest between 
halves. 

Sec. 2. Captains shall be notified three minutes Captains notified 
before the termination of the intermission. If ? f . end . o£ . 

intermission. 

either team is not on the floor ready for play within 
one minute after the Referee calls play, either at 
the beginning of the second half or after time has 
been taken out for any reason, the ball shall be put 
in play in the same manner as if both teams were 
on the floor ready to play. 

Sec. 3. The visiting team shall have choice of choice of baskets, 
baskets in the first half. For the second half the 
teams shall change baskets. 

Sec. 4. The ball may be thrown, batted, Bail thrown, etc., 
to-tnced, rolled or dribbled in any direction. i! any direction - 



20 



SPALDING'S OFFICIAL BASKET BALL GUIDE. 



RULE 8. Sec. 5. The ball shall be put in play in the cen- 
When bail is ter circle: 

Center! a - At the beginning of each half. 

b. After a goal has been made. 

c. After an illegal free throw has been made. 

d. After the ball has lodged in the supports of 

the basket. 

e. After the last free throw following a double 

foul in the following manner: 
Position of Each center player shall stand with both feet 

center players. w j thin h j s ha j f q£ ^ center Qne hand 

behind his back and in contact with it; the hand 
shall remain in this position until the ball has been 
tapped by one or both players. The other players 
may take any position upon the court they may 
desire, provided they do not interfere in any 
way with the Referee or the center players. The 
Referee shall toss the ball upward in a plane at 
right angles to the side lines between the center 
players to a height greater than either of them can 
jump, and so that it will drop between them. 

Centers must Sec. 6. When the Referee puts the ball in play 
tap bail first. ^ cen j- er? j ie s h a u blow his whistle when the 

ball reaches its highest point, after w T hich it must 
be tapped by either one or both of the center play- 
ers. If the ball touches the floor without being 
tapped by one of the jumpers, the Referee shall put 
it in play again in the same place. 

When bail is Sec. 7. When the Referee tosses the ball up 
©lsewhTre^han between two players elsewhere than in the center, 
to center, the players shall assume the same position in rela- 
tion to each other as when jumping in the center. 



SPALDING'S OFFICIAL BASKET BALL GUIDE. 



21 



Sec. 8. The game shall terminate by the sound- RULE 8. 
ing of the Timekeeper's signal indicating the end When game is 
of the game. (See Note of Rule 7, Section 6.) 

RULE 9. 
SCORING. 

Section 1. A goal made from the field shall Value of goals, 
count 2 points ; a goal from a free throw shall count 
1 point. 

Sec. 2. The score of a forfeited game shall be Score of 

2 Q forfeited game. 

Sec. 3. A game shall be decided by the scoring 
of the most points in the playing time. 

Sec. 4. If the score is a tie at the expiration of Tie score, 
the second half, play shall be continued without 
delay or change of baskets for an extra period of Extra period. 
5 minutes, or as many such periods of 5 minutes as 
may be necessary to break the tie. 

Sec. 5. Any team refusing to play after receiv- Refusal to play, 
ing instructions to do so from the Referee shall 
forfeit the game. 

RULE 10. 
OUT OF BOUNDS. 

Section 1. If at any time during the game the How bail is put 
ball goes out of bounds it shall be so declared by in P la y when 

J out of bounds, 

the Referee and put m play again by any opponent 
of the player who caused it to go out of bounds, 
said opponent to stand out of bounds at right angles 
to the spot where it left the court. He shall then 
throw, bounce, or roll the ball to another player 
within the court. 

NOTE — When the space out of bounds is lim- 
ited for any reason, the Referee shall place an 



22 



SPALDING'S OFFICIAL BASKET BALL GUIDE. 



RULE 10. opponent of the player who has the ball out of 
bounds, in the court at least three feet from the 
boundary line. No player of either team shall be 
nearer than this to the player out of bounds. It 
is wise to have a fine line drawn in the court three 
feet inside the boundary lines. 
How ball is put Sec. 2. If the Referee is unable to determine 
^indoubtaTto which player touched the ball last before it went 
who caused it to out of bounds, he shall put the ball in play at a 

go out of bounds. 1 - P . - 

spot about three feet within the court, at right 
angles to the point where the ball crossed the 
boundary line, by selecting two opponents and toss- 
ing the ball up between them as for Held Ball. 

RULE 11. 
TIME OUT, 

^Timeout" on Section 1. "Time Out" shall be taken only 
order of Referee w ^ en orc iered the Referee. He shall order "time 
out" for not more than two minutes at the request 
of a captain or for injuries to players not more than 
Three "time three times for each team during the game. If 
° for eadi team! a substitution is made within two minutes, however, 
a "time out" shall not be charged. 

NOTE — If the Referee orders "time out" because 
of injuries to players or at the request of a cap- 
tain more than three times during a game for one 
team, that team shall be penalized for delaying the 
game and a technical foul shall be charged against 
the captain. 

b a f iustn^w^ U up Sec. 2. When the Referee declares "time out," 
unless it is out of G r orders time to be taken out, in order to resume 
bounds or fbuHs ^ e ^ a n ^all ^ Q tossed up between the two 



SPALDING'S OFFICIAL BASKET BALL GUIDE. 



23 



players of opposing teams nearest to it, at that spot RULE 11. 

where it was when play ceased ; except that if play 

ceases when the ball is out of bounds it shall be 

put in play as for out of bounds; or except also 

that if a foul is called play shall be resumed with 

the free throw for goal. 

Sec. 3. Time shall be taken out for a double 
foul. 

RULE 12. 
HELD BALL. 

Section 1. When Held Ball is called, except in Held bail 
the end zone, the Referee shall take possession of the thrownuD - 
ball. The two players who were in contact with the 
ball shall assume positions similar to the centers at 
the start of the game, but in an imaginary circle at 
the spot where the ball was held. The ball shall 
then be put in play as at the center. 

NOTE — When Held Ball is called in the end 
zone this rule does not apply, but the ball is put in 
play from out of bounds by the defending team. 

RULE 13. 
FREE THROW. 

Section 1. When a foul has been called the Procedure when 
Referee shall immediately secure possession of the f oul 13 caXledm 
ball and place it upon the free throw line of the 
team entitled to the throw. The throw for goal 
shall be made within ten seconds after the ball 
has been placed upon the line. 

Sec. 2. If the goal is made the ball shall be center bail if 

, . « - goal is made. 

put in play at the center. 



24 



SPALDING'S OFFICIAL BASKET BALL GUIDE. 



Exceptions. 



RULE 13. s EC# 3 # if the g 0a i j s missed the ball continues 

Ball in play if ^ j except— 
goal is missed. r < r 

a. That in case of a double foul, the ball is 
dead after the first throw and shall be put 
in play at the center after the second 
throw. 

&. When two or more free throws are awarded 
a team, the ball is dead after each free 
throw except the last one. If the goal 
is missed after the last throw the ball 
continues in play. 

RULE 14. 
VIOLATIONS AND PENALTIES. 
A Player Shall Not— 

Section 1. Throw for basket when the ball is 
dead. 

Sec. 2. While making a free throw for goal, 
touch or cross the free throw line until the ball 
has touched the basket or backboard, or consume 
more than ten seconds in making the free throw. 
PENALTY— (Sections 1 and 2.) 

Goal if made does not count. 

Sec. 3. Cause the ball to go a it of bounds. 
Sec. 4. Carry the ball into the court from out 
of bounds. 

Sec. 5. Touch the ball after putting it in play 
from out of bounds, until it has been touched by 
another player. 

Sec. 6. Hold the ball more than five seconds 
out of bounds before putting it in play. 

PENALTY— (Sections 3, 4, 5, 6.) 

Ball goes to an opponent out of bounds. 



SPALDING'S OFFICIAL BASKET BALL GUIDE. 



25 



Sec. 7. Enter the free throw lane or touch RULE 14. 
the free throw lines while a free throw for goal 
is being made, until the ball has touched the basket 
or backboard, or attempt in any way to disconcert 
the player who has the free throw. If players con- 
tend for positions along the free throw lanes, the 
Referee shall arrange the players so that the de- 
sirable positions are evenly divided. 

PENALTY— (Section 7.) 

For violation by a player of the team throwing 
for goal, the goal if made shall not count and 
if missed the ball shall be put in play at the 
center. If violated by a player of the opposite 
team, the goal if made shall count and if missed 
another free throw shall be allowed. A per- 
sonal foul may be called for rough work on 
free throw lanes. 



RULE 15. 
FOULS AND PENALTIES. 
A. Technical Foul. 
A Player Shall Not— 

Section 1. Run with the ball, kick it, or strike List Ol 
it with the fists. Technical 

Sec. 2. Delay the game by touching the ball Fouls, 
after it has been awarded to an opponent out of 
bounds, or by leaving the court, by removing his 
hand from behind his back on jump ball before the 
ball is tapped, or by otherwise violating the jumping 
rules when the Referee throws the ball up between 
two players, or by otherwise violating the jumping 
rules, or in any other manner unnecessarily delay 
the game. 



SPALDING'S OFFICIAL BASKET BALL GUIDE. 



RULE 15. Sec. 3. Interfere with a player who is returning 
the ball into the court from out of bounds; that 
is, no part of his person shall be outside of the 
court, and he shall not touch the ball until it has 
crossed the line. 

Sec. 4. Pass the ball to another player while 
making a free trial for a goal, but must make an 
honest attempt to cage it. 

Sec 5. Interfere with the ball or basket while 
the ball is on the edge of or within the basket. 

Sec 6. Make a second dribble without first hav- 
ing passed the ball to another player. 

NOTE — Passing the ball from one hand to 
another is not a dribble unless the ball is clearly 
batted. The ball may be batted in the air only 
once during a dribble. 

Sec 7. Go on the court as a substitute until 
he has reported to Scorer and been recognized by 
the Referee. 

PENALTY— (Sections 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7.) 

Free trial for goal. 

Sec 8. There shall be no coaching from the 
side lines during the progress of the game by any 
one officially connected with either team, nor shall 
any such person go on the court during the progress 
of the game except with the permission of the 
Referee or Umpire. 

PENALTY— (Section 8.) 

Free throw for goal. A technical foul charged 
against the captain of offending team. 



Fouls. 



SPALDING'S OFFICIAL BASKET BALL GUIDE. 27 

B. Personal Foul. RULE 15. 

A Player Shall Not— 

Sec. 9. Hold, block, trip, charge or push an List Of 
opponent. Persona! 

Sec. 10. Use unnecessary roughness. 

Sec. 11. Charge in and make bodily contact with 
an opponent who is one of two opposing players 
having one or both hands on the ball. 

PENALTY— (Sections 9, 10, 11.) 

tfree trial for goal. The offender shall be 
charged also with a personal foul. A player 
who has made four personal fouls is automati- 
cally disqualified and shall be removed from the 
game. This provision for disqualification shall 
not be set aside under any consideration, but 
shall be strictly enforced. The Referee may 
disqualify for a single violation of Section 9 
or 10. 

Sec. 12. Charge into, push, hold or otherwise 
foul an opponent who is in the act of throwing for 
the basket. 

PENALTY— (Section 12.) 

Two free trials. The offender shall be charged 
with one personal foul, or may be disqualified. 

NOTE — // the goal is made it counts and the 
two free throws are also allowed. 

Sec. 13. Use flagrant roughness on a player who 
is in the act of throwing for the basket. 

PENALTY— (Section 13.) 

Two free trials and offender shall be dis- 
\ qualified. 



23 



SPALDING'S OFFICIAL BASKET BALL GUIDE. 



Index to Rules 

N after figure indicates Note after Section. 





RULE 


SEC. 


PAGE 






1-N 


7 






1-N 


19 


Backboards — Dimensions, material, position, 


distance from 










1-3 


■9, 10 






1 


10, 11 


u j* „ i „ „ j 




6 


16, 17 






2 


15, 16 






2 


16 






3 


16 






7 


17 






5 


20 






, 5 


20 






4 


19 






1 


21, 22 


How put in play when referee is in doubt 




2 


22 






2 


22, 23 


In play if free throw for goal is missed, 


exceptions. ... 13 


3 


24 






3-6 


24 


T"» 1 * H IT \ * 1 • J • a* £ 




i, 2 


10 






3 


19 






10 


18 






9 


27 






2 


7, 9 


, • 1 ]. , 




1-N 


7 






1-N 


19 






2 


11 


A** . * Tt r . . 1 CI . l. 




6 


20 






5 


20 






3 


9 


How and when ball put m play from..... 




S, 6 


20 






1 


7 








8 






6 


16, 17 


Definitions of Playing Terms — 










7 




15 




7 


2 


15 




7 


2 


15, 16 




7 


2 


16 




7 


3 


16 




7 


4 


16 




7 


5 


16 




.. 7 


6 


16, 17 






z 


17 



SPALDING'S OFFICIAL BASKET BALL GUIDE. 29 

Definitions of Playing Terms — Continued. rule SEC. PAGE 

Dribble 7 8 17 

Holding 7 9 18 

Blocking 7 10 18 

Free throw 7 11 18 

Double foul 7 12 18 

Delaying game 7 13 18 

Own goal 7 14 18 

Extra period 7 15 18 

Personal foul 7 16 18 

Technical foul 7 17 18 

Disqualifying foul 7 18 18 

Delaying game — Penalty for 15 2 25 

Disqualification 15 9-13 27 

Disqualifying foul — Definition of 7 18 18 

Penalty for committing 15 9-13 27 

Dribble— Definition of 7 8 17 

Duties of officials 6 12-15 

End lines 1 2 9 

Equipment 1-4 7-11 

Extra period — Definition of 7 15 18 

Forfeited game — When team refuses to play 9 5 21 

Score of 9 2 21 

Foul— Definition of 7 5 16 

Time, place and number 6 6 13 

Fouls and penalties 15 25-27 

Free throw— Definition of 7 11 18 

How ball is put in play after fouls 13 1-3 23, 24 

When allowed 15 25-27 

Free throw lanes — Position of 1 5 9 

Penalty for entering 14 7 25 

Free throw lines — Position of 1 4 9 

Game— Length of 8 1 18, 19 

Tie 9 4 21 

Goal— Definition of 7 1 15 

Does not count 14 1,2,7 24,25 

Halves— Length of . 8 1 18, 19 

Held ball — Definition of 7 3 16 

How ball is put in play after 12 1 23 

Holding— Definition of 7 9 18 

Penalty for 15 9 27 

Interference — With ball or basket 15 5 26 

Intermission 8 1 18, 19 

Kicking the ball — Penalty for 15 1 25,26 

Obstructions — Distance of boundary lines from 1 2 7, 9 

Officials and duties of.. 6 12-15 

Out of bounds — Definition of 7 2 15, 16 

How ball is put in play from f , , 10 !, 2 21, 22 



SO 



SPALDING'S OFFICIAL BASKET BALL GUIDE. 



RULE SEC. PACE 

Penalties 14-15 24-27 

Personal fouls — Definition of 7 16 18 

How designated 6 7 13 

List of and penalty for 15 9-13 27 

Players — May not leave court. 5 4 12 

May not re-enter game 5 3 n 

Must be numbered 5 5 12 

Players and substitutes 5 11 

Playing regulations 8 18 

Playing terms 7 IS 

Pushing — Penalty for 15 9 27 

Putting ball in play — From center circle 8 5,6 20 

From out of bounds 10 1 21 

When referee is in doubt 10 2 22 

When time out is called 11 2 22,23 

After held ball 12 1 23 

After goal is made... 13 2 23 

In case of double foul 13 3 24 

Referee — Duties of 6 8 12-14 

Roughness — Penalty for 15 10, 13 27 

Running with the ball — Definition of 7 7 17 

Penalty for 15 1 25,26 

Score — Forfeited ^rae 9 2 21 

Referee announces 6 2 12 

Scorers — Duties of «... 6 10 14 

Scoring 9 21 

Side lines 1 2 7,9 

Striking the ball with fists 15 1 25, 26 

Substitutes 5 3 11 

Teams — Number of players in 5 1 11 

Technical fouls — Definition of 7 17 18 

List of and penalty for 15 1-8 25, 26 

The Game — A statement 7 

Third player charging in 15 11 27 

Tie score 9 4 21 

Time — Of halves, intermission, and game 8 1 18, 19 

Change of 8 1 18, 19 

Time out — Definition of 7 4 16 

Length, number, etc „ « 11 1 22 

Ball put in play after 11 2 22, 23 

Timekeepers — Duties of - * 6 11 14,15 

Tripping— Penalty for 15 9 27 

Umpire— Duties of 6 5-9 13,14 

Unsportsmanlike conduct — Players . 6 4 13 

Spectators 15 8 26 

Violations and penalties 14-15 24-27 

Whistle— When blown, etc 6 12 15 



SPALDING'S OFFICIAL BASKET BALL GUIDE. 



31 



Questions and Answers 

COMPILED BY G. T. HEPBKON. 

The following questions and answers are selected from the numerous letters 
received during season 1917-18. The answers are based on the revised rules 
as printed in this Guide, so are in force for the season 1918-19. 

When writing for rule interpretations, inquiries from educational institu- 
tions should be addressed to Dr. Joseph E. Raycroft, Princeton University, 
Princeton, N. J. Inquiries from Y.M.C.A.'s should be addressed to W. H. 
Ball, 347 Madison Avenue, New York, N. Y. Inquiries from organizations 
other than educational institutions and Y.M.C.A.'s should be addressed to 
George T. Hepbron, 45 Rose Street, New York, N. Y. 

Always enclose self-addressed stamped envelope for reply. Ask only one 
question in each paragraph of your letter and state number of rule and sec- 
tion involved. If you desire reply made on sheet sent, this can be done only 
when a duplicate accompanies the original. If your questions are framed 
and numbered so that a simple "yes" or "no" will suffice for answer, it will 
facilitate a quick reply. 

Question No. 1. In determining the size of a court, what is considered the 
end limits? Answer — The outside lines on each end. See Rule 1, Sec. 1 
and 2. 

Question No. 2. What is the proper method to follow in substituting play- 
ers? Answer — Report to Scorer first, then be recognized by Referee. See 
Rule 5, Sec. 3. 

Question No. S. Shall players be numbered in accordance with their play- 
ing positions ? Answer — Not necessary ; the custom is to give captain No. 1. 
See Rule 5, Sec. 5. 

Question No. k. Who decides when ball is dead? Answer — Referee. See 
Rule 6, Sec. 2. 

Question No. 5. Does Referee's decision take precedence over Umpire's in 
calling a foul? Answer — No. See Rule 6, Sec. 5. 

Question No. 6. The Referee and Umpire make approximate simultaneous 
decisions on the same play and the decisions involve different penalties 
against the same player ; which takes precedence ? Answer-^- The one draw- 
ing attention to the graver of the two penalties. See Rule 6, Sec. 5. 

Question No. 7. Two players have possession of the ball ; Referee blows 
whistle indicating "held ball" ; almost simultaneously the Umpire blows whis- 
tle calling attention to a foul committed by one or both of these players ; 
which official's decision takes precedence? Answer — The one calling attention 
to foul or fouls. See Rule 6, Sec. 5. 

Question No. 8. Suppose the Timekeeper is not provided with a suitable 
horn, gun or bell, and is therefore unable to make Referee hear him call 
"time" orally and a goal is made, does it count? Answer — Yes; the game is 
officially in progress until proper signal is sounded either by the Timekeeper 
or Referee. See Rule 6, Sec. 11 and 12. 

Question No. 9. Two players are jumping for ball being tossed up by 
Referee ; one player bats ball into opponents' basket ; does the goal count 
and for whom? Answer- — Goal counts for team into whose basket it was 
batted. See Rule 7, Sec. 1. 

Question No. 10. It the ball enters the basket from below, goes through 
and drops back into basket, is a goal scored? Answer — No. See Rule 7, 
Sec. 1. 

Question No. 11. If a player crosses the inner end line for any reason, 
is he out of bounds? Answer — No ; the other end line is the boundary line 
and determines when the player is in bounds and out of bounds. See Rule 7, 
Sec. 2. 

Question No. 12. If a player throws a goal from the zone between the 
inner end line and the outer end line, Would it count? Answer — Yes. See 
Kule T. Sec. 2. 



32 SPALDING'S OFFICIAL BASKET BALL GUIDE. 

Question No. 13. In a game recently, one of our players touched the 
wall behind the backboard with his body while he had the ball in his 
possession. Was he considered in bounds or out of bounds? Answer — 
When the court is not extended by the two-foot zone and the backboard 
is placed against the wall, the player is out of bounds. See Rule 7, Sec. 
2 and Note. 

Question No. U. If the ball crosses the inner end line and does net 
touch or cross the outer end line, is it in bounds or out of bounds? 
Answer — In bounds. See Rule 7, Sec. 2. 

Question No. 15. Ball glances off face of backboard and across boun- 
dary line, but before it touches the floor or any obstruction out of bounds, 
it is caught by a player who has both feet "in bounds." Is the ball in 
bounds or out of bounds? Answer — In bounds. See Rule 7, Sec. 2. 

Question No. 16. If the ball has crossed the inner end line and is 
lying on the floor within the two-foot zone, I understand both the player 
and ball are in bounds. Now, if the player in the act of passing the ball 
touches or crosses the inner end line in so doing, has he violated the rules? 
Answer— No; the ball and player are in bounds. See Rule 7, Sec. 2. 

Question No. 17. When for any reason the two-foot zone cannot be 
used and the backboards are placed directly against a wall, are players 
allowed to run up the wall and shoot for goal without violating the rules? 
Answer — No ; they are out of bounds. See Rule 7, Sec. 2 and Note. 

Question No. 18. Is it a foul to hug the ball? Answer— Hugging the 
ball is not a foul ; but if by so doing the ball is withheld from play dur- 
ing close guarding it is a "held ball.'' See Rule 7, Sec. 3. 

Question No. 19. How soon after the dribble ceases must a player pass 
the ball? Answer— At his convenience, if he is not closely guarded. See 
Rule 7, Sec. 3. 

Question No. 20. If a closely guarded player is holding the ball on the 
floor and making no attempt to play it, should a foul be called? Answer 
— No ; if opponent is closely guarding him it is a "held ball." See Rule 7, 
Sec. 3. 

Question No 21. Would standing still and bouncing the ball on the 
floor constitute a dribble? Answer — Yes. See Rule 7, Sec. 8. 

Question No. 22. May a player dribble the ball without it touching the 
floor? Answer — A dribble to be legal must come in contact with the floor, 
except that during the progress of a given dribble the ball may be batted 
in the air once only. See Rule 7, Sec. 8, and Rule 15, Sec. 6, Note. 

Question No. 23. May a player while dribbling alternate hands with- 
out violating the rules? Answer — Yes. See Rule 7, Sec. 8. 

Question No. 2k. Is a player permitted to shoot for goal at the ter- 
mination of a legal dribble? If he succeeded in making a goal would it 
count? Answer — Yes. See Rule 7, Sec. 8, Note. 

Question No. 25. Are successive tries for goal considered a dribble? 
Answer — No. See Rule 7, Sec. 8, Note. 

Question No. 26. Some guards have the habit of putting their hands 
on body of opponent; is this a violation of the rules? Answer — It ceiv 
tainly is ; a personal foul should be called for "holding." See Rule 7, 
Sec. 9. 

Question No. 27. Is it legal for a player to reach over or around hia 
opponent from the rear, put his hand on the ball and then swing around 
to the side? Answer — Yes: provided there is no personal contact, which, 
however, is almost impossible in such a play. If there is personal con 
tact, whether he has his hand on the ball or not, it is illegal. See Rule 7, 
Sec. 9. 

Question No. 28. Shall Referee, before tossing ball up, caution players 
regarding proper positions to assume? Answer — No; players are sup- 
posed to be conversant with the rules, and if they are not that is the** 
fault and not the Referee's, See Rule 8, Sec. 5. 6 and 7, 



SPALDING'S OFFICIAL BASKET BALL GUIDE. 33 

Question No, 29. When two players are jumping for ball being tossed 
up by the Referee, in the center or elsewhere, what positions are the other 
players obliged to assume? Answer — See Rule 8, Sec. 5, 6 and 7. 

Question No. 3$. When the ball is tossed up by the Referee in center 
or elsewhere, are both players obliged to jump and make an effort to tap 
the ball? Answer — No. If, however, neither player taps the baH, the 
Referee shall toss it up again at the same place and order both players 
to jump and make an honest attempt to tap it. Failure to comply with 
the Referee's order is a foul on one or both for delaying the game. See 
Rule 8, Sec. 6, and Rule 7, Sec. 13. 

Question No. 81. Must the players face toward their "own" baskets 
when jumping in center or elsewhere? Answer — No particular facing is 
required. See Rule 8, Sec. 5. 

Question No. 82. What must be the position of the feet when jumping 
in center and elsewhere? Answer — See Rule 8, Sec. 5, 6 and 7. 

Question No. 33. May players catch ball when jumping in center and 
elsewhere? Answer — No; it must be tapped. See Rule 8, Sec. 6. 

Question No. 3k. When ball is tapped after jumping in center or else- 
where, can either one or both jumpers touch it again before it is touched 
by a third player? Answer — Yes. See Rule 8, Sec. 6 and 7. 

Question No. 85. Ball is being tossed up by Referee between two play- 
ers ; after it has been tapped and before any other player touches it, it 
goes to "out of bounds" ; Referee is undecided which player touched it 
last; what is the decision? Answer — See Rule 10, Sec. 2. 

Question No. 86. When players are jumping for ball tossed up by Ref- 
eree elsewhere than in the center, do the same conditions prevail as when 
lumping in center? Answer — Yes. See Rule 12, Sec. 1. 

Question No. 87. May a player dribble the ball while part of his per- 
son is touching the floor out of bounds, without violating the rules? 
Answer — No. See Rule 14, Sec. 3 and 4. 

Question No. 88. Suppose one player is forced "out of bounds" by an 
opponent, what is the decision? Answer — Foul on opponent who did the 
forcing. See Rule 15, Sec. 9. 

Question No. 89. Two players have possession of ball, third player 
runs in, personal contact results, but third player does not touch ball ; what 
is the decision? Answer — Personal foul against third man. See Rule 15, 
Sec. 11. 

Question No. h0. What is the penalty for holding arm or shoulder of 
an opponent who is in the act of trying for goal? Answer — Two free 
trials for goal from free throw line. See Rule 15, Sec. 12. 

Question No. il. Player "A" is trying for goal from field ; his oppo- 
nent grabs the ball, but does not touch the player; is this a legal play? 
Answer — Yes. 

Question No. Jfi. Is it legal to guard a player who is trying for goal 
from the field as closely as at other times ? Answer — Yes ; personal con- 
tact is illegal at all times, whether committed on player trying for goal 
or otherwise. 

Question No. IS. A player is dribbling and an opponent runs in at 
right angles to the direction the dribbler is going, and bats the ball out 
of his hands and while so doing personal contact results ; has a foul been 
committed, and on which one? Answer — A foul for personal contact has 
been committed ; it may have been the fault of either ; the ofticial who 
decides must see the play to make decision ; the burden of proof, however, 
is on the dribbler. 

Question No. kk. "Do both players have to jump when the ball is being 
tossed up by the Referee at center or elsewhere ? Answer— No ; except 
when ordered to do so by the Referee. 



34 SPALDING'S OFFICIAL BASKET BALL GUIDE. 

Question No. Jf5. Player catches ball with two hands, dribbles with one 
hand and each hand alternately, catches ball with two hands at end of 
dribble and passes; is this a foul? Answer — No; the dribble does not 
begin until the player disposes of the ball and touches it again. 

Question No. }6. Is it an illegal play to catch the ball against the 
body V Answer — No. 

Question No. JjfT. How long may a player <; in bounds," who is not 
closely guarded, hold the ball without violating the rules? Answer — 
Indefinitely ; the length of time he may hold it depends on the activity of 
his opponent. 

Question No. |8. When does the dribble start? Answer — The dribble 
starts when a player having gained possession of the ball in any way, 
except by recovery of his own dribble, throws, rolls, bats or bounces the 
ball and touches it again before it is touched by another player ; therefore 
the drible does not actually begin until the ball has left the player's pos- 
session and been touched again. 

Question No. J>9. In starting a play, may a player take one step without 
being penalized? Answer — A player who is standing still when he receives 
the ball may step one foot in any direction in making a pass or in starting 
a dribble, but the remaining foot must be kept in position until the ball has 
left his hands. A player who is standing still when he receives the ball 
may, in throwing for goal, step or stride one foot in any direction and then 
may jump from one or both feet, but the ball must leave his hands before 
one or both feet again touch the floor. Due allowance is to be made for a 
player catching the ball while running, provided in the judgment of the 
officials he stops as soon as possible. A player with the ball in his posses- 
sion who changes his position without appreciably advancing the ball in any 
direction, shall not be considered as running with the ball, neither shall a 
player pushed by one of the opposing team be considered as running with 
the ball. 

Question No. 50, May the personal foul rules (Rule 15, Sec. 9 to 13) be 
set aside by mutual agreement? Answer — Decidedly not; the personal foul 
rule is intended to prevent the most flagrant fouls in the game. Strict rul- 
ings on these points will do much to keep the game clean. It is the urgent 
desire of the Committee that all rules be strictly enforced in their entirety, 
especially those relating to personal fouls. 

Question No. 51. The Scorers fail to notify the Referee that a player has 
had four personal fouls called against him and he continues to play. What 
should be done? Answer — The points made during the period that this 
player was ineligible shall be counted as well as the time played, but imme- 
diate substitution for offending player shall be made as soon as the fact that 
he has four personal fouls comes to the attention of the official. If Scorers 
are so inefficient or negligent that they fail to notify the Referee, they should 
be at once removed from that game and not permitted to serve in any capac- 
ity for the remainder of the season. No excuses should be accepted. 

Question No. 52. When players are jumping for the ball being thrown up 
by the Referee in center or elsewhere, may one of the players, after the Ref- 
eree's whistle has blown for play, jump out of the circle or "position" 
and try to outguess his opponent by getting in a position to receive the tap? 
Answer — Yes. 

Question No. 5S. A player fumbles and juggles the ball and finally gains 
possession of it; has he completed a dribble? Answer — Yes. 

Question No. 5k. When players are jumping for ball being tossed up by 
the Referee, whether in center or elsewhere, may either one or both players 
catch thp ball after it has been tapped before it is touched by a third player? 
Answer — Yes. 

Question No. 55. Will you please indicate by Rule and Section the changes 
in this season's rules? Answer — Rule 1, Sec. 1, 2 and 4; Diagram on page 
8 ; Rule 2, Sec. 2 ; Rule 7, Sec. 2 and Note ; Rule 12, Sec. 1. By comparison 
with last year's rules you will note the changes. 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



19 



Volley Ball Rules 

Copyright, 1916, by the Joint Rules Committee (representing the Young Men's Christian Association 
Athletic League and the National Collegiate Athletic Association) and the 
American Sports Publishing Company. 

Rule I. Grounds. 

Section 1. The playing surface shall be Court. 
a rectangular court, not to exceed 35 feet 
in width by 60 feet in length, free from 
obstruction, and having a height of 15 feet 
or more which is free from apparatus or 
other obstructions or projections. 

Sec. 2. For playing singles the court Singles. 
shall be divided by a line running midway 
between the side lines and parallel to them, 
making two courts \7y 2 feet wide by 60 
feet long. 

Sec. 3. The court shall be bounded by Boundary lines. 
well defined lines not less than two inches 
in width, and which shall be at every point 
at least three feet from walls or any ob- 
structions. The lines on the short sides of 
the court shall be termed the end lines, 
those on the long sides, the side lines. 

Rule II. Ball. 
The ball shall be round and shall consist Ball. 
of a rubber bladder covered with a leather 
case ; it shall be not less than 26 inches and 
not more than 27 inches in circumference 
and shall weigh not less than eight ounces 
and not more than ten ounces. 

Rule III. Net. 
The net shall be at least three feet wide Width. 
and o f sufficient length to reach from 

These rules were adopted as the official rules by the Physical Directors' 
Society in June, 19 12; amended May, 191 5, and again in May, 19 16. 



JO 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



RULE III. 

boundary to boundary. The mesh shall be 
small enough to prevent the passage of the 
ball through the net. It shall be tightly 
stretched by the four corners across the 
court midway between the end lines and 
Height, parallel to them. The top line shall be level 
and measure eight feet from the center to 
the floor. 

Rule IV. Teams. 
Number of men. Section 1. In all official games, teams 
shall be composed of six men. 
Substitutes. Sec. 2. A substitute may take the place 
of a player only when a whistle has been 
blown declaring the ball dead. He shall 
report at once to the Referee. 



Rule V. Officials. 
Officials. The officials shall be a Referee and two 
Linesmen. 

Note. — Duties of officials are stated in 
Rules 14 and 15. 



Own and 
opponents 1 court. 



Serving order. 



Rotation. 



Service. 



Rule VI. Definitions of Terms. 
Section 1. The court occupied by a 
team shall be called their own court, that 
occupied by their opponents the opponents' 
court. 

Sec. 2. The order in which players are 
to serve shall be called the "Serving Or- 
der." 

Sec. 3. The shifting of the men in posi- 
tion shall be called "Rotation." 

Sec. 4. A service is the putting of the 
ball in play by an eligible man, by batting 
it into the opponents' court in any direction 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY, 



RULE VI. 

with one or both hands while standing with 
both feet behind the back line of the court. 

Sec. 5. "Point" shall be called when the Point. 
team receiving fails to legally return the 
ball to the opponents' court. 

Sec. 6. "Side out" shall be called when Side out. 
the team serving fails to win its point or 
plays the ball illegally. 

Sec. 7. A player who touches the ball Playing the 
when it is not dead shall be considered as ball. 
playing the ball. 

Sec. 8. The ball is out of bounds when Out of bounds. 
it touches any surface, object or part of the 
floor outside of the court. 

Sec. 9. The ball is dead when the Ball dead. 
Referee's whistle blows calling any de- 
cision. 

Sec. 10. Any player committing any act Delaying the game, 
which, in the opinion of the Referee, tends 
to stop or slow down the games unneces- 
sarily shall be considered as delaying the 
game. 

Sec. 11. When the ball momentarily Catching or holding* 
comes to a rest in the hands or arms of a 
player and is not clearly batted, he shall be 
considered as catching or holding the ball. 

Sec. 12. A player striking the ball two Dribble. 
or more times consecutively shall be con- 
sidered as dribbling. 



Rule VII. The Game. 

Section 1. The game shall consist of Number of 

15 points. points. 

Sec 2. Championships shall be decided Championships, 
by the best two out of three games. 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



RULE VII. 

Teams not Sec. 3. If either team is not on the floor 
rtadytoplay. ready to play within one minute after the 
Referee calls play the game shall be for- 
feited to the team that is ready. (See Rule 
XII., Section 5.) 
Forfeited Sec 4. The score of a forfeited game 
game, shall be 1 to 0. 

Rule VIII. Choice of Courts and 
Service. 

Captains The Captains shall toss for service and 
shall toss, courts. The winner of the toss may choose 
either to take the first service or his choice 
of the courts. 



Rule IX. Server and Service. 

Order. Section 1. At the opening of the game 
the ball shall be put in play by the first man 
on the service of the team which is to begin 
service. 

Rotation. Sec. 2. Each server shall continue to 
serve until the Referee calls "Side out," at 
which time the team receiving the ball 
shall immediately rotate one position 
clockwise. 

Illegal service. Sec 3. A service which strikes the net 
or any other object or surface shall put the 
side out. 

Losing team Sec 4. The team losing the previous 
has first serve, game shall have the first serve in the suc- 
ceeding game. 
Where server Sec 5. The server shall serve in the 
shall stand. r ight or left hand corner of the court from 
behind the backline. 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



23 



Rule X. Playing the Ball. 

Section 1. The ball may be batted in How and 
any direction with head, one or both hands where. 
or fists, but it must not touch the floor or 
go out of bounds or under net. 

Sec. 2. The ball may be played by any By any number, 
number of players before being batted 
over the net, but no player shall 
play the ball twice in succession. 

Sec. 3. A ball other than a service, strik- Ball striking net. 
ing the net and dropping over is still in 
play. 

Sec. 4. If a player on either team bats Out of bounds. 
the ball out of bounds, it shall count against 
his team. "Side out" or "Point" shall be 
called. 

Note. — This shall not prohibit the recov- Recovery of ball. 
ery of a ball by the team batting it outside 
the court, provided the player does not ad- 
vance beyond the net or the ball go out of 
bounds. 

Sec. 5. Any ball other than a service Recovering 
may be recovered from the net. from net. 

Sec. 6. A ball striking a boundary line Striking 
shall be considered "good." boundary line. 

Sec. 7. The Referee may allow a second Second service* 
opportunity to serve on a questioned ball. 



Rule XI. Prohibitions. 
A Player Shall Not— 

Section 1. Strike the ball while he is Be supported. 
supported by any player or object. 

Sec. 2. Dribble. Dribble. 



24 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



RULE XI. 

Catch or hold ball. Sec. 3. Catch or hold the ball. 

Reach over net. Sec. 4. Reach over the net to strike the 
ball. 

Serve out of Sec. 5. Serve out of the regular order 
regular order, of service. 

Sec. 6. Touch the net. s 
Touching net Note. — If two men on opposite sides 
simultaneously, touch the net simultaneously, no point shall 
be scored, and the ball shall be served again 
by the same player. 
Enter Sec. 7. Interfere with the play of the 
opponents' court, opposing team by entering their court. 
Address officials. Sec. 8. Address any official. 

Note. — Captains only shall be allowed to 
address the officials. 
Delay game. Sec. 9. Delay the game. 

Sec. 10. Make remarks or commit ac- 
tions derogatory to the officials or tending 
to. influence their decisions. 
Make personal Sec. 11. Make personal or derogatory 

remarks, remarks about opponents. 
Re-enter game. Sec. 12. Re-enter the game after being 
disqualified or taken out. 



Rule XII. Penalties. 

Side out. Section 1. "Side out" shall be called 
for violation of Rule XL, Sections 1 to 12, 
inclusive, by the team serving. 
Point. Sec. 2. "Point" shall be called for viola- 
tion of Rule XL, Sections 1 to 8, inclusive, 
by the team receiving. 
Point awarded. Sec. 3. A point may for the first offense, 
and shall for the second offense, be given 
the opponents for violation of Rule XL, 
Sections 8 to 12, inclusive. 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



25 



RULE XII. 

Sec. 4. The Referee may also disqual- Disqualifications. 
ify for any violation of Rule XL, Section 
10 or 11 or for persistent violation of Sec- 
tions 9 to 12. 

Sec 5. Any team refusing to play after Forfeit. 
receiving instructions to do so from the 
Referee shall forfeit the game. 

Rule XIII. Scoring. 

Failure of the receiving team to legally Penalty for 

return the ball over the net into the op- illegal return. 
ponents' court shall count 1 point for the 
team serving. 

Note. — A point cannot be made while the No point made 

ball is dead. on dead ball. 

Rule XIV. Duties of the Referee. 

Section 1. The Referee shall be the Superior officer 
superior officer of the game. He shall de- makes all 
cide when the ball is in play, when it is scoring decisions. 
dead, when a point has been made, when 
side is out, and shall impose penalties for 
any violation of the rules. 

Sec. 2. The Referee shall have power Decides on 
to make decisions for violations of rules violations 
committed at any time. This includes the of rules. 
periods when the game may be momentarily 
stopped for any reason. 

Sec. 3. The Referee shall record the Scores. 
points made. His record shall constitute 
the official score of the game. 

Rule XV. Duties of the Linesmen. 

^ Section 1. The Linesmen shall be sta- Line decisions. 
tioned at opposite corners of the court, so 



26 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY, 



RULE XV. 

that each has two lines in plain view, and 
whenever the ball strikes the floor near a 
line the Linesmen shall call "good" or 
"out" 

Assist Referee. Sec. 2. Upon the Referee's request, 
they shall report to the Referee on any 
play about which the Referee is uncertain. 
Check serving Sec. 3. Before the game the Linesmen 
order, shall secure from each Manager or Captain 
the serving order of the team and shall see 
that the players follow the serving order 
and rotate in position. 




FRANK Q. PRICE. C L\\ 
Fntt Irutitute, Brooklyn, N. t 



SIMPLE METHOD FOR LAYING OUT A DIAMOND. 

With a steel tape measure lay out the base lines and place the home plate 
and pitcher's box as shown in the diagram. If it is possible to do so, have the 
home plate due north and the pitcher's box due south. 

Distance from home plate to first base, 90 feet; from first base to second 
base, 90 feet; from second base to third base, 90 feet; from third base to 
home plate, 90 feet. Total distance around the bases, 360 feet. 

Distance from point of home plate to pitcher's slab, 60 feet 6 inches. 

Distance across diamond, from home plate to second base, 127 feet 3% 
inches ; from first to third base, the same. 

Size of batsman's box, 6 feet by 4 feet. 

Size of pitcher's plate, 24 inches by 6 inches. 

Size of base bags, 15 inches square. 

Home plate, 1 foot square, with the corners filled in on the portion facing 
the pitcher, where it will measure 17 inches across. 



Official Playing Rules Professional 
Base Ball Clubs 

As adopted at the meeting of the Joint Playing Rules Committee of the 
National League and the American League, held at National League 
Headquarters, New York City, March 2, 1904. Amended February 14, 1906; 
February 25, 1907 ; February 27, 1908 ; February 17, 1909 ; January 24, 1910 j 
February 13, 1914, and February 13, 1916. 

These Rules have also been adopted by 
The National, Association op Professional, Base Ball Leagues, 

Amendments indicated by italics* 

The Ball Ground. 

The ball ground must be enclosed. To ob- 
RULE 1. viate the necessity for ground rules, the 
shortest distance from a fence or stand on 
fair territory to the home base should be 235 feet and from 
home base to the grand stand 90 feet. 

To Lay off the Field. 

To lay off the lines defining the location 
RULE 2. of the several bases, the catcher's and the 
pitcher's position and to establish the boun- 
daries required in playing the game of base ball, proceed as 
follows : 

Diamond or Infield. 

From a point, A, within the grounds, project a straight 
line out into the field, and at a point, B, 154 feet from point 
A, lay off lines B C and B D at right angles to the line 
A B ; then, with B as a center and 63.63945 feet as a radius, 
describe arcs cutting the lines B A at F and B C at G, B D 
at H and B E at I. Draw lines F G, G I, I H, and H F, each 
90 feet in length, which said lines shall be the containing 
lines of the Diamond or Infield. 

The Catcher's Lines. 

Section r. With F as a center and 10 feet 
RULE 3. radius, describe an arc cutting line F A at Z 
and draw lines Z J and Z K at right angles to 
F A, and continue each out f rorn F A not less than 10 feet 
Sec. 2. With F as a center and 90 feet radius, describe an 
arc cutting F A at L and draw lines L M and L O at right 
angles to FA, and continue each out from FL not less than 
90 feet to form the back-stop line. 



The Foul Lines. 

From the intersection point, F, continue the 
RULE 4. straight lines GF and HF until they intersect 
the lines L O and L M, and then from the 
points G and H in the opposite direction until they reach the 
boundary lines of the ground, and said lines shall be clearly 
visible from any part of the diamond, and no wood or other 
hard substance shall be used in the construction of such lines. 

The Players' Lines. 

With F as center and 50 feet radius, 
RULE 5. describe arcs cutting lines F O and F M 
at P and Q; then, with F as center again 
and 75 feet radius, describe arcs cutting F G and F H at 
R and S; then, from the points P, Q, R and S draw lines 
at right angles to the lines F O, F M, F G and F H, and 
continue the same until they intersect at the points W and T. 

The Coachers' Lines. 

With R and S as centers and 15 feet radius, 
RULE 6. describe arcs cutting the lines RW and S T at 
X and Y and from the points X and Y draw 
lines parallel with the lines F G and F H and continue same 
out to the boundary lines of the ground. 

The Three-Foot Line. 

With F as a center and 45 feet radius, 
RULE 7. describe an arc cutting the line F G at the 
figure one (1) and from the figure one (1) to 
the distance of three feet draw a line at right angles to F G, 
and mark point 2; then from point 2 draw a line parallel 
with the line F G to a point three feet beyond the point G, 
marked 3; then from the point 3 draw a line at right angles 
to line 2, 3, back to and intersecting with F G. 

The Batsman's Lines. 

On either side of the line A F B describe a 
RULE 8. rectangle six feet long and four feet wide 
(marked 9 and 10, respectively). The longest 
side of each rectangle shall be parallel with the line A F B 
and the rectangles shall be 29 inches apart or 14^2 inches on 
either side of line A F B. The middle of the long side of 
each rectangle shall be on a line with the middle corners of 
home base. 



The Pitcher's Plate. 

Section i. From point F measure along line 
RULE 9. FE a distance of 60 feet 6 inches to point 4, 
which marks the front of the pitcher's plate. 
Draw 7 ^ne 5, 6, passing through point 4 at right angles to 
F4, and extending 12 inches on either side of line FB; then 
with line 5, 6, as a side, describe a rectangle 24 inches by 6 
inches in which shall be placed the pitcher's plate. 

Sec. 2. The pitcher's plate shall not be more than 15 
inches higher than the base lines or the home plate, which 
shall be level with the surface of the field, and the slope from 
the pitcher's plate to every base line and the home plate shall 
be gradual. 

The Bases. 

Section i. Within the angle F, describe a 
RULE 10. five-sided figure, two of the sides of which 
shall coincide with the lines F G and F H to 
the extent of 12 inches each, thence parallel with the line F B 
8 J A inches to the points U and V a straight line between 
which, 17 inches long, will form the front of the home base 
or plate. 

Sec. 2. Within the angles at G and H describe squares, 
whose sides are 15 inches in length, two of the sides of which 
squares shall lie along the lines F G and G I, I H and H F, 
which squares shall be the location of the first and third 
bases respectively. At point I, the intersection of G I and 
H I, describe a square 15 inches on each side, the center of 
which is directly over point I and whose sides are parallel to 
G I and H I. This shall locate second base. 

The home base at F and the pitcher's plate 
RULE 11. at 4 must be each of whitened rubber, and so 
fixed in the ground as to be even with its sur- 
face. The size of the pitcher's plate shall be 24 inches by 6 
inches. 

The^first base at G, the second base at I and 
RULE 12. the third base at H must each be a white 
canvas bag 15 inches square filled with soft 
material and securely fastened in place at the points specified 
in Rule 10. 

The lines described in Rules 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 
RULE 13. 8 must be marked with lime, chalk or other 
white material, easily distinguishable from the 
ground or grass. 



The Ball. 

Section i. The ball must weigh not less 
RULE 14. than five nor more than five and one-quar- 
ter ounces avoirdupois, and measure not 
less than nine nor more than nine and one-quarter inches 
in circumference. The Spalding National League Ball or 
the Reach American League Ball must be used in all games 
played under these « rules. 

Sec. 2. Two regulation balls of the make adopted by 
the league of which the contesting clubs are members, 
shall be delivered by the home club to the umpire at or 
before the hour for the commencement of a championship 
game. If the ball placed in play be batted or thrown out 
of the grounds or into one of the stands for spectators 
or in the judgment of the umpire, becomes unfit for play 
from any cause, the umpire shall at once deliver the alter- 
nate ball to the pitcher and another legal ball shall be sup- 
plied to him, so that he shall at all times have in his con- 
trol one or more alternate balls. Provided, however, that 
all balls batted or thrown out of the ground or into a stand 
shall when returned to the field be given into the custody 
of the umpire immediately and become alternate balls and 
so long as he has in his possession two or more alternate 
balls, he shall not call for a new ball to replace one that has 
gone out of play. The alternate balls shall become the ball 
in play in the order in which they were delivered to the 
umpire. 

Sec. 3. Immediately upon the delivery to him of the 
alternate ball by the umpire, the pitcher shall take his posi- 
tion and on the call of "Play," by the umpire, it shall be- 
come the ball in play. Provided, however, that play shall 
not be resumed with the alternate ball when a fair batted 
ball or a ball thrown by a fielder goes out of the ground 
or into a stand for spectators until the base-runners have 
completed the circuit of the bases unless compelled to stop 
at second or third base in compliance with a ground 
rule. 



The Spalding League Ball has been adopted by the National League for 
the past forty years and is used in all the League contests. It has also 
been adopted by the majority of other professional leagues and by 
practically all the colleges. 

For junior clubs (clubs composed of boys under 16 years of age) we recom 
^yid them to use *he Spalding "Official National League" Jr. Ball, and that 
games played by junior clubs with this ball will count as legal games the 
same as if playe^ with the Official League Ball. 



Discolored or Damaged Balls. 

Sec. 4. In the event of a ball being intentionally discolored 
by rubbing it with the soil or otherwise by any player, or 
otherwise damaged by any player, the umpire shall forthwith 
demand the return of that ball and substitute for it another 
legal ball, as hereinbefore described, and impose a fine of 
$5.00 on the offending player. 

Home Club to Provide Balls. 

Sec. 5. In every game the balls played with shall be fur- 
nished by the home club, and the last in play shall become 
the property of the winning club. Each ball shall be enclosed 
in a paper box, which must be sealed with the seal of the 
President of the League and bear his certificate that the ball 
contained therein is of the required standard in all respects. 
The seal shall not be broken by the umpire except in the 
presence of the captains of the contesting teams after "Play" 
has been called. 

Reserve Balls on Field. 

Sec. 6. The home club shall have at least a dozen regula- 
tion balls on the field during each championship game, ready 
for use on the call of the umpire. 

The Bat. 

The bat must be round, not over two and 
RULE 15. three-fourth inches in diameter at the thickest 
part, nor more than 42 inches in length and 
entirely of hardwood, except that for a distance of 18 inches 
from the end, twine may be wound around or a granulated 
substance applied to the handle. 

Number of Players in a Game. 

The players of each club, actively engaged 
RULE 16. in a game at one time, shall be nine in num- 
ber, one of whom shall act as captain; and in 
no case shall more or less than nine men be allowed to play 
on a side in a game. 

Positions of the Players. 

The players of the team not at bat may be 
RULE 17. stationed at any points of the field on fair 
ground their captain may elect, regardless of 
their respective positions, except that the pitcher, while in 
the act of delivering the ball to the bat must take his position 



as defined in Rules g and 30; and the catcher must be within 
the lines of his position, as defined in Rule 3, and within 10 
feet of home base, whenever the pitcher delivers the ball to 
the bat. 

Must Not Mingle With Spectators. 

Players in uniform shall not be permitted 
RULE 18. to occupy seats in the stands, or to mingle 
with the spectators. 

Uniforms of Players. 

Every club shall adopt two uniforms for its 
RULE 19. players, one to be worn in games at home and 
the other in games abroad, and the suits of 
each of the uniforms of a team shall conform in color and 
style. No player who shall attach anything to the sole or 
heel of his shoe other than the ordinary base ball shoe plate, 
or who shall appear in a uniform not conforming to the suits 
of the other members of his team, shall be permitted to take 
part in a game. 

Size and Weight of Gloves. 

The catcher or first baseman may wear a 
RULE 20. glove or mitt of any size, shape or weight. 

Every other player is restricted to the use of 
a glove or mitt weighing not over 10 ounces and measuring 
not over 14 inches around the palm. 

Players' Benches. 

Section 1. Players' benches must be fur- 
RULE 21. nished by the home club and placed upon a 
portion of the ground not less than twenty-five 
(25) feet outside of the players' lines. One such bench shall 
be for the exclusive use of the visiting team and the other 
for the exclusive use of the home team. Each bench must 
be covered with a roof and closed at the back and each end; 
a space, however, not more than six (6) inches wide may be 
left under the roof for ventilation. All players and substi- 
tutes of the side at bat must be seated on their team's bench, 
except the batsman, base-runners and such as are legally 
assigned to coach base-runners. Under no circumstances shall 
the umpire permit any person except the players and substi- 
tutes in uniform and the manager of the team entitled to its 
exclusive use to be seated on a bench. 

Penalty for Violation. 

Sec. 2. Whenever the umpire observes a violation of the 
preceding section, he shall immediately order such player or 



players as have disregarded it to be seated. If the order be 
not obeyed within one minute the offending player or players 
shall be fined $5.00 each by the umpire. If the order be not 
rhen obeyed within one minute, the offending player or play- 
ers shall be debarred from further participation in the game, 
and shall be obliged to forthwith leave the playing field. 

A Regulation Game. 

Every championship game must be com^- 
RULE 22. menced not later than two hours before sunset 
and shall continue until each team has had 
nine innings, provided, however, that the game shall termi- 
nate : 

Section i. If the side first at bat scores less runs in nine 
innings than the other side has scored in eight innings. 

Sec. 2. If the side last at bat in the ninth inning scores the 
winning run before the third man is out. 

Sec. 3. If the game be called by the umpire on account of 
darkness, rain, fire, panic, or for other cause which puts 
patrons or players in peril. 

Extra-Innings Games. 

If the score be a tie at the end of nine (9) 
RULE 23. innings for each team, play shall be continued 
until one side has scored more runs than the 
other in an equal number of innings, provided, that if the 
side last at bat score the winning run before the third man 
is out in any inning after the ninth, the game shall terminate. 

Drawn Games. 

A drawn game shall be declared by the um- 
RULt£ 24. pire if the score is equal on the last even 
inning played when he terminates play in ac- 
cordance with Rule 22, Section 3, after five or more equal 
innings have been played by each team. But if the side that 
went second to bat is at bat when the game is terminated, 
and has scored the same number of runs as the other side, 
the umpire shall declare the game drawn without regard to 
thr "core of the last equal inning. 

Called Games. 

If the umpire calls a game in accordance 
RULE 25. with Rule 22, Section 3, at any time after five 
innings have been completed, the score^ shall 
be that of the last equal innings played, except that if the 
side second at bat shall have scored in an unequal number of 



innings, or before the completion of the unfinished inning r at 
least one run more than the side first at bat, the score of the 
game shall be the total number of runs each team has made. 

Forfeited Games. 

A forfeited game shall be declared by the 
RULE 26. umpire in favor of the club not in fault, in the 

following cases : 

Section i. If the team of a club fail to appear upon the 
field, or being upon the field, refuse to begin a game for 
which it is scheduled or assigned, within five minutes after 
the umpire has called "Play" at the hour for the beginning of 
the game, unless such delay in appearing, or in commencing 
the game be unavoidable. 

Sec. 2. If, after the game has begun, "one side refuse to 
continue to play, unless the game has been suspended or 
terminated by the umpire. 

Sec. 3. If, after play has been suspended by the umpire, 
one side fails to resume playing in one minute after the 
umpire has called "Play." 

Sec. 4. If a team employ tactics palpably designed to 
delay the game. 

Sec. 5. If, after warning by the umpire, any one of the 
rules of the game be wilfully and persistently violated. 

Sec. 6. If the order for the removal of a player, as 
authorized by Rules 21, 58 and 67, be not obeyed within 
one minute. 

Sec. 7. If, because of the removal of players from the 
game by the umpire, or for any cause, there be less than 
nine players on either team. 

Sec. 8. If, after the game has been suspended on account 
of rain, the orders of the umpire are not complied with as 
required by Rule 29. 

Sec. 9. If, when two games are scheduled to be played 
in one afternoon, the second game be not commenced within 
ten minutes of the time of the completion of the first game. 
The umpire of the first game shall be the timekeeper. 

Sec. 10. In case the umpire declare the game forfeited 
he shall transmit a written report thereof to the President 
of the League within twenty- four hours thereafter. _ How- 
ever, a failure on the part of the umpire to so notify the 
President shall not affect the validity of his award of the 
game by forfeiture. 



No Game. 

"No game" shall be declared by the umpire 
RULE 27. if he terminates play in accordance with Rule 
22, Sec. 3, before five innings are completed 
by each team. Provided, however, that if the club second 
at bat shall have made more runs at the end of its fourth 
inning than the club first at bat has made in five completed 
innings of a game so terminated, the umpire shall award the 
game to the club having made the greater number of runs, 
and it shall count as a legal ga r : in the championship record. 

Substitutes. 

Section i. Each side shall be required to 
RULE 28. have present on the field during a champion- 
ship game a sufficient number of substitute 
players in uniform, conforming to the suits worn by their 
team-mates, to carry out the provisions of this code which^ 
requires that not less than nine players shall occupy the 
field in any inning of the game. 

Sec. 2. Any such substitute may at any stage of the game 
take the place of a player whose name is in his team's batting 
order, but the player whom he succeeds shall not thereafter 
participate in that game. 

Sec. 3. A base-runner shall not have another player whose 
name appears in the batting order of his team run for him 
except by the consent of the captain of the other team. 

Sec. 4. Whenever one player is substituted for another, 
whether as batsman, base-runner or fielder, the captain of 
the side making the change must immediately notify the 
umpire, who in turn must announce the same to the specta- 
tors. A fine of $5.00 shall be assessed by the umpire against 
the captain for each violation of this rule, and the President 
of the League shall impose a similar fine against the umpire, 
who, after having been notified of a change, fails to make 
proper announcement. Play shall be suspended while an- 
nouncement is being made, and the player substituted shall 
become actively engaged in the game immediately upon his 
captain's notice of the change to the umpire. 

Choice of Innings — Fitness of Field for Play. 

The choice of innings shall be given to the 
RULE 29. captain of the home club, who shall be the sole 
judge of the fitness of the ground for begin- 
ning a game after a rain; but, after play has been called by 
the umpire, he alone shall be the judge as to the fitness of the 



ground for resuming play after the game has been suspended 
on account of rain, and when time is so called the ground- 
keeper and sufficient assistants shall be under the control of 
the umpire for the purpose of putting the ground in proper 
shape for play, under penalty of forfeiture of the game by 
the home team. 

THE PITCHING RULES. 
Delivery of the Bail to the Bat. 

Preliminary to pitching, the pitcher shall take 
RULE 30. his position facing the batsman with both feet 
squarely on the ground and in front of the 
pitcher's plate or on top of the pitcher's plate; and in the 
act of delivering the ball to the bat he must keep one foot in 
contact with the pitcher's plate defined in Rule 9. He shall 
not raise either foot until in the act of delivering the ball to 
-the bat, nor make more than one step in such delivery. 

A Fairly Delivered Ball. 

A fairly delivered ball is a ball pitched or 
RULE 31. thrown to the bat by the pitcher while standing 
in his position and facing the batsman that 
passes over any portion of the home base, before touching the 
ground, not lower than the batsman's knee, nor higher than 
his shoulder. For even- such fairly delivered ball the umpire 
shall call one strike. 

An Unfairly Delivered Ball. 

An unfairly delivered ball is a ball delivered 
RULE 32. to the bat by the pitcher while standing in his 
position and facing the batsman that does not 
pass over any portion of the home base between the batsman's 
shoulder and knees, or that touches the ground before passing 
home base, unless struck at by the batsman ; or, with the 
bases unoccupied, any ball delivered by the pitcher while no 
foot is in contact with the pitcher's plate. For every unfairly 
delivered ball the umpire shall call one ball. 

Delaying the Game. 

Section i. If. after the batsman be standing 
RULE 33. in his proper position ready to strike at a 
pitched ball, the ball be thrown by the pitcher 
to anv player other than the catcher when in the catcher's 
lines and within 10 feet of the home base (except in an at- 
tempt to retire .a base-runner), each ball so thrown shall be 
called a ball 



Sec. 2. The umpire shall call a ball on the pitcher each time 
he delays the game by failing to deliver the ball to the bats- 
man for a longer period than 20 seconds, excepting that at 
the commencement of each inning, or when a pitcher relieves 
another, the pitcher may occupy one minute in delivering not 
to exceed five balls to the catcher or an infielder, during which 
time play shall be suspended. 

Sec. 3. In event of the pitcher being taken from his posi- 
tion by either manager or captain, the player substituted for 
him shall continue to pitch until the batsman then at bat has 
either been put out or has reached first base. 



Balking. 

A balk shall be: 
RULE 34. Section i. Any motion made by the pitcher 
while in position to deliver the ball to the bat 
without delivering it, or to throw to first base when occupied 
by a base-runner without completing the throw. 

Sec. 2. Throwing the ball by the pitcher to any base to 
catch the base-runner without stepping directly toward such 
base in the act of making such throw. 

Sec. 3. Any delivery of the ball to the bat by the pitcher 
while either foot is back of and not in contact with the 
pitcher's plate. 

Sec. 4. Any delivery of the ball to the bat by the pitcher 
while he is not facing the batsman. 

Sec. 5. Any motion in delivering the ball to the bat by the 
pitcher while not in the position defined by Rule 30. 

Sec. 6. Holding of the ball by the pitcher so long as, in the 
opinion of the umpire, to unnecessarily delay the game. 

Sec. 7. Making any motion to pitch while standing in his 
position without having the ball in his possession. 

Sec. 8. Making any motion of the arm, shoulder, hip or 
body the pitcher habitually makes in his method of delivery, 
without immediately delivering the ball to the bat. 

Sec. 9. Delivery of the ball to the bat when the catcher is 
standing outside the lines of the catcher's position as defined 
in Rule 3. 

If the pitcher shall fail to comply with the requirements of 
any section of this rule, the umpire shall call a "balk." 



Dead Ball. 

A dead ball is a ball delivered to the bat by 
RULE 35. the pitcher, not struck at by the batsman, that 
touches any part of the batsman's person or 
clothing while he is standing in his position. 

Ball Not in Play. 

In case of an illegally batted ball, a balk, foul 
RULE 36. hit ball not legally caught, dead ball, interfer- 
ence with the fielder or batsman, or a fair hit 
ball striking a base-runner or umpire before touching a fielder, 
the ball shall not be considered in play until it be held by the 
pitcher standing in his position, and the umpire shall have 
called "Play." 

Block Balls. 

Section i. A block is a batted or thrown 
RULE 37. ball that is touched, stopped or handled by a 

person not engaged in the game. 

Sec. 2. Whenever a block occurs the umpire shall declare 
it, and base-runners may run the bases without liability to be 
put out until the ball has been returned to and held by the 
pitcher in his position. 

Sec. 3. If a person not engaged in the game should retain 
possession of a blocked ball, or throw or kick it beyond the 
reach of the fielders, the umpire shall call "Time" and require 
each base-runner to stop at the base last touched by him until 
the ball be returned to the pitcher in his position and the 
umpire shall have called "Play." 

THE BATTING RULES. 
The Batsman's Position. 

Each player of the side at bat shall become 
RULE 38. the batsman and must take his position within 
the batsman's lines (as defined in Rule 8) in 
the order that hk name appears in his team's batting list. 

The Order of Batting. 

Section i. The batting order of each team 
RULE 39. must be on the score card and must be deliv- 
ered before the game by its captain to the um- 
pire at the home plate, who shall submit it to the inspection 
of the captain of the other side. The batting order delivered 
to the umpire must be followed throughout the game unless 
a player be substituted for another, in which case the substi- 



tute must take the place in the batting order of the retired 
player. 

Sec. 2. When the umpire announces the pitcher prior to 
commencement of game, the player announced must pitch until 
the first batsman has either been put out or has reached first 
base. 

The First Batsman in an Inning. 

After the first inning the first striker in each 
RULE 40. inning shall be the batsman whose name fol- 
lows that of the last man who completed his 
"time at bat" in the preceding inning. 

Players Belong on Bench. 

When a side goes to the bat its players must 
RULE 41. immediately seat themselves on the bench as- 
signed to them as defined in Rule 21, and re- 
main there until their side is put out, except when called to 
the bat or to act as coachers or substitute base-runners. 

Reserved for Umpire, Catcher and Batsman. 

No player of the side "at bat," except the 
RULE 42. batsman, shall occupy any portion of the space 
within the catcher's lines as defined in Rule 3. 
The triangular space back of the home base is reserved for 
the exclusive use of the umpire, catcher and batsman, and 
the umpire must prohibit any player of the side "at bat" from 
crossing the same at any time while the ball is in the hands 
of the pitcher or catcher, or passing between them while 
standing in their positions. 

Fielder Has Right of Way. 

The players of the side at bat must speedily 
RULE 43. abandon their bench and hasten to another 
part of the field when by remaining upon or 
near it they or any of them would interfere with a fielder in 
an attempt to catch or handle a thrown or a batted ball. 

A Fair Hit. 

A fair hit is a legally batted ball that settles 
RULE 44. on fair ground between home and first base 
or between home and third base or that is on 
fair ground when bounding to the outfield past first or third 
base or that first falls on fair territory beyond first or third 
base, or that, while on or over fair ground, touches the 
person of the umpire or a player. 



A Foul Hit. 

A foui hit is a legally batted ball that settles 
RULE 45. on foul territory between home and first base 

or home and third base, or that bounds past 
first or third base on foul territory or that falls on foul terri- 
tory beyond first or third base, or, while on or over foul 
ground, touches the person of the umpire or a player. 

A Foul Tip. 

A foul tip is a ball batted by the batsman 
RULE 46. while standing within the lines of his position, 
that goes sharp and direct from the bat to the 
catcher's hands and is legally caught. 

A Bunt Hit. 

A bunt hit is a legally batted ball, not swung 
RULE 47. at. but met with the bat and tapped slowly 
within the infield by the batsman. If the at- 
tempt to bunt result in a foul not legally caught, a strike shall 
be called by the umpire. 

Balls Batted Outside the Ground. 

Section i. When a batted ball passes out- 
RULE 48. side the ground or into a stand the umpire shall 
decide it fair or foul according to where it dis- 
appears from the umpire's view. 

Sec. 2. A fair batted ball that goes over the fence or into 
a stand shall entitle the batsman to a home run unless it 
should pass out of the ground or into a stand at a less dis- 
tance than two hundred and thirty-five (235) feet from the 
home base, in which case the batsman shall be entitled to two 
bases only. In either event the batsman must touch the bases 
in regular order. The point at which a fence or stand is less 
than 235 feet from the home base shall be plainly in ideated by 
a white or black sign or mark for the umpire's guidance. 

Strikes. 

A strike is : 

RULE 49. Section i. A pitched ball struck at by the 

batsman without its touching his bat. 

Sec. 2. A fair ball legally delivered by the pitcher at which 
the batsman does not strike. 

Sec. 3. A foul hit ball not caught on the fly unless the bats- 
man has two strikes. 



Sec. 4. An attempt to bunt which results in a foul not le- 
gally caught. 

Sec. 5. A pitched ball, at which the batsman strikes but 
misses and which touches any part of his person. 

Sec. 6. A foul tip, held by the catcher, while standing 
within the lines of his position. 



An Illegally Batted Ball. 

An illegally batted ball is a ball batted by 
RULE 50. the batsman when either or both of his feet 
are upon the ground outside of the lines of the 
batsman's position. 

When Batsman is Out. 

The batsman is out: 
RULE 51. Section i. If he fail to take his position at 
the bat in the order in which his name appears 
on the batting list unless the error be discovered and the 
proper batsman replace him before he becomes a base-runner, 
in which case, the balls and strikes called must be counted in 
the time "at bat" of the proper batsman. But only the proper 
batsman shall be declared out, and no runs shall be scored or 
bases run because of any act of the improper batsman. Pro- 
vided, this rule shall not be enforced unless the out be de- 
clared before the ball be delivered to the succeeding batsman. 
Should the batsman declared out under this section be the 
third hand out and his side be thereby put out, the proper bats- 
man in the next inning shall be the player who would have 
come to bat had the players been put out by ordinary play in 
the preceding inning. 

Sec. 2. If he fail to take his position within one minute 
after the umpire has called for the batsman. 

Sec. 3. If he make a foul hit other than a foul tip as de- 
nned in Rule 46, and the ball be momentarily held by a fielder 
before touching the ground; provided, it be not caught in a 
fielder's cap, protector, pocket or other part of his uniform, or 
strike some object other than a fielder before being caught. 

Sec. 4. If he bat the ball illegally, as defined in Rule 50. 

Sec. 5. If he attempt to hinder the catcher from fielding or 
throwing the ball by stepping outside the lines of the batsman's 
position, or in any way obstructing or interfering with that 
player; except that the batsman shall not be out under this 
section if the base-runner be declared out according toJSection 
15 of Rule 56, 



Sec. 6. If, while first base be occupied by a base-runner, 
the third strike be called on him by the umpire, unless two 
men are already out. 

Sec. 7. If, while attempting a third strike, the ball touch 
any part of the batsman's person, in which case base-runners 
occupying bases shall not advance as prescribed in Rule 55, 
Section 5. 

Sec. 8. If, before two hands are out, while first and second 
or first, second and third bases are occupied, he hit a fly ball, 
other than a line drive, that can be handled by an infielder. 
In such case the umpire shall, as soon as the ball be hit, de- 
clare it an infield or outfield hit- 

Sec. 9. If the third strike be called in accordance with Sec- 
tions 4 or 5 of Rule 49. 

Sec. 10. If he steps from one batsman's box to the other 
while the pitcher is in his position ready to pitch. 

BASE RUNNING RULES. 

Legal Order of Bases. 

The Base-Runner must touch each base in 
RULE 52. legal order, viz., First, Second, Third and Home 
Bases ; and when obliged to return while the 
ball is in play, must retouch the base or bases in reverse order. 
He can only acquire the right to a base by touching it, before 
having been put out, and shall then be entitled to hold such 
base until he has legally touched the next base in order, or 
has been legally forced to vacate it for a succeeding base-run- 
ner. However, no base-runner shall score a run to count in 
the game ahead of the base-runner preceding him in the bat- 
ting order, if there be such preceding base-runner who has 
not been put out in that inning. 

When the Batsman Becomes a Base-Runner. 

The batsman becomes a base-runner : 
RULE 53. Section i. Instantly after he makes a fair 
hit. 

Sec. 2. Instantly after "Four Balls'* have been called by the 
umpire. 

Sec. 3. Instantly after "Three Strikes" have been declared 
by the umpire. 

Sec. 4. If. without making any attempt to strike at the ball, 
his person or clothing be hit by a pitched ball unless, in the 
opinion 'of the umpire, he plainly makes no effort to get out of 
the way of the pitched ball. 



Sec. 5. If the catcher interfere with him in or prevent 
him from striking at a pitched ball. 

Sec. 6. If a fair hit ball strike the person or clothing of the 
umpire or a base-runner on fair ground. 

Entitled to Bases. 

The base-runner shall be entitled, without 
RULE 54. liability to be put out, to advance a base in the 
following cases : 

Section i. If, while the batsman, he becomes a base-runner 
by reason of "four balls," or for being hit by a pitched ball, 
or for being interfered with by the catcher in striking at a 
pitched ball, or if a fair hit ball strike the person or clothing 
of the umpire or a base-runner on fair ground before touch- 
ing a fielder. 

Sec. 2. If the umpire awards to a succeeding batsman a 
base on four balls, or for being hit by a pitched ball, or being 
interfered with by the catcher in striking at a pitched ball and 
the base-runner be thereby forced to vacate the base held by 
him. 

Sec. 3. If the umpire call a "Balk." 

Sec. 4. If a ball delivered by the pitcher pass the catcher 
and touch any fence or building within ninety (90) feet of the 
home base. 

Sec. 5. If he be prevented from making a base by the ob- 
struction of a fielder, unless the latter have the ball in his 
hand ready to touch the base-runner. 

Sec. 6. If the fielder stop or catch a batted ball or a thrown 
ball with his cap, glove or any part of his uniform, while de- 
tached from its proper place on his person, the runner or 
runners shall be entitled to three bases if a batted ball or to 
two 'bases if a thrown ball. 

Sec. 7. If a thrown or pitched ball strike the person or 
clothing of an umpire the ball shall be considered in play and 
the) base-runner or runners shall be entitled to all the bases 
they can make. 

Returning to Bases. 

The base-runner shall return to his base 
RULE 55. without liability to be put out: 

Section i. If the umpire declares any foul 
not legally caught. 
Sec. 2. If the umpire declares an illegally batted ball. 



Sec. 3. If the umpire declares a dead ball, unless it be 
also the fourth unfair ball, and he be thereby forced to take 
the next base, as provided in Rule 54, Section 2. 

Sec. 4. If the person or clothing of the umpire, while 
stationed back of the bat, interfere with the catcher in an 
attempt to throw. 

Sec. 5. If a pitched ball at which the batsman strikes but 
misses, touch any part of the batsman's person. 

Sec. 6. If the umpire be struck by a fair hit ball before 
touching a fielder; in which case no base shall be run unless 
necessitated by the batsman becoming a base-runner, and no 
run shall be scored unless all the bases are occupied. 

Sec. 7. If the umpire declares the batsman or another base- 
runner out for interference. 

Sec. 8. In any and all of these cases the base-runner is 
not required^ to touch the intervening bases in returning to 
the base he is legally entitled to. 



When Base-Runners are Out. 

The base-runner is out : 
RULE 56. Section i. If, after three strikes have been 
declared against him while the batsman, the 
third strike ball be not legally caught and he plainly attempts 
to hinder the catcher from fielding the ball. 

Sec. 2. If, having made a fair hit while batsman, such 
fair Lit ball be momentarily held by a fielder before touching 
the ground or any object other than a fielder; provided, it be 
not caught in a fielder's hat, cap, protector, pocket or other part 
of his uniform. 

Sec. 3. If,* when the umpire has declared "Three Strikes'* 
on him while the batsman, the third strike ball be momentarily 
held by a fielder before touching the ground; provided, it be 
not caught in a fielder's cap, protector, pocket or other part 
of his uniform, or touch some object other than a fielder 
before being caught. 

Sec. 4. If, after three strikes or a fair hit, he be touched 
with the ball in the hand of a fielder before he shall have 
touched first base. 

Sec. 5. If, after three strikes or a fair hit, the ball be 
securely held by a fielder while touching first base with any 
part of his person before such base-runner touch first base. 

Sec. 6. If, in running the last half of the distance from 
home base to first base, while the ball is being fielded to first 



base, he run outside the three-foot lines, as defined in Rule 7, 
unless he do so to avoid a fielder attempting to field a batted 
ball. • 

Sec. 7. If, in running from first to second base, from 
second to third base, or from third to home base, he run more 
than three feet from a direct line between a base and the 
next one in regular or reverse order to avoid being touched 
by a ball in the hands of a fielder. But in case a fielder be 
occupying a base-runner's proper path in attempting to field 
a batted ball, then the base-runner shall run out of direct 
line to the next base and behind said fielder and shall not 
be declared out for so doing. 

Sec. 8. If he fail to avoid a fielder attempting to field a 
batted ball, in the manner described in Sections 6 and 7 of 
this rule, or in any way obstruct a fielder in attempting to 
field a batted ball, or intentionally interfere with a thrown 
ball; provided, that if two or more fielders attempt to field a 
batted ball, and the base-runner come in contact with one or 
more of them, the umpire shall determine which fielder is 
entitled to the benefit of this rule, and shall not decide the 
base-runner out for coming in contact with a fielder other 
than the one the umpire determines to be entitled to field 
such batted ball. 

Sec. 9. If at any time while the ball is in play, he be 
touched by the ball in the hands of a fielder, unless some 
part of his person be touching the base he is entitled to 
occupy ; proyided, however, that the ball be held by the fielder 
after touching him, unless the base-runner deliberately knock 
it out of his hand. 

Sec. 10. If, when a fair or foul hit ball (other than a 
foul tip as defined in Rule 46) be legally caught by a fielder, 
such ball be legally held by a fielder on the base occupied by 
the base-runner when such ball was batted, or the base-runner 
be touched with the ball in the hands of a fielder, before he 
retouch such base after such fair or foul hit ball was so 
caught; provided, that the base-runner shall not be out in 
such case, if, after the ball was legally caught as above, it 
be delivered to the bat by the pitcher before the fielder hold 
it on said base, or touch the base-runner out with it; but if 
the base-runner, in attempting to reach a base, detach it from 
its fastening before being touched or forced out, he shall be 
declared safe. 

Sec. 11. If, when the batsman becomes a base-runner, the 
first base, or the first and second bases, or the first, second 
and third bases be occupied, any base-runner so occupying a 



base shall cease to be entitled to hold it, and may be put out 
at the next base in the same manner as in running to first 
base, or by being touched with the ball in the hands of a 
fielder at any time before any base-runner following him in 
the batting order be put out, unless the umpire should decide 
the hit of the batsman to be an infield fly. 

Sec. 12. If a fair hit ball strike him before touching a 
fielder, and, in such case, no base shall be run unless necessi- 
tated by the batsman becoming a base-runner, but no run shall 
be scored or any other base-runner put out until the umpire 
puts the ball back into play. 

Sec. 13. If, when advancing bases, or forced to return to 
a base, while the ball is in play, he fail to touch the inter- 
vening base or bases, if any, in the regular or reverse order, 
as the case may be, he may be put out by the ball being held 
by a fielder on any base he failed to touch, or by being 
touched by the ball in the hands of a fielder in the same 
manner as in running to first base ; provided, that the base- 
runner shall not be out in such case if the ball be delivered 
to the bat by the pitcher before the fielder hold it on said 
base or touch the base-runner with it. 

Sec. 14. If, when the umpire call "Play," after the sus- 
pension of a game, he fail to return to and touch the base 
he occupied when "Time" was called before touching the 
next base; provided, the base-runner shall not be out, in 
such case, if the ball be delivered to the bat by the pitcher, 
before the fielder hold it on said base or toueh the base- 
runner with it. 

Sec. 15. If with one or no one out and a base-runner on 
third base, the batsman interferes with a play being made 
at home plate. 

Sec. 16. If he pass a preceding base-runner before such 
runner has been legally put out he shall be declared out 
immediately. 

Sec. 17. If a coacher at third base touch or hold a base- 
runner at third base or a base-runner who is rounding third 
base for home plate the umpire shall declare such base-runner 
out. 

Overrunning First Base. 

Sec. 18. The base-runner in running to first base may 
overrun said base after touching it in passing without in- 
curring liability to be out for being off said base, pro- 
vided he return at once and retouch the base, after which 
he may be put out as at any other base. If, after over- 



running first base, he attempts to run to second base, before 
returning to first base, he shall forfeit such exemption 
from liability to be put out. 

Sec. iq. If, while third base is occupied, the coacher 
stationed near that base shall run in the direction of home 
base on or near the base line while a fielder is making or 
trying to make a play on a batted ball not caught on the 
fly, or on a thrown ball, or a fly ball, and thereby draws a 
throw to home base, the base-runner entitled to third base 
shall be declared out by the umpire for the coacher's inter- 
ference with and prevention of the legitimate play. 

Sec. 20. If one or more members of the team at bat 
stand or collect at or around a base for which a base- 
runner is trying, thereby confusing the fielding side and 
adding to the difficulty of making such play, the base-run- 
ner shall be declared out for the interference of his team- 
mate or team-mates. 



When Umpire Shall Declare an Out. 

The umpire shall declare the batsman or 
RULE 57. base-runner out, without waiting for an ap- 
peal for such decision, in all cases where 
such player be put out in accordance with any of these 
rules, except Sections 13 and 18 of Rule 56. 



Coaching Rules. 

A coacher may address words of assistance 
RULE 58. and direction to the base-runners or to the 
batsman. He shall not, by words or signs, incite 
or try to incite 'the spectators to demonstrations, and shall not 
use language which will in any manner refer to or reflect 
upon a player of the opposite club, the umpire or the spec- 
tators. Not more than two coachers, who must be players 
in the uniform of the team at bat, shall be allowed to oc- 
cupy the space between the players' and the coachers' lines, 
one near first and the other near third base, to coach base- 
runners. If there be more than the legal number of coach- 
ers or this rule be violated in any respect the umpire must 
order the illegal coacher or coachers to the bench, and if 
his order be not obeyed within one minute, the umpire 
shall assess a fine of $5.00 against each offending player, 
and upon a repetition of the offense, the offending player 
or players shall be debarred from further participation in 
the game, and shall leave the playing field forthwith. 



The Scoring of Runs. 

One run shall be scored every time a 
RULE 59. base-runner, after having legally touched 
the first three bases, shall legally touch the 
home base before three men are put out; provided, how- 
ever, that if he reach home on or during a play in which 
the third man be forced out or be put out before reaching 
first base, a run shall not count. A force-out can be made 
only when a base-runner legally loses the right to the base 
he occupies by reason of the batsman becoming a base- 
runner, and he is thereby obliged to advance. 

UMPIRES AND THEIR DUTIES. 
Power to Enforce Decisions. 

The umpires are the representatives of 
RULE 60. the League and as such are authorized and 
required to enforce each section of this 
code. They shall have the power to order a player, cap- 
tain or manager to do or omit to do any act which in their 
judgment is necessary to give force and effect to one or 
all of these rules, and to inflict penalties for violations of 
the rules as hereinafter prescribed. In order to define their 
respective duties, the umpire judging balls and strikes shall 
be designated as the "Umpire-in-Chief" ; the umpire judging 
base decisions as the "Field Umpire." 

The Umpire-in-Chief. 

Section i. The Umpire-in-Chief shall 
RULE 61. take position back of the catcher; he shall 
have full charge of and be responsible for 
the proper conduct of the game. With exception of the 
base decisions to be made by the Field Umpire, the Umpire- 
in-Chief shall render all the decisions that ordinarily would 
devolve upon a single umpire, and which are prescribed 
for "The Umpire" in these Playing Rules. 

Sec. 2. He shall call and count as a "ball" any unfair 
ball delivered by the pitcher to the batsman. He shall also 
call and count as a "strike" any fairly delivered ball which 
passes over any portion of the home base, and within the 
batsman's legal range as defined in Rule 31, whether struck 
at or not by the batsman; or a foul tip which is caught 
by the catcher standing within the lines of his position, 
within io feet of the home base; or which, after being 
struck at and not hit, strike the person of the batsman ; 
pr when the ball be bunted foul by the batsman; or any 



foul hit ball not caught on the fly unless the batsman has 
two strikes ; provided, however, that a pitched ball shall 
not be called or counted a "ball" or "strike" by the umpire 
until it has passed the home plate. 

Sec. 3. He shall render base decisions in the following 
instances: (1) If the ball is hit fair, with a runner on 
first, he must go to third base to take a possible decision ; 
(2) with more than one base occupied, he shall decide 
whether or not a runner on third leaves that base before a 
fly ball is caught; (3) in case of a runner being caught 
between third and home, when more than one base is oc- 
cupied, he shall make the decision on the runner nearest the 
home plate. 

Sec. 4. The Umpire-in-Chief alone shall have authority 
to declare a game forfeited. 

The Field Umpire. 

Section i. The Field Umpire shall take 
RULE 62. such positions on the playing field as in his 
judgment are best suited for the rendering 
of base decisions. He shall render all decisions at first 
base and second base, and all decisions at third base except 
those to be made by the Umpire-in-Chief in accordance 
with Sec. 3, Rule 61. 

Sec. 2. He shall aid the Umpire-in-Chief in every man- 
ner in enforcing the rules of the game and, with the excep- 
tion of declaring a forfeiture, shall have equal authority 
with the Umpire-in-Chief in fining or removing from the 
game players who violate these rules. 

No Appeal From Decisions Based on Umpire's Judgment. 

There shall be no appeal from any de- 
RULE 63. cision of either umpire on the ground that 
.he was not correct in his conclusion as to 
whether a batted ball was fair or foul, a base-runner safe 
or out, a pitched ball a strike or a ball, or on any other 
play involving accuracy of judgment, and no decision ren- 
dered by him shall be reversed, except that he be con- 
vinced that it is in violation of one of these rules. The 
captain shall alone have the right to protest against a 
decision and seek its reversal on a claim that it is in con- 
flict with a section of these rules. In case the captain does 
seek a reversal of a decision based solely on a point of 
rules, the umpire making the decision shall, if he is in 
doubt, ask his associate for information before acting on 



the captain^ appeal. Under no circumstances shall either 
umpire criticise or interfere with a decision unless asked to 
do so by his associate. 

Duties of Single Umpire. 

If but one umpire be assigned, his duties 
RULE 64. and jurisdiction shall extend to all points, 
and he shall be permitted to take his stand 
in any part of the field that in his opinion will best enable 
him to discharge his duties. 

Must Not Question Decisions. 

Under no circumstances shall a captain 
RULE 65. or player dispute the accuracy of the um- 
pire's judgment and decision on a play. 

Clubs Can Not Change Umpire. 

The umpire can not be changed during a 
RULE 66. championship game by the consent of the 
contesting clubs unless the official in charge 
of the field be incapacitated from service by injury or ill- 
ness. 

Penalties for Violations of the Rules. 

Section i. In all cases of violation of 
RULE 67. these rules, by either player or manager, the 
penalty shall be prompt removal of the 
offender from the game and grounds, followed by a period 
of such suspension from actual service in the club as the 
President of the League may fix. In the event of removal 
of player or manager by either umpire, he shall go direct 
to the club house and remain there during the progress of 
the game, or leave the grounds ; and a failure to do so will 
warrant a forfeiture of the game by the Umpire-in-Chief. 

Sec. 2. The umpire shall assess a fine of $5.00 against 
each offending player in the following cases: (1) If the 
player intentionally discolor or damage the ball ; (2) if 
the player fail to be seated on his bench within one minute 
after ordered to do so by the umpire; (3) if the player 
violate the coaching rules and refuse to be seated on his 
bench within one minute after ordered to do so by the 
umpire; (4) if the captain fail to notify him when one 
player is substituted for another. 

Sec. 3. In cases where substitute players show their 
disapproval of decisions by yelling from the bench, the 



umpire shall first give warning. If the yelling continues 
he shall fine each offender $10.00, and if the disturbance is 
still persisted in he shall clear the bench of all substitute 
players ; the captain of the team, however, to have the 
privilege of sending to the club house for such substitutes 
as are actually needed to replace players in the game. 

Umpire to Report Violations of the Rules. 

The umpire shall within twelve hours 
RULE 68. after fining or removing a player from the 
game, forward to the President a report of 
the penalty inflicted and the cause therefor. 

Immediately upon being informed by the 
RULE 69. umpire that a fine has been imposed upon 
any manager, captain or player, the Presi- 
dent shall notify the person so fined and also the club of 
which he is a member; and, in the event of the failure of 
the person so fined to pay to the Secretary of the League 
the amount of said fine within five days after notice, he 
shall be debarred from participating in any championship 
game or from sitting on a player's bench during the progress 
of a championship game until such fine be paid. 

When the offense of the player debarred 
RULE 70. from the game be of a flagrant nature, 
such as the use of obscene language or an 
assault upon a player or umpire, the umpire shall within 
four hours thereafter forward to the President of the 
League full particulars. 

Warning to Captains. 

The umpire shall notify both captains be- 
RULE 71. fore the game, and in the presence of each 
other, that all the playing rules will be 
strictly and impartially enforced, and warn them that fail- 
ure on their part to co-operate in such enforcement will 
result in offenders being fined, and, if necessary to preserve 
discipline, debarred from the game. 

On Ground Rules. 

Section i. Before the commencement of 
RULE 72. a game the umpire shall see that the rules 
governing all the materials of the game are 
strictly observed. 



Sec. 2. In case of spectators overflowing on the playing 
field, the home captain shall make special ground rules to 
cover balls batted or thrown into the crowd, provided such 
rules be acceptable to the captain of the visiting club. If 
the latter object, then the umpire shall have full authority 
to make and enforce such special rules, and he shall an- 
nounce the scope of same to the spectators. 

Sec. 3. In all cases where there are no spectators on 
the playing field, and where a thrown ball goes into a stand 
for spectators, or over or through any fence surrounding 
the playing field, or into the players' bench (whether the 
ball rebounds into the field or not), or remains in the meshes 
of a wire screen protecting the spectators, the runner or run- 
ners shall be entitled to two bases. The umpire in awarding 
such bases shall be governed by the position of the runner 
or runners at the time the throw is made. 

Sec. 4. The umpire shall also ascertain from the home 
captain whether any other special ground rules are neces- 
sary, and if there be he shall advise the opposing captain 
of their scope and see that each is duly enforced, provided 
they do not conflict with any of these rules and are ac- 
ceptable to the captain of the visiting team. 



Official Announcements. 

The umpire shall call "Play" at the hour 
RULE 73. appointed for the beginning of a game, 
announce "Time" at its legal interruption- 
and declare "Game" at its legal termination. Prior to the 
commencement of the game he shall announce the bat- 
teries, and during the progress of the game shall announce 
each change of players. In case of an overflow crowd, he 
shall announce the special ground rules agreed upon, and 
he shall also make announcement of any agreement entered 
into by the two captains to stop play at a specified hour. 



Suspension of Play. 

The umpire shall suspend play for the fol- 
RULE 74. lowing causes: 

1. If rain fall so heavily as in 'the judg- 
ment of the umpire to prevent continuing the game, in 
which case he shall note the time of suspension, and should 
rain fall continuously for thirty minutes thereafter he shall 
terminate the game. 



2. In case of an accident which incapacitates him or a 
player from service in the field, or in order to remove 
from the grounds any player or spectator who has violated 
the rules, or in case of fire, panic or other extraordinary 
circumstances. 

3. In suspending play from any legal cause the umpire 
shall call "Time"; when he calls "Time," play shall be 
suspended until he calls '"Play" again, and during the 
interim no player shall be put out, base be run or run be 
scored. "Time" shall not be called by the umpire until the 
ball be held by the pitcher while standing in his position, 
except that this does not apply to Section 3, Rule 37 nor does 
it apply in case of fire, panic or storm. 



Field Rules. 

No person shall be allowed upon any 
RULE 75. part of the field during the progress of a 
game except the players in uniform, the 
manager of each side, the umpire, such officers of the law 
as may be present in uniform, and such watchmen of the 
home club as may be necessary to preserve the peace. 

No manager, captain or player shall ad- 
RULE 76. dress the spectators during a game except 
in reply to a request for information about 
the progress or state of the game, or to give the name of 
a player. 

Every club shall furnish sufficient police 
RULE 77. force to preserve order upon its own grounds, 
and in the event of a crowd entering the 
field during the progress of a game, and interfering with 
the play in any manner, the visiting club may refuse to play 
until the field be cleared. If the field be not cleared within 
Z5 minutes thereafter, the visiting club may claim and shall 
be entitled to the game by a score of nine runs to none (no 
matter what number of innings has been played). 



General Definitions. 

"Play" is the order of the umpire to be- 
fcULE 78. gin the game or to resume it after its sus- 
pension. 

"Time" is the order of the umpire to sus- 
RULE 79. pend play. Such suspension must not ex- 
tend beyond the day. 



■ "Game" is the announcement of the um- 
pire that the game is terminated. 

> "An inning" is the term at bat of the 
nine players representing a club in a game 
and is completed when three of such players 
have been legally put out. 

"A Time at Bat" is the term at bat of a 
batsman. It begins when he takes his posi- 
tion, and continues until he is put out or be- 
comes a base-runner. But a time at bat shall not be charged 
against a batsman who is awarded first base by the umpire 
for being hit by a pitched ball, or on called balls, or when 
he makes a sacrifice hit, or for interference by the catcher. 

RULE 83. "Legal" or "Legally" signifies as required 
by these rules. 



THE SCORING RULES. 

To promote uniformity in scoring cham- 
RULE 84. pionship games the following instructions 
are given and suggestions and definitions made 
for the guidance of scorers, and they are required to make 
all scores in accordance therewith. 



The Batsman's Record. 

Section i. The first item in the tabulated 
RULE 85. score, after the player's name and position, 
shall be the number of times he has been at 
bat during the game, but the exceptions made in Rule 82 
must not be included. 

Sec. 2. In the second column shall be set down the runs, 
if any, made by each player. 

Sec. 3. In the third column shall be placed the first base 
hits, if any, made by each player. 

The Scoring of Base Hits. 

Sec. 4. A base hit shall be scored in the following cases : 
When the ball from the bat strikes the ground on or 
within the foul lines and out of the reach of the fielders, 
provided the batter reaches first base safely, 

When a fair-hit ball is partially or wholly stopped by 
a fielder in motion, but such player can not recover himself 



RULE 80. 
RULE 81. 

RULE 82. 



in time to field the ball to first before the striker reaches 
that base or to force out another base-runner. 

When the ball be hit with such force to an infielder or 
pitcher that he can not handle it in time to put out the 
batsman or force out a b?.se- runner. In a case of doubt 
over this class of hits, a base hit should be scored and the 
fielder exempted from the charge of an error. 

When the ball is hit so slowly toward a fielder that he 
cannot handle it in time to put out the batsman or force 
out a base-runner. 

In all cases where a base-runner is retired by being hit 
by a batted ball, unless batted by himself, the batsman 
should be credited with a base hit. 

When a batted ball hits the person or clothing of the 
umpire, as defined in Rule 53, Section 6. 

In no case shall a base hit be scored when a base-runner 
is forced out by the play. 

When a fielder after handling a batted ball, elects to try 
to retire a base-runner instead of the batter, the play is 
known as a "fielder's choice." In case the runner is retired, 
or would be retired but for an error, the batter shall be 
charged with a time at bat, but no hit. If the runner is not 
retired, and no error is made, the batter shall be charged with 
a time at bat, but no hit, provided he swung at the ball, and 
shall be credited with a sacrifice hit, provided he bunted the 
ball; if, however, in the judgment of the scorer the batter 
could not have been retired at! first base by perfect fielding, 
he shall be credited with a base hit. 



Sacrifice Hits. 

Sec. 5. Sacrifice hits shall be placed in the Summary. 

A sacrifice hit shall be credited to the batsman who 
when no one is out or when but one man is out, advances 
a runner a base by a bunt hit, which results in the batsman 
being put out before reaching first, or would so result if it 
were handled without error. 

A sacrifice hit shall also be credited to a batsman who, 
when no one is cut or when but one man is out, hits a fly 
ball that is caught but results in a run being scored on the 
catch, or would in the judgment of the scorer so result 
if caught. 

Fielding Records. 

Sec. 6. The number of opponents, if any, put out by 
each player shall be set down in the fourth column. Where 
the batsman is given out by the umpire for an illegally 



batted ball, or fails to bat in proper order, or is declared 
out on third bunt strike, the put-out shall be scored tp the 
catcher. In cases of the base-runner being declared "out" 
for interference, running out of line, or on an infield fly. 
the "out" should be credited to the plaj-er who would have 
made the play but for the action of the base-runner or the 
announcement of the umpire. 

Sec. 7. The number of times, if any, each plaj-er assists 
in putting out an opponent shall be set down in the fifth 
column. One assist and no more shall be given to each player 
who handles the ball in aiding in a run-out or any othei 
play of the kind, even though he complete the play by making 
the put-out. 

An assist should be given to a player who makes a play 
in time to put a runner out, even if the player who could 
complete the play fails, through no fault of the assisting 
player. 

And generally an assist should be given to each player 
who handles or assists in any manner in handling the ball 
from the time it leaves the bat until it reaches the player 
who makes the put-out, or in case of a thrown ball, to each 
player who throws or handles it cleanly, and in such a way 
that a put-out results, or would result if no error were 
made by a team-mate. 

Assists should be credited to every player who handles 
the ball in the play which results in a base runner being 
called "out" for interference or for running out of line. 

A double play shall mean any two continuous put-outs that 
take place between the time the ball leaves the pitcher's 
hands until it is returned to him again standing in the 
pitcher's box. 

Errors. 

Sec. 8. An error shall be given in the sixth column ::: 
each misplay which prolongs the time at bat of the bats- 
man or prolongs the life of the base-runner :: allows a base- 
runner to make one or more bases when perfect play would 
have insured his being put out. But a base on balls, a base 
awarded to a batsman by being struck by a pitched ball, a 
balk, a passed ball or wild pitch shall not be included in the 
sixth column. 

An error shall not be charged against the catcher for 2 
wild throw in an attempt to prevent a stolen base, unless 
the base-runner advance an extra base because of the error- 

An error shall not be scored against the catcher or an 
infi elder who attempts to complete a double play, unless 



the throw be so wild that an additional base be gained. This, 
however, does not exempt from an error a player who drops 
a thrown ball when by holding it he would have completed 
a double play. 

In case a base-runner advance a base through the failure 
of a baseman to stop or try to stop a ball accurately thrown 
to his base the latter shall be charged with an error and 
not the player who made such throw, provided there was 
occasion for it. If such throw be made to second base the 
scorer shall determine whether the second baseman or 
shortstop shall be charged with an error. 

In event of a fielder dropping a fly but recovering the 
ball in time to force a runner at another base, he shall be 
exempted from an error, the play being scored as a "force- 
out." 

Stolen Bases. 

Sec. 9. A stolen base shall be credited to the base-run- 
ner whenever he advances a base unaided by a base hit, a 
put-out, a fielding or a battery error, subject to the following 
exceptions : 

In event of a double or triple steal being attempted, 
where either runner is thrown out, the other or others 
shall not be credited with a stolen base. 

In event of a base-runner being touched out after sliding 
over a base, he shall not be regarded as having stolen the 
base in question. 

In event of a base-runner making his start to steal a base 
prior to a battery error, he shall be credited with a stolen 
base and the battery error shall also be charged. 

In event of a palpable muff of a ball thrown by the 
catcher, when the base-runner is clearly blocked, the in- 
fielder making the muff shall be charged with an error and 
the base-runner shall not be credited with a stolen base. 



Definition of Wild Pitch and Passed Ball. 

Sec. 10. A wild pitch is a legally delivered ball, so high, 
low or wide of the plate that the catcher cannot or does 
not stop and control it with ordinary effort, and as a result 
the batsman, who becomes a base-runner on such pitched ball, 
reaches first base or a base-runner advances. 

A passed ball is a legally delivered ball that the catcher 
should hold or control with ordinary effort, but his failure 
to do so enables the batsman, who becomes a base-runner 
on such pitched ball, to reach first base or a base-runner 
to advance. 



Definition of Run Earned Off Pitcher. 



Sec. ii. A run earned off the pitcher shall be scored every 
time a player reaches home base by the aid of safe hits, sac- 
rifice hits, stolen bases, bases on balls, hit batsmen, wild 
pitches and balks, before fielding chances have been offered 
to retire the side. 

The pitcher shall be given the benefit of doubt whenever 
fielding errors are made and in determining the base to which 
a runner should have been held with perfect support on part 
of fielders. A fielding error made by the pitcher shall be 
considered the same as any other fielding error. No run can 
be earned that scores as result of batsman having reached 
first base on a fielding error or passed ball; nor can any run 
be earned after the fielding side has failed to accept chances 
offered to retire the side. 

To determine the pitcher's percentage for the season, the 
total number of runs earned off his pitching shall be divided 
by the total number of innings he has pitched; then multiplied 
by nine, to find his average effectiveness for a complete game. 



The Summary. 

The Summary shall contain : 

RULE 86. c _ ' . . 

Section i. The score made m each in- 
ning of the game and the total runs of each side in the game. 

Sec. 2. The number of stolen bases, if any. made by each 
player. 

Sec. 3. The number of sacrifice hits, if any, made by 
each player. 

Sec. 4. The number of sacrifice flies, if any, made by 
each player 

Sec. 5. The number of two-base hits, if any, made by 

each player 

Sec. 6. The number of three-base hits, if any, made by 
each player. 

Sec. 7. The number of home runs, if any, made by each 
player. 

Sec. 8. The number of double and triple plays, if any, 
made by each team and the players participating in same. 



Sec. 9. The number of innings each pitcher pitched in. 

Sec. io. The number of base hits, if any, made off each 
pitcher and the number of legal "at bats'' scored against 
each pitcher. 

Sec. Hi The number of times, if any, the pitcher strikes 
out the opposing batsmen. 

Sec. 12. The number of times, if any, the pitcher gives 
bases on balls. 

Sec. 13. The number of wild pitches, if any, charged 
against the pitcher. 

Sec. 14. The number of times, if any, the pitcher hits a 
batsman with a pitched ball, the name or names of the 
batsman or batsmen so hit to be given. 

Sec. 15. The number of passed balls by each catcher. 

Sec. 16. The time of the game. 

Sec. 17. The name of the umpire or umpires. 



spalding's official indoor base ball guide. 



Hancock's Indoor Base Ball Rules 

AS REVISED AND A DOTTED EY THE , 

National Indoor Base Call Association 
of the United States 



RULE I. 

The diamond is laid at one end of the hall, leaving room for 
the catcher, who always plays close behind the batsman. The 
bases (except the home plate) are iy 2 feet square, made of can- 
vas, half filled with sand or other similar substance. The home 
plate is of rubber and is one foot square. Each side of the dia- 
mond is 27 feet long, and a base is placed in each corner and 
need not be fastened to the floor. The distance from home to 
second base, and from first to third base, is 38^ feet. The 
pitcher's box is 7 x 3 feet, the nearest line of said box to be 
23 feet from the center of home base. The batsman's box (one 
to the left and one to the right of the home base) shall be four 
feet long and three feet wide, extending one foot in front of and 
three feet behind a center line through the home base, with its 
nearest side distant six inches from the home base, the outlines 
to be marked on the floor. 

When a game is played in a large armory or other large build- 
ing the diamond may be laid out with 35 feet base lines, the front 
line of the pitcher's box to be 30 feet from the center of the 
home plate. All other dimensions to be the same as when using 
the 27 feet base lines. 

RULE II. 

the foul line. 

The foul lines must be drawn in straight lines from the outer 
corner of the home base, along the outer edge of the first and 
third bases to the boundaries of the ground, so that the bases 
shall come within the diamond. 



8 



SPALDING'S OFFICIAL INDOOR BASE BALL GUIDE. 



RULE III. 

THE BALL. 

The ball must be not less than i6J4 nor more than 17% inches 
in circumference, made of a yielding substance, not less than 
8 nor more than 8^4 ounces in weight, and covered with a white 
skin; should it become ripped or torn during a game, a new one 
must be substituted. The Spalding Official Indoor League Ball 
was adopted as the official ball of this Association, and must be 
stamped with the seal of the Association. 

When playing the armory game (that is, on the large diamond 
with 35-foot base lines) the Spalding Xo. IX. ball, fourteen (14) 
inches in circumference, shall be the official ball. 

RULE IV. 

THE BAT. 

The bat must be feet long and not larger than i£4 inches 
in diameter in the largest part, and may have a rubber tip on 
the handle to prevent slipping. It must be made otherwise of 
wood, except that a metal rod may be passed through the center 
to give desired weight, but under no circumstances is lead to be 
used in loading. The handle may be wound with string or tape. 

RULE V. 

THE PLAYERS. 

Seven to nine players must constitute a side. The players' 
positions shall be such as shall be assigned them by their captain 
(on fair ground), except that the pitcher must take his position 
within the pitcher's lines. When in position on the field, all 
players will be designated as "fielders" in these rules. 

RULE VI. 

THE PITCHER. 

The pitcher shall take his position facing the batter with both 
feet on the ground wholly within the box and with both feet on 
the rear line of said box, and when in the act of delivering the 



Spalding's official indoor base ball guide. 



9 



ball shall not take more than one step, but shall not be restricted 
as to curving the ball, although the arm must be swung parallel 
with the body. 

He shall not make more than one step in the act of delivering 
the ball He shall hold the ball before the delivery fairly in 
front of his body and in sight of the umpire. 

When the Armory game is played on a large diamond with 35- 
foot base lines and 30-foot pitching distance, the pitcher shall 
take his position as described above, but can heel with one or 
both feet a line drawn across the box 18 inches from the rear 
end of said box and shall not take more than one step in the 
act of delivering the ball. He shall hold the ball before delivery 
fairly in front of his body and in sight of the umpire. 

NOTE. — In the preliminary moves of the pitcher the arm does not have 
to be swung parallel with the body, but only on the final swing, when deliv- 
ering the ball. 

RULE VII. 

THE GAME. 

A game shall consist of nine innings to each contesting club 
except that, if the side first at the bat scores less runs in nine 
innings than the other has scored in eight innings, the game shall 
then terminate; or, if the side last at bat in the ninth inning 
scores the winning run before the third man is out, the game 
shall terminate. 

RULE VIII. 

A TIE GAME. 

If the score be a tie at the end of the ninth inning to each 
side, play shall be continued only until the side first at bat shall 
have scored one or more runs than the other side in an equal 
number of innings, or until the other side shall score one or 
more runs than the side first at bat. 

RULE IX. 

A FORFEITED GAME. 

A forfeited game shall be declared by the umpire in favor 
of the club not in fault, at the request of such club, in the fol- 
lowing cases : 



10 



Spalding's official indoor base ball guide. 



(a) If the required number of players to constitute a team fail 
to appear upon the held, or being upon the field fails to begin 
the game within one minute after the umpire has called "play" 
at the hour appointed for the beginning of the game, unless such 
delay in appearing or in commencing the game be unavoidable. 

(b) If. after the game has begun, one side refuses or fails to 
continue playing, unless such game has been suspended or termi- 
nated by the umpire. 

RULE X. 

SUBSTITUTES. 

The base-runner r hall not have a substitute run for him except 
by the consent of the captains of the contesting teams. 

RULE XL 

CHOICE OF INNINGS. 

The choice of innings shall be decided by flipping a coin. 
RULE XII. 

GOOD AND BAD BALLS. 

A ball legally delivered by the pitcher which passes over any 
part of the home base not lower than the batsman's knee nor 
higher than his shoulder is a good ball. Otherwise it is a bad 
ball. It being assumed that the batter is standing erect while in 
his position. 

RULE XIII. 

BALKS. 

A motion to deliver the ball by the pitcher without his doing 
so, or holding the ball so long as to unnecessarily delay the game, 
constitutes a balk. Penalty: One ball to be called. 

NOTE.— If the pitcher swings his arm or makes any other motion to deliver 
the ball without doing so, it constitutes a balk. This applies only when the 
pitcher is in the pitcher's box. 

RULE XIV. 

ILLEGAL BALLS. 

A BALL DELIVERED BY THE PITCHER WITH ANY PART OF HIS PERSON 
OUT OF THE BOX. OR IF THE PITCHER FAILS TO HEEL THE BACK 



SPALDING S OFFICIAL INDOOR BASE BALL GUIDE. 



II 



line of the pitcher's box with both feet prior to pitching 
the ball, or if he takes more than one step in the act of 
delivery. 

When the Game is played under armory rule, an illegal 
pitch shall be declared if the pitcher does not heel the 
18-inch line. an illegal pitch entitles any base-runner or 
batsman to a base. 

RULE XV. 

DEAD BALLS. 

Any pitched ball striking the batter is a dead ball, but does 
not entitle him to a base. If a batter intentionally gets in the 
way or interferes with any legally delivered ball a strike shall be 
called. If it should be the third strike the batter is out, and no 
base can be run on that ball. 

RULE XVI. 

NOT IN PLAY. 

In case of an illegal hit, foul hit ball not legally caught out, 
dead ball, or base-runner put out for being struck by a fair hit 
ball, the ball shall not be considered in play until it is held by 
the pitcher standing in his box. 

NOTE. — Any player other than the pitcher receiving the ball and stand- 
ing in the pitcher's position cannot put the ball in play. 

RULE XVII. 

BLOCK BALLS. 

A block ball is a batted or thrown ball that is stopped or 
handled by any person not engaged in the game. 

(a) Whenever a block occurs, base-runners may run the bases 
without being put out, until the ball has been returned to and 
held by the pitcher standing in his box. 

(b) In the case of a block, if a person not engaged in the 
game should retain possession of the ball, or throw or kick it 
beyond the reach of the fielders, the umpire shall call "time," 
and require each base-runner to stop at the last base touched by 
him until the ball be returned to the pitcher standing in his box. 



12 Spalding's official indoor base ball guide. 

>(c) Special ground rules may be made allowing a certain num- 
ber of bases on a fair hit into the crowd (or a thrown ball), in 
which case the above sections are void. 

RULE XVIII. 

THE SCORING OF RUNS. 

One run shall be scored every time a base-runner, after having 
legally touched the first three bases, shall touch the home base 
before three men are put out. If the third man is forced out, or 
is put out before reaching first base, a run shall not be scored. 

RULE XIX. 

FAIR AND FOUL BALLS. 

(a) A batted ball which strikes inside or on the foul line is 
fair, the first point of contact with the floor, object or fielder 
deciding, regardless of where it afterward rolls. 

(b) A batted ball first striking outside the foul line shall 
be foul. 

RULE XX. 

STRIKES. 

(a) A strike is a ball struck at by the batsman without 
touching his bat. 

(b) A foul tip caught. 

NOTE. — A foul tip is a ball hit that does not go higher than the batsman's 
head. 

(c) A good ball legally delivered by the pitcher and not struck 
at by the batsman. 

(d) A good ball legally delivered by the pitcher and inten- 
tionally interfered with by the batsman. 

(e) A strike shall be called on the first foul batted ball, pro- 
vided, however, that no strikes have been called on the batsman 
as covered by Sections (a), (b), (c) and (d) above. 

NOTE.— Keferring to Section (e) of this rule, the umpires must ascertain 
from the captains of both teams before the start of the game, if Section (e) 
is to be enforced. If this is not done, then Section (e) automatically becomes 
effective. 

A ball rolling foul after one strike has been called on the 
batsman does not constitute a strike. 



Spalding's official indoor base ball guide. 



13 



RULE XXI. 

ILLEGAL HITS. 

An illegal hit is a fair hit ball batted by the batsman when 
any part of his person is outside the lines of the batter's box. 

NOTE. — The batsman must, when the pitcher starts his delivery, remain 
within the confines of the batter's box under penalty of being called out 
under this rule, for he violates same by making a fair hit when any part of 
his person is outside of the lines of the batter's box. 

NOTE.— This rule is corrected to avoid confusion inasmuch as heretofore it 
was headed "Foul Strikes." 

RULE XXII. 

. THE BATSMAN IS OUT. 

(a) The batsman is out if he bats out of his turn and makes 
a fair hit or reaches first base before the error is discovered. 
This rule shall not be enforced unless the "out" be declared 
before the ball has been delivered by the pitcher to the succeeding 
batsman. 

(b) If he fails to take his position within one minute after 
the umpire has called for the batsman. 

(c) If he makes a foul hit and the ball be held by a fielder 
before touching the ground or any wall or fixture. 

(d) If he makes an illegal hit, as provided in Rule XXI. 

(e) If he attempts to hinder the catcher from fielding the ball, 
or fouls the ball intentionally, evidently- without effort to make 
a fair hit. 

NOTE.— If the batter interferes with the catcher fielding his position, the 
base-runners cannot advance on the play. 

(f) If, while first base be occupied by the base-runner, he has 
three strikes, except when two men are already out. 

(g) As per Rule XV. 

(h) If the batsman is hit by the ball on the third strike he 

shall be declared out. 

NOTE. — If, after the batsman has two strikes, he fouls the ball, and the 
ball hits him before it hits the floor, wall or any fixture, he shall be 
called out. 

RULE XXIII. 

BASE RUNNING. 

The batsman becomes a base-runner — 

(a) Instantly after he makes a fair hit. 

(b) Instantly after three balls have been called by the umpire. 



14 Spalding's official indoor base ball guide. 



(c) Instantly after three strikes. 

(d) Instantly after the umpire declares an illegal delivery of 
? ball by the pitcher. 

NOTE.— When agreement is made by the captains of both teams in the 
presence of the umpires, Section (b) of this rule can be amended to read: 

"Instantly after four balls have been called by the batter, if agree- 
ment is not made, then Section (b) } as written, automatically becomes 
effective." 

RULE XXIV. 

BASES TO BE TOUCHED. 

The base-runner must touch each base in regular order, viz., 
First, second, third and home base; but when obliged to return 
may go directly to the base which he legally holds. 

RULE XXV. 

ENTITLED TO BASES. 

The base-runner shall be entitled, without being put out, to 
take one base in the following cases : 

(a) If, while he was batsman, the umpire called three balls. 

(b) If the umpire awards a succeeding batsman a base on 
three or four balls or in case of an illegal delivery and the base- 
runner is thereby forced to vacate the base held by him 

(c) If the umpire calls a "balk" or "illegal pitch." 

NOTE.— Batsman is entitled to first base on an illegal pitch but not on a 
balk. 

(d) If a ball delivered by the pitcher pass the catcher or is 
fumbled, only one base may be taken, provided the runner makes 
it, unless it is a third strike or fourth ball, when the runner is 
entitled to all he can get. 

(e) If the pitcher does not give him time to return to his base. 

(f) If, upon a fair hit, the ball strikes the person or clothing 
of the umpire on fair ground. 

(g) If he be prevented from making a base by the obstruction 
of an adversary, unless such adversary has tha ball in his 
possession. 

(h) If, when he was batsman, the pitcher delivered an "illegal 
ball. ,, 



Spalding's official indoor base ball guide. 



15 



(i) On a fair or foul fly ball caught the base-runner can 
advance, provided he does not leave his base until after the ball 
*s caught. 

[This does not exempt the runner from being put out.] 
(j) If the person or clothing of the umpire is struck by a ball 
thrown by the catcher to intercept a base-runner. 

RULE XXVI. 

WHEN TO START. 

(a) A base-runner must not leave his base when the pitcher 
holds the ball standing in his box (except to moisten the soles 
of his shoes by permission of the umpire). 

(b) A base-runner must not leave his base on a pitched ball 
not struck, until after it has reached or passed the catcher, on 
penalty of being called back. 

(c) A base-runner must be on his base when the pitcher is 
ready to deliver the ball to the batsman. 

(d) When the Armory game is played on a large diamond 
with 35 feet base lines, the base-runner must not leave his base 
on a pitched ball until after it has left the pitcher's hands, on 
penalty of being sent back. 

[Starting too soon does not exempt a base-runner from being 
put out on that particular play. The umpire must not make a 
decision in regard to a premature start until the base-runner has 
reached the next base or is put out.] 

RULE XXVII. 

RETURNING TO BASES. 

The base-runner shall return to his base, and shall be entitled 
to so return without being put out — 

(a) If the umpire declares a foul hit which is not legally 
caught by a fielder. 

(b) If the umpire declares an illegal hit. 

(c) If the umpire declares a dead ball. 

(d) If he is called back by the umpire for starting too soon. 



1 6 spalding's official indoor base ball guide. 

RULE XXVIII. 

A BASE-RUNNER IS OUT. 

(a) If, having made a fair hit, while batsman, such fair hit 
ball be held by a fielder before touching the ground, wall or any 
fixture. 

(b) If he intentionally kicks or interferes with a ball he has 
just batted. 

[If a ball he has just batted rebounds and hits him he shall 
not be declared out on that account.] 

(c) If the third strike be caught before touching the ground 
or any object. 

(d) If, after three strikes or a fair hit, he be touched with the 
ball in the hands of a fielder before such base-runner touches 
first base. 

(e) If, after three strikes or a fair hit, the ball be securely 
held by a fielder while touching first base with any part of his 
person, before such base-runner touches first base. 

(f) If, in running from first to second base, from second to 
third base, or from third to home base, he runs more than three 
feet from a direct line between such bases to avoid being touched 
by a ball in the hands of a fielder; but in case a fielder be occu- 
pying a base-runner's proper path, attempting to field a batted 
ball, then the base-runner shall run out of the path and shall not 
be declared out for so doing. 

(g) If he fails to avoid a fielder attempting to field a batted 
ball, or if he in any way obstructs a fielder attempting to field 
a batted ball, or intentionally interferes with a thrown ball. 

(h) If, at any time, while the ball is in play, he be touched 
by the ball in the hands of a fielder, unless some part of his 
person is touching a base he is entitled to occupy; provided, the 
ball be held by the fielder after touching him; but — exception as 
to first base — in running to first base, he may overrun said base 
without being put out for being off said base, after first touching 
it, provided he returns at once and retouches the base, after 
which he may be put out as at any other base. If, in overrunning 



SPALDING'S OFFICIAL INDOOR BASE BALL GUIDE. 



17 



first base, he also attempt to run to second base, he shall forfeit 
such exemption from being put out. 

(i) If, when a fair or foul fly is legally caught, such ball is 
legally held by a fielder on the base occupied by the base- runner 
when such ball was struck, or the base-runner be touched with 
the ball in the hands of a fielder, before he retouches- said base 
after such fair or foul hit ball was so caught. 

(j) If a fair hit ball strikes him before touching a fielder, wall, 
fixture or ceiling, except when a runner is holding a base he is 
legally entitled to, and in such case no base shall be run unless 
forced by the batsman becoming a base-runner, and no run shall 
be scored. 

(k) If, when running to a base, he fail to touch the inter- 
vening base or bases in regular order, he may be put out at the 
base he fails to touch by a fielder holding the ball on said base, 
in the same manner as in running to first base. 

NOTE. — If when a batsman hits a fly hall, whether fair or foul, and in 
running to first base the ball hits him before touching the wall, floor, fixture 
or fielder, he shall be declared out, and no base-runner will be allowed to 
advance on this play. 

RULE XXIX. 

TURN EITHER WAY. 

In returning to first base ; after overrunning, the baseman may 
turn either way. 

RULE XXX. 

SAFELY ON A BASE. 

A base-runner is safely on a base if he slides with the bag and 
clings to it; or, if any part of his person is touching the spot 
rmere the bag should be ; or, he is safe if he has touched the 
' ome base or where the base should be. 

[If, in sliding with the bag at any base, he should stop, he 
must then return with the bag to the proper spot before starting 
for another base, the same as in overrunning first base.] 

RULE XXXI. 

COACHING RULES. 

(a) The coachers are restricted in coaching to base-runners 
only, and are not allowed to address any remarks except to base- 
runners, and then only in words of necessary direction. 



1 8 spalding's official indoor base ball guide. 

(b) No coacher will be allowed up when the bases are unoccu- 
pied, and only one coacher when one base is occupied, and no 
more than two coachers when two or more bases are occupied. 

(c) A line shall be drawn four feet from first and third base 
towards the home base and four feet out from the base line 
which shall be known as the coachers' box. The coachers must 
stand back of this line, and will not be allowed to take a po- 
sition anywhere other than the coachers' box, as denned above. 

RULE XXXIL 
SUITABLE shoes. 

Only shoes with rubber soles or other soft material shall be 
used, and in all league games teams must be fully uniformed. 

RULE XXXIII. 

PITCHER MUST WAIT. 

When a base-runner is legally entitled to return to a base, the 
pitcher must wait a reasonable time for him to reach the base, 
on penalty of giving the base-runner another base for violation. 

RULE XXXIV. 

UMPIRES. 

(a) The umpires are masters of the field from the commence- 
ment to the termination of the game, and are entitled to the 
respect of the spectators, and any person offering any insult or 
injury to either of them must be promptly ejected from the 
room b}^ those in charge. 

(b) The umpires must ascertain from the captains of both 
clubs whether or not there are any special ground rules to be 
enforced, and if there are, it is their duty to see that these 
special rules are strictly enforced 

The umpires must also ascertain from both captains if Sec- 
tion (e) of Rule XX and Section (b) of Rule XXIII are to be 
enforced. 

NOTE.— It is of the utmost important that all umpires observe this rule, 
for the reason that whether or not thU information is secured from both cap- 
tains, nevertheless the rules are effective, but it will obviate arguments if the 
umpires will strictly observe all the rules concerning their duties. 



Spalding's official indoor base ball guide. 



(c) The umpires must compel the players to observe the pro- 
visions of the playing rules, and are hereby invested with the 
authority to order any player to do, or omit, any act as they 
may deem necessary to give force and effect to any and all of 
such provisions. 

(d) There shall be two umpires, who shall take suitable posi- 
tions on the field for the observation of the plays that they are 
to judge. 

(e) No. 1 shall decide on and call all balls, strikes, blocks, 
dead balls, balks, illegal deliveries, fair and foul balls, ground 
hits, illegal hits, all questions arising at home plate, and shall 
call play and time and take a position behind the catcher. 

(f) No. 2 shall judge all base plays excepting those at home 
plate, and shall take a position about ten feet back of the base 
line, midway between home and first, or home and third bases, 
or where he can get the best view of the play. No. 2 is also to 
observe the pitcher's delivery so as to be able to properly notify 
No. 1 if requested of him, on the question of the pitcher prop- 
erly heeling the back line, as provided in the rules. He should 
also observe whether or not the foul tips are properly caught — 
that is, before touching the floor, so as to assist No. 1 if 
requested of him. 

(g) The umpires shall be sole judges of the play, and discus- 
sion will only be allowed on correct interpretation of the rules 
and not on any optional decision. All such discussions are 
restricted to the two captains. 

(h) The two umpires shall change positions at the end of 
every full inning. 

(i) In case an umpire for some reason cannot decide a play, 
he shall refer to his colleague. 

(j) The umpires must keep the contesting nines playing con- 
stantly from the commencement of the game to its termination, 
allowing such delays only as are rendered unavoidable by acci- 
dent or injury. The umpires must, until the completion of the 
game, require the players of each side to promptly take their 
positions in the field as soon as the third man is put out, and 



20 spalding's official indoor base ball guide. 

must require the first batter of the opposite side to be in his 
position at the bat as soon as the fielders are in their places. 

HOW TO UMPIRE — A new book in the Spalding Athletic Library series by 
Billy Evans of the American League staff, although written for the outdoor 
game contains many suggestions that will be of use to the indoor official, in 
addition to interpretations of the playing rules for the outdoor games. As 
Invaluable to the player and spectator as to the umpire. Postpaid, 25 cents. 

RULE XXXV. 

CALLING "PLAY" AND "TIME." 

(a) The umpire designated as No. i must call "play" promptly 
at the hour designated by the home club, and on the call of "play" 
the game must immediately begin. When he calls "time," play 
must be suspended until he calls "play" again, and during the 
interim no player shall be put out, base be run or run be scored. 
The umpire shall suspend play only for an accident to himself 
or a player (but in case of accident to a fielder "time" shall not 
be called until the ball be returned to and held by the pitcher 
standing in his box). 

(b) "Time" must not be called for trivial causes. The practice 
of players suspending the game to discuss or contest a decision 
with either umpire is a gross violation of the rules and the 
umpire must not allow it. 

(c) If a player wilfully disobeys the cautions of the umpires 
in regard to violations of the rules he may, at the discretion of 
the umpires, be ordered out of the game and his place be filled, 
if such decision reduce the side to less than eight players. 

RULE XXXVI. 

SCORING. 

In order to promote uniformity in scoring, the following sug- 
gestions and definitions are made for the benefit of scorers, and 
they are required to make all scores in accordance therewith. 

Section i. The first item in the tabulated score, after the 
player's name and position, shall be the number of times he has 
been at bat during the game. 

No time at bat shall be scored if the batsman be given first 
L-i-se on battery errors, which are four called balls, dropped or 
missed third strike, passed balls., wild pitch, or illegal delivery, 



Spalding's official indoor base ball guide. 21 

Sec. 2. In the second column shall be set down the number of 
hits made by each player. 

A hit should be scored in the following cases : 

When the ball from the bat strikes the ground within the foul 
lines and out of reach of the fielders. 

When a hit ball is partially or wholly stopped by a fielder in 
motion, but such player cannot recover himself in time to handle 
the ball before the striker reaches first base. 

When a ball is hit with such force to a fielder that he cannot 
handle it in time to put out the batsman. 

When a ball is hit so slowly toward a fielder that he cannot 
handle it in time to put out the batsman. 

That in all cases where a base-runner is retired by being hit 
by a batted ball, the batsman should be credited with a hit 

Sec. 3. In the third column should be set down the number 
of runs made by each player during the game. 

Sec. 4. In the fourth column shall be set down the number of 
opponents put out by each player. When a batsman is called out 
for a foul strike, or when he fails to bat in the proper order, the 
put-out shall be scored to the catcher. In all cases of out for 
interference or running out of line, the put-out shall be credited 
to the player who would have made the play but for the action 
of the base-runner or batsman. 

Sec. 5. The number of times the player assists shall be set 
down in the fifth column. An assist shall be given to each player 
who handles the ball in assisting a put-out or other play of the 
kind. An assist should be given to the player who makes a play 
in time to put a runner out, even if the player who could complete 
the play fails through no fault of the player assisting. 

Sec. 6. An error should be given in the sixth column for each 
misplay which allows the batsman or base-runner to make one or 
more bases when perfect play would have insured his being put 
out, except that "wild pitches," "bases on balls, ,, or illegal pitched 
balls, balks or passed balls, all of which comprise battery errors, 
shall not be included in this column. 



22 spalding's official indoor base ball guide. 

An error shall not be scored against the catcher for a wild 
throw to prevent a stolen base, unless the base-runner advances 
an extra base because of the error. 

No error shall be scored against a fielder who attempts to 
complete a double play, unless the throw is so wild that an addi- 
tional base is gained. 

RULE XXXVII. 

SUMMARY. 

Section i. The score made in each inning of the game. 
Sec. 2. The number of two-base hits made by each player. 
Sec. 3. The number of three-base hits made by each player. 
Sec. 4. The number of home runs made by each player. 
Sec. 5. The number of hits made off each pitcher. 
Sec. 6. The number of times the pitcher strikes out the oppos- 
ing batsmen. 

Sec. 7. The number of times the pitcher gives bases on balls. 
Sec. 8. The number of wild pitches charged to the pitcher. 
Sec. 9. The number of passed balls by each catcher. 
Sec. 10. The time of the game. 
Sec. II. The names of the umpires. 



112 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBE ART. 



GOAL 



CORNER 
FLAG 



GOAL 



L!NE 



J 


GO 
-< 


5|goalarea!2 

P 20 YDS. • 


to 
Q 






O 
C/> 


• 

PENALTY RADIUS 


>- 
00 





44 YDS. 




CORNER 
FLAG 



44 YDS. 



PENALTY RADIUS 



cr> 20YD$. 
| COAL AREA, | 



GOAL 



LINE 



• • 

GOAL 

PLAN OF FIELD OF PLAY. 
Referred to in Law 1 of the game, 



/^CORNER 
FLAG 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



113 



Laws of Soccer 



LAW I. 

The game should be played by Eleven players on Number of 

each Side. Players, 

The field of play shall be as shown in the plan Dimensions of 
on page 112, subject to the following pro- Field of Play, 
visions : The dimensions of the field of play shall 
be — maximum length, 130 yards; minimum length, 
100 yards ; maximum breadth, 100 yards ; minimum 
breadth, 50 yards. 

Instructions to Referees. — Refuse to sanction 
play if danger is likely to accrue to players from 
the state of the ground. As to the weather, use 
your own judgment, but do not needlessly spoil 
sport. 

Instructions to Secretaries. — The size 115 yards 
by 75 yards is the most general. 

The field of play shall be marked by boundary Marking out- 
lines. The lines at each end are the goal-lines, and Ground, 
the lines at the sides are the touch-lines. The touch- 
lines shall be drawn at right angles with the goal- 
lines. A flag with a staff not less than 5 feet high 
shall be placed at each corner. A half-way line 
shall be marked out across the field of play. The 
center of the field of play shall be indicated by a 
suitable mark, and a circle with a 10 yards radius 
shall be made around it. 

Official Decisions. — Flag-staffs with pointed tops 
must not be used. 

The touch and goal-lines must not be marked by 
a V-shaped rut. 

(International Board, June 16, 1902.) 

Instructions to Referees. — Short flag-staffs are 
dangerous, hence the minimum height of 5 feet, 

The Referee must not allow a corner flag-staff to 
be removed, even for the convenience of the player 
taking a corner-kick. 

Instructions to Secretaries. — The goal-line must 
be marked out. from corner to corner, including 
the goal. . 

A half-way line is necessary on all grounds. 

See that; the one yard area within which %U$ 
corner kick must be taken is marked out, 



114 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



The Goals. The goals shall be upright posts fixed on the goal- 
lines, equi-distant from the corner flag staffs, 8 yards 
apart, with a bar across them 8 feet from the ground. 
The maximum width of the goal-posts and the 
maximum depth of the cross-bar shall be 5 inches. 
Instructions to Referees. — The Referee must 
caution any player wilfully displacing flags or goal- 
posts, or pulling down the bar, and if repeated he 
should order the offender off the field of play. 

Instructions to Secretaries. — The surface of the 
bars or posts facing the field of play or other- 
wise must not be more than five inches in width. 
Tape or any substance not of a rigid nature, must 
not be used in the place of a bar. Goal nets are 
strongly recommended. 

Have the goal-posts and bars painted white so 
as to be distinctly seen. Provide light colored 
corner flags. See that the goal nets are properly 
pegged down and in order before every match, ancl 
that there are no holes or possible openings for 
the escape of the ball. 

Instructions to Players. — Goal-keepers to save 
a shot or to get hold of the ball sometimes seize 
the bar and pull it down. Any player wilfully 
displacing a flag or goal-post, or bar, is guilty of 
misconduct. 

The Goal Lines shall be marked 6 yards from each goal-post 
Area - at right angles to the goal-lines for a distance of 
6 yards, and these shall be connected with each 
other by a line parallel to the goal-lines ; the space 
within these lines shall be the goal area. Lines shall 
The Penalty be marked i8 yards from each goal-post at right 
Area, angles to the goal-lines for a distance of 18 yards, 
and these shall be connected with each other by a 
line parallel to the goal-lines ; the space within these 
lines shall be the penalty- area. A suitable mark 
shall be made opposite the center of each goal, 12 
yards from the goal-line ; this shall be the penalty 
kick mark. 

The Ball. The circumference of the ball shall be not less 
than 27 inches, nor more than 28 inches. The outer 
casing of the ball must be of leather, and no material 
shall be used in the construction of the ball which 
would constitute a danger to the players. 

Instructions to Secretaries. — The ball should be 
supolied bv the home club. 

See that the ball is fully inflated, and that 
there are reserve balls close at hand. 



The Spalding Olympic Foot Ball is the Official Foot Ball : correct in weigh'- ga; 
jneasureroent, and should, be ^sed in all games, ~" 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



115 



In International matches, the dimensions of the Dimensions of 
field of play shall be— maximum length, 120 yards; Weight 7 

minimum length, no yards; maximum breadth, of Ball in 

80 yards ; minimum breadth, 70 yards ; and at the International 

commencement of the game the weight of the ball Matches - 
shall be from 13 to 15 ounces. 

Instructions to Referees. — Refers to Inter- 
national Contests only. 



LAW II. 

The duration of the game shall be 90 minutes, Duration of 
unless otherwise mutually agreed upon. Game. 

Instructions to Referees. — The Referee must 
allow for time wasted, or lost, through accident 
or other cause, and it is desirable that the two 
captains should be informed when such allowance 
is made. 

Unless a Referee is notified to the contrary by 
the two captains he must under ordinary circum- 
stances continue the game for 90 minutes. 

There is no power to set aside the Rules of 
Cup and other Competitions where the time to 
be played is specified. 

Instructions to Players. — If you wish to play 
short time the Referee must be notified. This 
may only be done by the mutual agreement of 
both captains. 

The winners of the toss shall have the option of Qo°jg eof 
kick-off or choice of goals. °* s * 

Instructions to Referees. — Note which side kicked 
off. (See Instructions to Referees on Law 13.) 

The game shall be commenced by a place-kick TheKick-Off. 
from the center of the field of play in the direction 
of the opponents' goal-line; the opponents shall not 
approach within 10 yards of the ball until it is kicked 
off, nor shall any player on either side pass the center 
of the ground in the direction of his opponents' goal 
until the ball is kicked off. 

Official Decisions. — A Place-Kick is a kick at 
the ball while it is on the ground in the center 
of the field of play. 

If this Law is not complied with the kick-off 
must be taken over again. 

(International Board, June 15, 1903.) 

Instructions to Referees. — Referees should notice 
that a free kick must not be awarded for any 
breach of this Law. It is their duty to see the 
kick-off properly taken in the direction of the oppo- 



116 



SPALDING' & ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



Ends to be 
Changed at 
Half-Time. 
Fhe Interval. 
Restarting 
Game. 



site goal; also that back kicking and encroaching 
must not be allowed. 

Any player wilfully encroaching should first be 
cautioned, and, on a repetition, be ordered off the 
field of play. After the ball has been properly 
kicked off, the second and other players may play 
it in any direction. 

If in the opinion of the Referee the ball has not 
rolled completely over, or traveled the distance of 
its circumference, i. e., about 27 inches, he must 
order it back again to be kicked off properly. 

The Referee must not allow anyone to kick-off 
unless he is a player competing in the match. This 
order does not apply to Charity matches. 

m Instructions to Secretaries. — The practice of get- 
ting an outside person to kick-off in a match is 
forbidden, except in Charity matches. 

Instructions to Players. — Many players, when the 
whistle sounds for the start, run inside the 10 
yards' circle. This is wrong, as the game com- 
mences with the kick-off, not with the Referee's 
signal. 

LAW III. 

Ends shall only be changed at half-time. The 
interval at half-time shall not exceed five minutes, 
except by consent of the Referee. After a goal is 
scored the losing side shall kick off, and after the 
change of ends at half-time the ball shall be kicked 
off by the opposite side from that which originally 
did so ; and always as provided in Law 2. 

Instructions to Referees. — The _ Referee is dis- 
tinctly authorized to prevent deliberate waste of 
time. (See Law 13.) 

He should use every endeavor to limit the half- 
time interval to 5 minutes, and not allow his con- 
sent to its extension to be assumed as a matter of 
course. 

Instructions to Players. — In competitions where 
after a drawn game an extra half-hour is neces- 
sary, the Captains must toss again for choice of 
ends, and play must be a quarter of an hour each 
way. 



How a Goal 
is Scored. 



LAW IV. 

Except as otherwise provided by these Laws, a 
goal shall be scored when the ball has passed between 
the goal-posts under the bar, not being thrown, 
knocked on, nor carried by any player of the attack- 
ing side. 

Official Decisions. — The whole of the # ball must 
have passed over the goal-line, or touch-line, before 
it is out of play. 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



117 



Knocking on and carrying are both forms of 
handling the ball. 

Instructions to Referees. — The words "not being 
thrown" cover a throw-in from touch, so that if a 
player throws the ball in from touch through the 
opponents' goal it would be a goal-kick for the 
defending side and not a goal. 

It is possible for the ball to roll all along the 
goal-line, and for the greater part of it to be over 
the line, and yet not pass through the goal. The 
goal-keeper may be behind the goal-line and yet 
prevent a goal. 

A Referee must under no circumstances allow a 
goal unless he is absolutely satisfied that it is a 
goal. 

In catching the ball or fisting out, a goal-keeper 
sometimes allows the ball to pass into goal in mid 
air, and the Referee may consider that the whole 
of the ball crosses the line. If so and he is in a 
good position to judge, he must ^ive a goal. 

It is difficult to tell unless one is close up, hence 
the necessity for the Referee following the ball 
closely up and down the ground and trying to get 
a side view whenever he thinks a shot is about to 
be put in, or there is a scrimmage in front of the 
goal. 

Instructions to Secretaries. — The necessity for 
the goal-line between the posts being clearly 
marked is emphasized by the requirements of this 
Law. 



If from any cause during the progress of the game 
the bar is displaced, the Referee shall have power to 
award a goal if in his opinion the ball would have 
passed under the bar if it had not been displaced. 

Instructions to Secretaries. — It is important that 
secretaries should see that the bars are securely 
fixed to the posts. 

The ball is in play if it rebounds from a goal-post, 
cross-bar, or a corner flag staff into the field of play. 
The ball is in play if it touches the Referee or a 
Linesman when in the field of play. 

Instructions to Referees. — The ball touching the 
Referee or a Linesman when he is in the field of 
play is still in play, though it might otherwise 
have gone into touch or over the goal-line. 

Linesmen should follow the game close to the 
touch-line and keep out of the field of play as 
much as possible. 

The ball is out of play when it has crossed the 
goal-line or touch-line, either on the ground or in 
the air. 

Instructions to Referees, — The ball going into 



If Bar 
Displaced. 



If Ball 

Rebounds from 
Goal-posts, etc 



Ball Crossing 
Lines, Out of 
Play. 



118 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



touch in mid air and afterwards alighting in the 
field of play is out of play. 

Instructions to Players. — The ball may roll along 
the touch-line or goal-line and still be in play. 
The whole of the ball must have passed over and 
be clear of the touch-line or goal-line before it is 
out of play. 



LAW V. 

the Throw-in When the ball is in touch, a player of the opposite 
side to that which played it out shall throw it in 
from the point on the touch-line where it left the 
field of play. The player throwing the ball must 
stand on the touch-line facing the field of play, and 
shall throw the ball in over his head with both hands 
in any direction, and it shall be in play when thrown 
in. A goal shall not be scored from a throw-in, and 
the thrower shall not again play until the ball has 
been played by another player. 

This law is complied with if the player has any 
part of both feet on the line when he throws the 
ball in. 

Official Decision. — Touch is that part of the 
ground on either side of the field of play. 

Instructions to Referees. — The Linesman should 
point with his flag to the place where the ball 
went into touch and stand a little behind the 
thrower to watch the throw-in. If the player 'does 
not throw the ball in properly, the Referee must 
give a free kick. An improper throw would be 
one delivered over the shoulder, or with one hand 
giving the impetus and the other merely guiding 
the ball, or if the thrower had not some part of 
both feet on the touch line at the moment of 
throwing, or if the thrower merely dropped the 
ball and did not throw it. A player throwing-in 
the ball must face the field of play. 

Instructions to Secretaries. — Provide light- 
colored flags for Linesmen. 

Instructions to Players. — The practice^ of claim- 
ing for the throw-in when the ball goes into touch 
is far too prevalent and is unnecessary. 

Let the Linesman give HIS DECISION. All 
the claiming in the world will not alter it, unless 
the Referee shall see fit to interfere. 



LAW VI. 

Off-side. When a player plays the ball, or throws it in from 
touch, any player of the same side who at such 
moment of playing or throwing-in is nearer to his 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



119 



opponents' goal-line is out of play, and may not 
touch the ball himself, nor in any way whatever 
interfere with an opponent, or with the play, until 
the ball has been again played, unless there are at 
such moment of playing or thro wing-in at least three 
of his opponents nearer their own goal-line. A player 
is not out of play when the ball is kicked off from 
goal, when a corner-kick is taken, when the ball has 
been last played by an opponent, or when he himself 
is within his own half of the field of play at the 
moment the ball is played or thrown in from touch 
by any player of the same side. 

Official Decisions. — If a player deliberately trips 
an opponent who is standing in an off-side posi- 
tion within the penalty area, and who does not 
attempt to play the ball or obstruct, a penalty kick 
should be awarded 

A flag may be placed opposite the half-way line 
on each side of the field of play, but it must be 
at least one yard from the touch-line, and must 
have a staff not less than 5 feet high. 

Instructions to Referees. — A player who is in 
his own half of the field of play at the moment 
the ball is last played cannot be off-side. 

The point to notice is not where a player is 
when he plays the ball, but where he is at the 
moment it is played by a player of the same side. 
In the rush of a game a Referee is apt to lose 
sight of the positions of the field at every kick, 
yet he ought to educate himself to intuitively fix 
each change on his mind. If a player is in line 
with or behind the ball when it is played he can- 
not possibly be off-side, but if he is in front of it 
he is liable to be so. Though a player cannot be 
off-side when an opponent last plays the ball, or 
when a corner-kick, or a goal-kick, is taken, this 
protection ceases the moment a second player plays 
the ball, so that a player not off-side when a 
corner-kick is taken, may, without having moved, 
be off-side as soon as the ball has been played. A 
player following up another of his own side who 
has the ball cannot be off-side. Players # may be 
off-side when a free kick or penalty kick is taken, 
and when the ball is thrown in from touch. An 
opponent playing the ball puts a player on-side at 
once, but while standing off-side a player must not 
interfere in any way with an opponent or with 
the play. If a player is standing off-side, he is 
off-side until the ball is next played, even though 
sufficient opponents fall back to make three 
between him and their goal line. 

The International Board have made it plain 
that a player, who is in an off-side position, is 
bound to keep out of the way of the play, and 
that he is liable to be penalized if in any manner 
Jiis presence causes any interference with the play. 



120 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



When the ball is kicked off from either goal no 
player is off-side. 

The provision of flags opposite the half-way line 
is optional. The object is to assist the Referee 
and Linesman to determine the position of the 
half-way line when they are at a distance or when 
the line has become indistinct. 

Instructions to Players. — A player who is in his 
own half of the field of play at the moment the 
ball is last played cannot be off-side. 

A player once off-side cannot put himself on- 
side. This can only be done ~f or him in three 
ways: — (i) If an opponent next plays the ball; 
(2) If he is behind the ball when it is next played 
by one of his own side; (3) If he has three oppo- 
nents between him and their goal line when the 
ball is played by one of his own side further from 
his opponents' goal than himself. 

The ball hitting the goal-post or bar and rebound- 
ing does not put a player on-side who was "off- 
side" when the ball was last played. 

Take care that when the ball is played by one of 
your own side you have three opponents between 
you and their goal-line or that you are in a line 
with or behind the ball. Can anything be sim- 
pler? If your opponent plays the ball, or the ball 
touches him in any way, you are on-side no mat- 
ter where you stand, but when standing off-side 
you have no right to interfere with an opponent 
nor to station yourself so near the goal-keeper, 
or any other opponent, as to hamper his move- 
ments, or obstruct his sight of the ball. When 
a player finds he is in an off-side position it is his 
duty to keep clear of the play and neither inter- 
fere with nor inconvenience an opponent, nor 
make a pretense of doing so. 



LAW VII. 

Goal-Kick. When the ball is played behind the goal-line by a 
player of the opposite side, it shall be kicked off by 
any one of the players behind whose goal-line it 
went, within that half of the goal area nearest the 
Comer-Kick. po i nt where the ball left the field of play; but, if 
played behind by any one of the side whose goal- 
line it is, a player of the opposite side shall kick it 
from within one yard of the nearest corner flag- 
staff. In either case an opponent shall not be allowed 
within ten yards of the ball until it is kicked off. 

Official Decision. — The corner flag-staff must not 
be removed when a corner-kick is taken. 

Instructions to Referees. — It is the duty of the 
Referee to see that goal-kicks are properly taken 
within that half of the goal area nearest the point 
where the ball went out. 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



It is the duty of the Referee to see that corner- 
kicks are properly taken, and on the side on 
which the ball goes out. 

If the player takes a corner-kick, and the ball 
rebounds to him after striking the goal-post, he 
must not play it again until it has been played by 
another player. Do not allow a goal-kick or 
corner-kick to be taken while any opponent is 
within 10 yards of the ball. 

Instructions to Secretaries. — See that the corner- 
kick one yard area is marked. 

Instructions to Players. — Opponents should 
remember that they must not stand within 10 yards 
of the ball. To do so is the cause of constant 
annoyance and is not playing the game fairly. 



LAW VIII. 

The goal-keeper may within his own penalty area, Goal-keeper 
use his hands, but shall not carry the ball. Handling. 

Official Decision. — Carrying by the goal-keeper 
is taking more than two steps while holding the 
ball, 01 bouncing it on the hand. 

Instructions to Referees. — The goal-keeper must 
not "walk about'* bouncing the ball on the hand. 
After the second step he must be penalized. 

The goal-keeper must not handle the ball outside 
his own penalty area. 

For "carrying" the ball the penalty is a free 
kick and not a penalty kick. 

The goal-keeper shall not be charged except when charging 
he is holding the ball or obstructing an opponent, or Goal-keeper, 
when he has passed outside the goal area. 

Instructions to Referees. — If the goal-keeper 
obstructs an opponent he may be charged even 
when in his goal area. See that the goal-keeper is 
not unfairly charged, as he has so little chance 
of protecting himself when his attention is engaged 
with a coming shot. 

Special notice should be taken of the fact that 
a goal-keeper may be charged when he is outside 
the goal area. 

Instructions to Players. — The goal-keeper should 
bear in mind that directly he leaves his goal area 
he is liable to be charged by an opponent. 

So long as a goal-keeper does not stick to the 
ball, or obstruct an opponent, he is protected 
under the Laws when within his goal area. Get 
rid of the ball at once is naturally the best advice 
that can be given him. 

The goal-keeper may be changed during the game, Goal-keeper 
birt notice of such change must first be given to the changed 



122 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



Official Decision. — If a goal-keeper has been 
changed without the Referee being notified, and 
the new goal-keeper handles the ball within the 
penalty area, a penalty kick must be awarded. 
See Law 17. 

(International Board, June 17, 1901.) 

Instructions to Referees. — Xote who commences 
a game as goal-keeper, and allow no one else to 
act as goal-keeper, or to claim his privileges, until 
you have been notified of the change of goal- 
keeper. 

Instructions to Players. — If the goal-keeper who 
commences the game in that position should be 
changed during the game the Referee should at 
once be notified of the fact, and also of any sub- 
sequent changes. 



LAW IX. 

Neither tripping, kicking, striking, nor jumping at 
a player shall be allowed. 

Official Decisions. — Tripping is intentionally 
throwing, or attempting to throw, an opponent by 
the use of the legs, or by stooping in front of or 
behind him. 

The Laws should be more vigorously enforced 
by Referees in order to prevent improper con- 
duct, and players who are guilty of it escaping 
punishment. 

Instructions to Referees. — This is an important 
Law, as by enforcing it and taking the initiative 
where he sees necessary, a Referee can prevent 
rough play developing. He can stop the game at 
any time and give a free kick, or caution, or 
both, against any player whose conduct or play is 
dangerous or likely to cause injury. The free kick 
must be taken from the place where the infringe- 
ment occurred. 

Jumping at an opponent must of necessity be 
intentional, and this differs from jumping to play 
the ball. 

Instructions to Secretaries. — Bring before the 
notice of your committee any conduct on the part 
of a member of your club which is likely to bring 
the game into disrepute. If persisted in a dub 
ought not to allow any such offender to continue 
to belong to it, for not only may such conduct 
bring punishment on the player, but it gives the 
club a bad name and may lead to a more serious 
trouble. Use all means in your power to stop the 
practice of players using bad language, or address- 
ing observations to, or at, the Referee on or off 
the field. 

"Hands." A player (the goal-keeper, within his own penalty 
area, excepted) shall not intentionally handle the 
ball. 



Tripping, 
Kicking, 
Striking, 
Jumping at. 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



123 



Official Decisions. — Handling is intentionally- 
playing the ball with the hand or arm. 

Knocking on is when a player strikes or pro- 
pels the ball with his hands or arms. 

Cases of handling the ball and tripping, push- 
ing, kicking, or holding an opponent, and charging 
an opponent from behind, may so happen as to be 
considered unintentional, and when this is so, no 
offense is committed. 

(International Board, June 8, 1912.) 

Instructions to Referees. — Note the important 
fact that it is the intentional breach of Law which 
must be punished. This must be done promptly 
and strictly. 

Instructions to Players. — Let the Referee give 
"hands" on his own initiative. 

A plaver shall not use his hands to hold or push Holding:, 
an opponent. Pushing. 

Official Decision. — Holding includes the obstruc- 
tion of a player by the hand or any part of the 
arm extended from the body. 

Instructions to Referees. — Under no circum- 
stances whatever must a player push an opponent 
with his hands or arms. Using the knee against 
an opponent is a most dangerous practice and 
should be severely punished. 

Instructions to Players, — L'nder no circum- 
stances whatever must you push an opponent with 
your hands or arms, or use the elbow or knee 
against him. 

Charging is permissible, but it must not be violent Charging:, 
or dangerous. 

Instructions to Referees. — Charging must not be 
penalized unless it is violent or dangerous. 

Instructions to Players. — Let charging be of the 
good honest type and not degenerate into rough 
play. 

A player shall not be charged from behind unless Charging 
he is intentionally obstructing an opponent. Behind. 

Official Decisions. — The offense of charging an 
opponent from behind is not committed where a 
player in playing the ball touches a player behind 
unless there is an intention to charge such player. 
The Referee is the sole judge of such intention, 
but it has been noticed that many Referees con- 
strue the Law more strictly than is necessary to 
secure fair play, and in consequence of such deci- 
sions the progress of games is unnecessarily inter- 
fered with. 

If a player turns so as to face his own goal 
when he is tackled, or is obviously aware that he 
is about to be tackled by an opponent, he is inten- 
tionally obstructing, and may be charged from 
behind. (International Board, June 8, 1907.) 



124 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



Referees will ' be supported in putting down 
rough play. 

Instructions to Referees. — A olayer may be 
charged from behind when he is intentionally 
obstructing an opponent, whether he is facing his 
own goal or not, but the charging must under no 
circumstances be violent or dangerous. 

Instructions to Players. — Even if your opponent 
is intentionally obstructing you, yon have no right 
to charge him in a manner likely to do him injury. 
If players would hustle more and charge less the 
games would not be so rough and accidents not so 
frequent. 



LAW X. 

Free Kick. When a free kick has been awarded, the kicker's 
opponents shall not approach within ten yards of the 
ball, until the kick is taken, unless they are standing 
on their own goal line. The ball must at least be 
rolled over before it shall be considered played, 
i. e., it must make a complete circuit or travel the 
distance of its circumference. The kicker shall not 
play the ball a second time until it has been played 
by another player. The kick-off (except as provided 
by Law 2), corner-kick, and goal-kick shall be free 
kicks within the meaning of this Law. 

Instructions to Referees. — It is the Referee's 
duty to see that all free kicks are taken from the 
proper place and not allow a free kick to be taken 
until he has given a signal. The usual signal is 
a whistle. 

The free kick must be taken without delay. 
Nothing slows a game more than wasting time in 
taking a free kick. It is also unfair to delay, 
bearing in mind that a free kick awarded for 
breaches of Law 9 may score a goal direct. If 
opponents persist in encroaching act promptly and 
caution them. 

The kick must not be allowed if the ball is on 
the move while it is being taken. 

Instructions to Players — Players must wait for 
the signal from the Referee before taking the 
kick-off or free kick. 

Opponents must not approach within ten yards 
of the ball till it is kicked. 

Players neglecting this instruction are liable , to 
be ordered off the field. 



LAW XL 

Free Kick A goal may be scored from a free kick which is 
Goarma^be aw arded because of any infringement of Law 9, but 
Scored, not from any other free kick, 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



125 



Instructions to Referees. — Special notice should 
be taken of the fact that a goal may be scored 
direct, whether the ball touches a player of either 
side or not, if the free kick is awarded for trip- 
ping, kicking, jumping at, holding, pushing, vio- 
lently or dangerously charging an opponent, 
charging an opponent illegally from behind, or 
handling the ball (breaches of Law 9). But it 
must be remembered that a free kick awarded for 
any other breach of the Laws does not come under 
this regulation. Note that a goal cannot be scored 
direct from a kick-off, corner-kick, or goal-kick; 
or from free kicks awarded for the following 
breaches of Laws: — 

(a) Player playing the ball a second time 
before it has been played by another player, after 
throwing-in or taking a free kick or a penalty 
kick. 

(b) Off-side. 

(c) Carrying by goal-keeper. 

(d) Charging goal-keeper at wrong time, the 
charging being otherwise fair. 

(e) Playing the ball before it has touched the 
ground after being thrown down. 

(/) Ball not kicked forward from a penalty 
kick. 

(g) Improper throw-in. 

(h) Dangerous play. Law 13. 

Instructions to Players. — Players should remem- 
ber that a goal may be scored from a free kick 
imposed for infringements of Law. 9. 



LAW XII. 

A player shall not wear any nails, except such as Bars, Studs, 
have their heads driven in flush with the leather, or Etc - 
metal plates or projections, or gutta-percha, on his 
boots, or on his shin guards. If bars or studs on 
the soles or heels of the boots are used, they shall 
not project more than half an inch, and shall have 
all their fastenings driven in flush with the leather. 
Bars shall be transverse and flat, not less than half 
an inch in width, and shall extend from side to side 
of the boot. Studs shall be round in plan, not less 
than half an inch in diameter, and in no case conical 
or pointed. Any player discovered infringing this 
Law shall be prohibited from taking further part in 
the match. The Referee shall, if required, examine 
the players' boots before the commencement of a 
match, or during the interval. 

Official Decisions. — Wearing soft india-rubber on 
the soles of boots is not a violation of Law 12, 
Semi-circular toe pieces are legal. 



126 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



Metal toe-plates, though covered with leather, 
are illegal. 

Instructions to Referees. — It is the Referee's 
duty, if asked, to examine the players' boots 
before the match, or during the interval. The 
Referee must order off the field of play for the 
remainder of the game any player whom, during 
the progress of the play, he finds wearing: 

(a) Nails not flush with the leather. 

(b) Metal plates or projections. 

(c) Gutta percha on his boots, or on his shin 
guards. 

(d) Bars on soles or heels of his boots that do 
not extend from side to side of the boot," that are 
less than one-half inch wide, more than one-half 
inch deep, and not transverse and flat. 

(e) Studs on soles or heels of his boots, not 
round in plan, less than one-half inch in diam- 
eter, more than one-half inch deep, and conical or 
pointed. 

During the progress of a game the Referee can 
enforce this Law without waiting for an appeal. 
There is no necessity to report this offense. 

The Law includes metal clips or buckles, etc., 
that are dangerous, either on the boots or shin 
guards. 

Instructions to Secretaries. — See that your 
players are not by ignorance or otherwise infring- 
ing this Law. Many of the boots sold ready-made 
for foot ball are wrongly studded, some are fitted 
with metal clips for the lace holes and metal toe 
plates covered with leather, which are very dan- 
gerous, as are also projecting buckles on the shin 
guards. 

Instructions to Players. — It is also the duty of 
the players to see that their boots, etc., are in 
accordance with this Law, for if the Referee's 
attention is drawn to the irregularity during the 
progress of a game, the player may not go and 
change his boots, but must leave the field alto- 
gether, which might be a very serious matter to 
his side. If doubtful about it ask the Referee 
before the match, or during the interval, and he 
is bound to examine the boots. Players sometimes 
forget that studs wear away exposing the nails, 
which would make them illegal. 



LAW XIII. 

Duties and A Referee shall be appointed, whose duties shall be 
P Refer ° f to en ^ orce tne Laws and decide all disputed points ; 
e eree. ^ ec j s | on on points of fact connected with the 

play shall be final so far as the result of the 
game is concerned. He shall also keep a record of 
the game, and act as timekeeper. In the event of 
any ungentlemanly behavior on the part of any of 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



127 



the players, the offender cr offenders shall be 
cautioned, and if any further offense is committed, 
or in case of violent conduct without any previous 
caution, the Referee shall order the offending player 
or players off the field of play, and shall transmit 
the name or names of such player or players to his 
or their National Association, who shall deal with 
the matter. The Referee shall allow for time 
wasted, lost through accident, or other cause, suspend 
or terminate the game whenever, by reason of dark- 
ness, interference by spectators, or other cause, he 
may deem necessary; but in all cases in which a 
game is so terminated he shall report the same to 
the Association under whose jurisdiction the game 
was played, who shall deal with the matter. The 
Referee shall award a free kick in any case in which 
he thinks the conduct of a player dangerous, or likely 
to prove dangerous, but not sufficiently so as to 
justify him in putting in force the greater powers 
vested in him. The power of the Referee extends 
to offenses committed when the play has been tem- 
porarily suspended, and when the ball is out of play. 
Official Decisions. — Any player leaving the field 
during the progress of a game (except through 
accident) without the consent of the Referee will 
be deemed guilty of misconduct, and will render 
himself liable to be penalized. 

Persistent infringement of any of the Laws of 
the Game is ungentlemanly conduct within the 
meaning of this Law. (International Board, 
June 8, 1907.) 

All reports by Referees to be made within 
TWO days after the occurrence (Sundays not 
included), and reports will be deemed to be made 
when received in the ordinary course of post. 
(International Board, June 11, 1910.) 

Referees may in certain circumstances send 
their reports to the affiliated Association con- 
cerned. See .Agreement dated June 17, 1895. 

A player who is injured during a match shall 
be at once removed outside the nearest goal or 
touch-line, and the game resumed. (International 
Board, June, 1914.) 

It is the duty of the Referee to see that all free 
kicks, kicks from the goal, and corner-kicks are 
properly taken. 

Without permission of the Referee, no person 
shall be allowed on the field of play during a 
match other than the Linesmen and players. 

It is misconduct for any Association or club, or 
any player, official, or member of any Association 
or club to offer, or attempt to offer, either 
directly or indirectly, any consideration whatever 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



to another club, player, or players of any other 
club, with a view to influence the result of a 
match. It is misconduct for any club, player or 
players, to accept any such consideration! 

A Linesman is justified by Law 14 in directing 
the Referee's attention to distinct breaches of the 
Laws which have come under, his notice, and 
which he is satisfied the Referee could not see, 
and Referees should confer with the Linesmen in 
such a case, especially where the Linesmen are 
neutral. 

Instructions to Referees. — The duty of a Ref- 
eree to order a player off for violent conduct, or 
after a caution for ungentlemanly behavior, is 
emphasized by the alteration made in the Law by 
the International Board in 1909. 

The Referee decides everything, the Linesmen 
being his assistants, whose decisions he can over- 
rule. He must keep the score and also the time, 
and allow for time wasted, and stop the game as 
he thinks fit, though in the case of the game 
abruptly terminating, he is bound to report the 
fact, to the local or- National Association within 
three days. 

As regards rough play, the Referee has absolute 
discretion. Where he considers the conduct of a 
player dangerous, or likely to cause injury, he 
must award a free kick. In doing so he must 
caution the offender, and, if the offense is 
repeated, order the player off the field of play. In 
the case of violent conduct, a previous caution is 
not needed. 

Avoid (a). — Discussing or arguing points with 
players or officials on the field of play. 

(b.) — Arguing points with players, officials, or 
press men off the field of play. 

(c.) — Pointing at, or placing a hand on a player 
when cautioning him. Check rough play at the 
outset. 

The Referee is recommended to compare watches 
with the Linesmen, prior to the game and at half-* 
time. 

The Referee should be very careful in deduct- 
ing time for stoppages, etc. He should blow his 
whistle for time or half-time at the exact moment, 
whether the ball is in play or not. The only case 
in which time can be extended is that of a penalty 
kick. 

Referees are strongly recommended not to trust 
to memory alone to keep a record of the game, 
but to note on paper the time of start and the 
time at which they would in the ordinary course 
call half-time or time. They may then easily add 
to it for wilful delays, or stoppages of the game. 
The goals scored by each side in the order of 
occurrence should also be noted. 

Instructions to Players. — It is impossible for a 
Referee to please everybody. Remember his diffi- 
cult position and do not make it more so. 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



129 



If any disturbance arises go at once to the help 
of the Referee. 

Betting is prohibited. 

LAW XIV. 

Two Linesmen shall be appointed, whose duty Duties and 
(subject to the decision of the Referee) shall be to £^ e ° n f # 
decide when the ball is out of play, and which side 
is entitled to the corner-kick, goal-kick, or throw-in; 
and to assist the Referee in carrying out the game 
in accordance with the Laws. In the event of any 
undue' interference or improper conduct by a Lines- 
man, the Referee shall have power to order him off 
the field of play and appoint a substitute, and report 
the circumstances to the National Association hav- 
ing jurisdiction over him, who shall deal with the 
matter. 

Official Decisions. — Linesmen where neutral 
should call the attention of the Referee to rough 
play or ungentlemanly conduct, and generally 
assist him to carry out the game in a proper 
manner. 

Linesmen where neutral may be asked by the 
Referee to give an opinion on the ball crossing 
the goal-line between the posts. 

A player shall not act as Linesman or Referee 
during suspension. 

A Linesman is justified by Law 14 in directing 
the Referee's attention to distinct breaches of the 
Law which have come under his notice, and which 
he is satisfied the Referee could not see, and 
Referees should confer with the Linesmen in such 
a case, especially where the Linesmen are neutral. 

Instructions to Referees. — Linesmen must signal 
when the ball is out of play, and indicate which 
side is entitled to the corner-kick, goal-kick, or 
throw-in. They must also call the attention of 
the Referee to rough play or ungentlemanly con- 
duct, and must give their opinion on any point on 
which the Referee may consult them. 

If they notice any breach of the Laws that has 
escaped the Referee's attention it is their duty to 
inform him of it. 

The Referee has power to order a Linesman off 
the field for undue interference or improper con- 
duct and to appoint a substitute. This authority 
should only be exercised in extreme cases, as a 
warning will probably be sufficient. 

LAW XV. 

In the event of a supposed infringement of the Ball in 

Laws, the ball shall be in play until a decision has De^siorfgiv 
been given. 



130 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



Instructions to Referees. — The ball is in play 
until the whistle sounds, but the Referee should 
decide promptly. If in doubt consult the Linesmen. 

If the Referee declines to accept an appeal a 
shake of the head, or the words "play on" may 
sometimes be used with advantage. 

When the Referee has once given his decision 
and play has been resumed, he must not alter it. 

Instructions to Players. — Don't stop playing till 
the whistle sounds, and the decision once given 
don't importune the Referee to reverse it, or annoy 
him by remarks. 



LAW XVI. 

Re- starting the j n the event of any temporary suspension of play 
Temporary f rom any cause, the ball not having gone into touch 
Suspension, or behind the goal-line, the Referee shall drop the 
ball where it was when play was suspended, and 
it shall be in play when it has touched the ground. 
If the ball goes into touch or behind the goal-line 
before it is played by a player, the Referee shall 
again drop it. The players on either side shall not 
play the ball until it has touched the ground. 

Instructions to Referees. — If the game is stepped 
by reason of a player being hurt, or for any other 
cause (not being half-time or time) where there is 
no penalty attached, the Referee must throw the 
ball down where it was when play was suspended. 
No player is allowed to play the ball until it has 
reached the ground. Should the ball be touched 
before it reaches the ground, a free kick must be 
awarded to the opposite side. 

If the ball goes into touch or behind the goal- 
line before it is played by a player, the Referee 
must again throw the ball down. 

Instructions to Players. — A player is not allowed 
to play the ball until it has touched the ground. 



LAW XVII. 

Free kick. In the event of any infringement of Laws 5, 6, 8, 
io, or 16, or of a player being sent off the field under 
Law 13, a free kick shall be awarded to the oppo- 
site side, from the place where the infringement 
occurred. 

Official Decisions. — A Free Kick is a kick at 
the ball in any direction the player pleases, when 
it is lying on the ground. A place kick, a free 
kick, or a penalty kick must not be taken until 
the Referee has given a signal for the same. 

Cases of handling the ball, and tripping, push- 
ing, kicking or holding an opponent, and charging 
an opponent from behind may so happen as to be 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



considered unintentional, and when this is so, no 
penalty must be awarded. (International Board, 
June 16, 1902.) 

Instructions to Referees. — The Referee should 
refrain from awarding a free kick if it is to the 
advantage of the side offended against to allow the 
play to go on. 

Again the Referee is reminded of the fact that 
it is the intentional breach of Law which must be 
punished. 

Instructions to Players. — The Referee should 
refrain from awarding a free kick if it is to the 
advantage of the side offended against to allow the 
play to go on. 

In the event of any intentional infringement of Penalty 
Law 9 outside the penalty area, or by the attacking 
side within the penalty area, a free kick shall be 
awarded to the opposite side from the place where 
the infringement occurred. In the event of any 
intentional infringement of Law 9 by the defending 
side within the penalty area, the Referee shall award 
the opponents a penalty kick which shall be taken 
from the penalty kick mark under the following 
conditions : All players, with the exception of the 
player taking the penalty kick and the opponents' 
goal-keeper shall be outside the penalty area. The 
opponents' goal-keeper shall not advance beyond his 
goal line. The ball must be kicked forward. The ball 
shall be in play when the kick is taken, and a goal 
may be scored from a penalty kick; but the ball shall 
not be again played by the kicker until it has been 
played by another player. If necessary, time of play 
shall be extended to admit of the penalty kick being 
taken. A free kick shall also be awarded to the 
opposite side if the ball is not kicked forward, or is 
played a second time by the placer who takes the 
1 penalty kick until it has been played by another 
player. The Referee may refrain from putting the 
provisions of this Law into effect in cases where he 
is satisfied that by enforcing them he would be giv- 
ing an advantage to the offending side. If when a 
penalty kick is taken the ball passes between the 
goal-posts, under the bar, the goal shall not be 
nullified by reason of any infringement by the 
defending side. 

Official Decisions. — Unless the penalty kick is 
taken in accordance with the Law, the Referee 
must order the ball back until it is properly taken. 
If, on taking a penalty kick, the ball rebounds 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



from the goal posts or bar, and the kicker plays it 
a second time, a free kick must be awarded. 

The penalty kick can only be awarded for the 
following eight offenses, intentionally committed 
by a player of the defending side within the 
penalty area: 

1. Tripping an opponent. 

2. Kicking an opponent. 

3. jumping at an opponent. 

4. Handling the ball. 

5. Holding an opponent. 

6. Pushing an opponent. 

7. Charging an opponent violently or dan- 

gerously. 

8. Charging an opponent from behind. 
Cases of handling the ball, and tripping, push- 
ing, kicking or holding an opponent, and charging 
an opponent from behind may so happen as to be 
considered unintentional, and when this is so, no 
penalty must be awarded. (International Board, 
June 16, 1902.) 

If a player deliberately trips an opponent who is 
standing in an off-side position w r ithin the penalty 
area, and who does not attempt to play the ball or 
obstruct, a penalty kick should be awarded. 

A penalty kick can be awarded irrespective of 
the position of the ball at the time the offense is 
committed. (International Board, June 16, 1902.) 

If a goal-keeper has been changed without the 
Referee being notified, and the new goal-keeper 
handles the ball within the penalty area, a penalty 
kick must be awarded. (International Board, 
June 17, 1901.) 

In the event of the ball touching the goal-keeper 
before passing between the posts, when a penalty 
kick is being taken at the expiration of time, a 
goal is scored. (International Board, June 17, 
1901.) 

The Laws of the Game are intended to provide 
that games should be played with as little inter- 
ference as possible, and in this view it is the duty 
of Referees not to give penalties for technical or 
supposed breaches. Constant whistling or trifling 
and doubtful breaches produces bad feeling and 
loss of temper On the part of the players and 
spoils the pleasure of spectators. 

Instructions to Referees. — Extending the arms to 
keep an opponent back, though not actually catch- 
ing hold of him with the hand, is considered to be 
holding. 

Should^ the ball hit the goal-post or bar and 
rebound into play, the player who played it must 
not play it again until it has been played by 
another player. Should he do so a free kick must 
be given against him. 

The goal-keeper, defending a penalty kick, must 
not advance beyond his goal line. 

Until the Referee has satisfied himself that the 
players are in their proper positions he should not 
give a signal for the kick to be taken. Any player 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



133 



Wilfully encroaching should first be cautioned and 
on a repetition be ordered off the field of play. A 
penalty kick can be taken after time has expired. 

Once more the Referee is reminded that it is 
the intentional breach of Law that must be 
punished. 

The Referee must withhold the award of a pen- 
alty kick if he considers it would be to the advan- 
tage of the side offended against to let the play 
go on. 

When a goal results from a penalty kick, it shall 
not be nullified although there may have been an 
infringement of Law by the defending side. 

It is a common fault of Referees that, when 
players have committed offenses for which they 
should have been ordered off the field of play, a 
penalty kick only has been awarded. The award- 
ing of a penalty kick does not free a Referee from 
the duty of also ordering the offender off the field 
of play, where the offense is such as justifies this. 

Instructions to Players. — Players are not required 
to stand behind the ball, but may take up their 
position anywhere outside the penalty area, but 
within the field of play. 

There is a practice of players yelling or making 
other noises with the object of putting either the 
goal-keeper or the kicker at a disadvantage. Be 
gentlemen and treat your opponents as such. 

Players must wait for the Referee's signal before 
taking the penalty kick. 

A player may not rush in from his place out- 
side the penalty area until the ball has been 
kicked. If he does so he may be cautioned, and 
on repeating the offense be ordered off the field of 
play. 

The kick must be forward. 

Though a penalty kick may be deserved, the 
Referee is empowered not to enforce it, if to do 
so would benefit the offenders. Also if a penalty 
kick is awarded, and scores, the Referee must 
ignore any infringement by the defenders, and let 
the goal stand. 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



201 



Push Ball 

Push ball is played on a level field, 140 yards in length by 50 
yards in width, although the size of the field may necessitate 
chang-es in these measurements. Where the game is played indoors, 
the floor space can be greatly lessened. 

A team is composed of eleven players on a side, divided as 
follows: Five forwards, two left wings, two right wings and 
two goal-keepers. This formation must be taken when the ball 
is put in play. After the ball is in play the players can assume 
any position on the field within the rules. However, for general 
mass play, there is no limit to the number of players on each 
side, and it is this "free-for-all" feature that has made it so 
popular where great numbers are to be amused. 

In scoring, a team that shoves the ball under the cross bar 
and between the goal posts shall score 5 points; lifting or throw- 
ing the ball over the cross bar scores 8 points, and a safety 
counts 2 points. The principal object of the game is to push 
the ball and keep it in action until such time as you cross 
your opponent's goal. 

The opening play in any match is very spectacular. The teams 
line up, five men on the 20-yard mark, four men on the 40-yard 
mark and the two goal keepers on the goal lines. At the 
referee's whistle all start for the center of the field, where 
the ball has been placed. It is in this play that the best 
men will come in. No doubt the fastest men in the team will 
be the forwards. The forwards will be backed up by the wings, 
who will not be as speedy men, but stronger, and the goal 
keepers will be naturally the strongest men on the team. 
Strength and pushing qualities will be appreciated. 

Massive and unwieldly as the ball may seem, many clever 
plays can be developed. In a flying wedge, for instance, this 
particular play is brought into the game on a second penalty 
for a foul, and the team that has been penalized is behind 
the ball bracing it, but cannot move the ball. The team that 
has been given the penalty of having the flying wedge will 
line up at least 50 yards on the other side of the ball, and at 
a given signal the team will get under way, going at full speed. 
Of course, if the team hits the ball head on, so to speak, it 
will be utterly impossible for the team to gain, owing to the 
fact that the team has been penalized and is bracing it like 
a stone wall. The result is that the clever captain of the other 
side is enjoying the privilege of the flying wedge and will not 
run direct to the ball as the other team would like, but instead 
he will run his team zigzag and hit the ball on the side from 
the right to the left, thus bringing it away from the brace that 
has been made by the opposing team. Many tricks are possible 
when near an opponent's goal, for in pushing the ball above 
the crossbar, extra points are allowed. In this way it will be 
the play of the opposing team to get the ball in the air, so as 
to roll or push the ball across the heads of the opposing team. 
This can be done by the team breaking up, two men on shoulders 
holding the ball in midair. 

A sensational play is that of stealing the ball from the 
opposing team and running it down the field for a goal. This 
play is accomplished by eight of the team making a box and 
tackling the members of the opposing team, thus blocking or 
boxing up the team and giving to three of the forwards, sup* 
posed to be the fastest men on the team, a chance to run with 
the ball. Immediately after the game is started the players may 
.obstruct their opponents by the body ana may tac&le an4 Jioia., 



202 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY, 



As in foot ball, however, for tripping-, kicking- or tackling- below 
the knees, the referee will have the power to penalize 10 yards. 

The referee is supreme official and decides all the points in 
the rules and exercises his judgment on points not set forth 
in the rules. He has an assistant, appointed by himself, who is to 
watch for fouls and fouls only, as, of course, it would be utterly im- 
possible for the referee to see what is going on at both sides of the 
ball, and as a result the referee will be called upon to take the report 
from his assistant and decide accordingly. There is a linesman whose 
duties are practically the same as a linesman in foot ball, also 
scorers and timekeepers. For any rough play, a penalty of 10 yards 
is given. If a second penalty is given within the 10-yard line, the 
flying- wedge is not necessary, and the team that is penalized loses 
the goal and it is given to the opposing- side. 

OFFICIAL, PUSH BALL RULES 

The Field. — The field shall be a rectangular space 140 yards In 
leng-th and 50 yards in width. The outside boundary shall be 
marked by heavy white lines on the floor or ground. 

The Ball. — The ball shall be the Spalding- Official Push Ball. 

Goals. — The goals shall consist of two upright posts 18 feet in 
height placed in the ground 20 feet apart, with a cross bar 7 feet 
above and parallel to the floor or ground. 

Teams. — Teams shall consist of eleven men, as follows: Five for- 
wards, two left wings, two rigrht wing's and two g-oal-keepers. 

Officials — The officials shall be one Referee, one Assistant Referee, 
two Linesmen, one Timekeeper and one Scorer. 

Duties of the Referee. — (1) The Referee shall blow his whistle 
when the ball has crossed either of the side lines and shall order 
the ball placed 25 feet from the side line in the field of play on a 
line parallel to the point where the ball left the field of play. The 
players shall line up 20 yards back of the ball, play to be resumed 
at the whistle of the Referee. The Referee shall be sole judge of 
the plays, and for any kind of rough play shall, in his discretion, 
penalize the opposing- teams 10 yards. 

(2) The Referee decides all questions not definitely falling- to the 
other officials. 

(3) The Assistant Referee shall be appointed by the Referee and 
shall assist him in deciding- questions of foul play, and shall report 
same to the Referee. 

Duties of the Linesmen. — The Linesmen shall, under the supervi- 
sion of the Referee, mark the progress of the distance g-ained. They 
shall remain outside the field of play and measure the distance with 
a rope. The Linesmen shall indicate the placing* of the ball and 
the positions of the players. 

Duties of the Scorer. — The Scorer shall be appointed by the Ref- 
eree. He shall keep an accurate tally of all points made and 
announce same at end of each half. 

Duties of the Timekeeper. — The Timekeeper shall be appointed by 
the Referee. He shall note when the game starts and blow his 
whistle at the expiration of 30 minutes' playing- time in each half. 
Time consumed in stoppag-es shall be deducted only on order from 
✓ the Referee. 

Ties. — In case of a tie, the Referee shall stop the game, announce 
a tie, then order the game continued until one team scores two or 
more points. 

Scoring. — Pushing or shoving the ball under the 7-foot crossbar 
between the goal posts shall count 5 points; lifting or throwing the 
ball over the 7-foot cross-bar shall count 8 points, and a safety 
shall count 2 points. The object of the game is to push or carry 
the ball between the goal posts or over the crossbar of the oppo- 
nent's goal. ' " 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



203 



Method of Starting- Play. — The ball shall be placed in the center 
of the field at the beginning" of each half and after each goal is 
scored, and play shall be started at the sound of the whistle of the 
Referee. The teams shall line up as follows: Two goal-keepers on 
the goal lines; two left wings and right wings on the 20-yard lines, 
the five forwards on the 40-yard lines. 

The Game. — (1) The ball shall be out of bounds only when it has 
completely crossed either of the side lines. (2) After each goal is 
scored, the ball shall be put in play at the center and the teams 
shall change goals. (3) Two halves of 30 minutes' duration shall 
be played, with 10 minutes' rest. (4) Before the ball is in play no 
player shall interfere with an opponent. (5) No player shall be 
allowed to have projecting nails or iron plates on his shoes or wear 
upon his person any metallic or hard substance that, in the judg- 
ment of the Referee, is liable to injure another player. There shall 
be nothing in this rule to prevent players from using cleats made 
of leather. (6f) A player once removed from the game cannot again 
play in that game. 

For the second penalty, the team giving the penalty shall be ac- 
corded a flying charge and the penalized team shall stay back of 
the ball until the opposing side strikes the ball, and the penalized 
team may line up against and brace the ball. In a flying charge 
the team given the privilege can start as far back as they want to 
and can run to the ball at any angle. 

Penalties shall be numbered one and two. For the first penalty 
10 yards shall be given. For the second penalty, a flying charge; 
and on penalties the Referee shall rotate as in the foregoing, except 
when the second penalty is given within the 10-yard line. 

If a distance penalty is given within 10 yards of an opponent's 
goal, the team that has gained the penalty shall be given a goal 
and score 5 points. The ball shall then be put in play in the center. 

A Safety. — A safety shall be scored when the ball is pushed across 
the opponents' goal line, not between the goal posts. After crossing 
the goal line the ball is dead. The ball is then brought out to the 
center on the 50-yard line, and the team scoring the safety has a 
free rush, lining up 10 yards back of the ball. The members of the 
team whose goal line has been crossed are to line up on the goal 
line and not to leave until the Referee blows his whistle. When- 
ever the Referee gives a distance penalty and the distance gained 
would carry the ball nearer to the goal line than 10 yards, the ball 
shall be put in play on the 10-yard line. 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



ill 



BOXING. 



Section i. In all boxing competitions the ring shall not be 
less than 16 feet nor more than 24 feet square, and shall be 
formed of posts and ropes, the latter extending in triple lines 
2, 3 and 4 feet from the floor of the ring. The floor of the ring 
shall extend beyond the lower rope for a distance of not less 
than 2 feet. Posts must be properly padded and padding on floor 
shall be not less than Yz inch in thickness. 

Sec. 2. Competitors must box in regulation athletic trunks 
reaching to the knee, in shoes without spikes, or in socks, and 
use boxing gloves not less than five ounces in weight. 

Sec. 3. Classes to be: 108 lbs. and under; 115 lbs. and under; 
125 lbs. and under; 135 lbs. and under; 145 lbs. and under; 158 
lbs. and under; 175 lbs. and under; and over 175 lbs. 

Sec. 4. An athlete who fails to compete after entering an 
event shall be required to furnish a satisfactory excuse for such 
failure or render himself liable to censure or suspension by the 
local Registration Committee. Any athlete who weighs in and 
then fails to compete without an excuse satisfactory to the 
Registration Committee shall be suspended for a period of six 
months. Competitors shall weigh in within three hours of a 
contest. Weighing in shall cease in each class when the draw- 
ing- for bouts in that class commences. Competitors shall sign 
their names to a weighing list upon weighing in and whenever 
demanded by the Referee. 

Sec. 5. The Boxing Committee of each Association of the 
Amateur Athletic Union shall prepare an official list of compe- 
tent boxing officials to serve as Referees, Judges, Weighers, 
Timers, Announcers, and Clerks of Boxing. All tournaments 
must be conducted by officials selected from this official list. 

Sec 6. In all competitions the number of rounds to be con- 
tested shall be three. The duration of rounds shall be limited 
to three minutes each. The interval between each round shall be 
one minute. The Referee may order one additional round as 
provided in Section 10. 

Sec 7. A competitor failing to immediately respond to the call 
of "Time" at the beginning of any round shall be disqualified 
by the Referee and the bout awarded to his opponent. 

Sec. 8. Immediately before the contest competitors who have 
weighed in shall draw numbers to determine the bouts they take 
part in. The drawing to be as follows : Have the first prelimi- 



112 



SPALBMs T G'S ATHLETIC LIBRAHY. 



nary round to reduce the number of competitors, to 2, 4, 8, 16, 
and so on. (Thus, if there are three competitors, have one pre- 
liminary bout to reduce to two ; if five, have one bout to reduce 
to four; if six, have two bouts to reduce to four; if nine, have 
one bout to reduce to eight; if ten, have two bouts to reduce to 
eight ; if eleven, have three bouts to reduce to eight, and so on.) 
In all drawings where numbers I, 2, 3, 4, and so on are drawn, 
number 1 competes with number 2, 3 with 4, and so on. When 
the class is brought to a multiple of 2, 4, 8 or 16, the contest 
proceeds regularly to the final bout. Where the competition is 
not concluded in one day, there shall be a new drawing for each 
subsequent round of bouts started on a following day. The 
winner of the final bout receives first prize and the loser receives 
second prize. 

Sec. 9. Each competitor shall be entitled to the assistance of 
two seconds only, and no advice or coaching shall be given to 
any competitor by either of his seconds, or by any other person 
during the progress of any round. For a violation of this section 
the Referee may disqualify the competitor who is so advised or 
coached. 

Sec. 10. The manner of judging shall be as follows : There 
shall be two Judges, stationed on opposite sides of the ring and 
a Referee in the ring. At the end of the bout each Judge shall 
write the name of the competitor who in his opinion has won and 
shall hand same to the Announcer. In case the Judges agree the 
name of the winner is announced, but in case the Judges disagree 
the announcer shall so inform the Referee, who shall thereupon 
himself decide. If the Referee is in doubt he can order a further 
round limited to two minutes. If the Judges then fail to agree 
the Referee must decide in favor of one of the contestants. 

Sec. 11. The Referee shall have power to caution or disqualify 
a competitor for any infringement of rules, and to end the round 
in the event of either man being knocked down. The Referee, 
however, shall not count over a competitor who has been 
knocked down. If such knockdown in his opinion shall inca- 
pacitate the competitor from continuing, the Referee must stop 
the bout and announce the winner. 

Sec. 12. The decision of the Judges or the Referee, as the case 
may be, shall be final. 

Sec. 13. In all competitions the decision shall be made in favor 
of the competitor who displays the best style and obtains the 
greatest number of points. The points shall be: For attack: 
direct clean hits with the knuckles of either hand, on any part 
of the front or sides of the head or body above the belt. For 
defense: guarding, slipping, ducking, counter-hitting or getting 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



113 



away. Where points are otherwise equal, consideration to be 
given to the man who does the most leading off. 

Sec. 14. The Referee may disqualify a competitor who is 
boxing unfairly, by kicking, gouging, or hitting with the open 
glove, hitting with the inside or butt of the hand, the wrist or 
elbow, hitting or catching hold below the waist, hitting when 
down (one knee and one hand or both knees on the floor), 
striking an opponent on the back of the neck or on the spine or 
over the kidneys, holding with one hand and striking, butting 
with the head or shoulder, hitting in the clinches, wrestling or 
roughing at the ropes, using offensive and scurrilous language, 
or not obeying the orders of the Referee. 

Sec. 15. Any athlete who competes in a boxing contest of 
longer duration than provided for in these rules shall be sus- 
pended for such period as the Registration Committee shall 
decide. 

Sec. 16. — Nothing shall be used for the protection of the 
Viands and wrists other than soft cotton bandages of not more 
than three thicknesses and not more than two layers of tape 
back of the knuckles ; hard bandages or substances of any kind 
being prohibited. Bandages are subject to approval of the 
Referee. 

Sec. 17. In the event of any questions arising not provided 
for in these rules, the Referee shall have full power to deci^ 
such questions and also to interpret the rules. 



114 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



WRESTLING. 

CATCH-AS-CATCH-CAN. 

Section i. In all wrestling competitions the ring shall not be 
less than 16 feet nor more than 24 feet square, and shall be 
formed of posts and ropes, the latter extending in triple lines, 2, 
3 and 4 feet from the floor of the ring. The floor of the ring 
shall extend beyond the lower rope for a distance of not less 
than 2 feet. Posts must be properly padded and padding on floor 
shall be not less than one-half inch in thickness. 

Sec. 2. Competitors must wrestle in regulation trunks and may 
wear light slippers or rubbers without heels. 

Sec 3. Classes to be: 108 lbs. and under; 115 lbs. and under; 
125 lbs. and under; 135 lbs. and under; 145 lbs. and under; 158 
lbs. and under; 175 lbs. and under; and over 175 lbs. 

Sec. 4. An athlete who fails to compete after entering an 
event shall be required to furnish a satisfactory excuse for such 
failure or render himself liable to censure or suspension by the 
local Registration Committee. Any athlete who weighs in and 
then fails to compete without an excuse satisfactory to the 
Registration Committee shall be suspended for a period of six 
months. Competitors shall weigh in within three hours of a 
contest. Weighing in shall cease in each class when the draw- 
ing for bouts in that class commences. ^ Competitors shall sign 
their names to,a weighing list upon weighing in and whenever 
demanded by the Referee. 

Sec. 5. The Wrestling Committee of each Association of the 
Amateur Athletic Union shall prepare an official list of compe- 
tent wrestling officials to serve as Referees, Weighers, Timers, 
Announcers, and Clerks of Wrestling. All tournaments must be 
conducted by officials selected from this official list. 

Sec. 6. A fall shall terminate the bout and in no case shall the 
duration of a preliminary bout exceed 10 minutes. A fall shall 
terminate the final bout which in no case shall exceed 15 minutes. 
If no fall has been obtained by either contestant at the termination 
of the bout, the Referee must award the bout to the competitor 
who shows the best qualities, or who has acted mostly upon the 
aggressive. 

Sec 7. Both shoulders shall be pinned on the floor at the same 
time to constitute a fall. Any hold, grip, lock or trip allowed 
except the hammer-lock, strangle, full Nelson and toe holds. 
Striking, kicking, gouging, hair pulling, butting, strangling, or 
anything that endangers life or limb will not be allowed. 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



115 



Sec. 8. Immediately before the contest competitors who have 
weighed in shall draw numbers to determine the bouts they take 
part in. The drawing to be as follows : Have the first prelimi- 
nary round to reduce the number of competitors, to 2, 4. 8, 16, 
and so on. (Thus, if there are three competitors, have one pre- 
liminary bout to reduce to two; if five, have one bout to reduce 
to four; if six, have two bouts to reduce to four; if nine, have 
one bout to reduce to eight; if ten, have two bouts to reduce to 
eight; if eleven, have three bouts to reduce to eight, and so on.) 
In all drawings where numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, and so on are drawn, 
number 1 competes with number 2, 3 with 4, and so on. When 
the class is brought to a multiple of 2, 4, 8 or 16, the contest 
proceeds regularly to the final bout. Where the competition is 
not concluded in one day, there shall be a new drawing for each 
subsequent round of bouts started on a following day. The 
winner of the fisal bout receives first prize and the loser receives 
second prize. 

Sec . 9. Each competitor shall be entitled to the assistance of 
two seconds only, and no advice or coaching shall be given to any 
competitor by either of his seconds, or by any other person dur- 
ing the progress of any bout. For a violation of this section, the 
Referee may disqualify the competitor who is so advised or 
coached. 

Sec. 10. If a competitor refuses to break any hold when so 
ordered by the Referee, he may be disqualified by the Referee. 

Sec 11. The Referee shall have full control of the competition 
and his decision shall be final and without appeal. 

Sec. 12. No bandages of any kind shall be used on hands, arms 
or head. 

Sec. 13. Any athlete who competes in a wrestling contest of 
longer duration than provided for in these rules shall be sus- 
pended for such period as the Registration Committee shall 
decide. 

Sec 14. In the event of any question arising not provided for 
in these rules, the Referee shall have full power to decide such 
question and also interpret these rules. 

Sec. 15. If one shoulder of either contestant goes off the 
mat in a wrestling bout, the Referee shall be empowered to 
order the men to break their holds and go back to the center of 
the mat, with the man who was on top when the contestants left 
the mat assuming the upper position again. Jn the event of the 
Referee being unable to determine which man had the upper 
position when they both left the mat, he shall be empowered 
to order them to assume the standing attitude in the center of 
the mat 



210 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



Hand Grenade Throwing 

By Capt. Lewis Omer, N. A., 
Division Athletic. Officer, 86th Division, N. A. 

Grenades are usually made in three sizes: 18 ounces, defensive; 8 
ounces, offensive; 22y 2 ounces, defensive. The French bombing" ex- 
perts recommend that the standard 18 ounce grenade be used. 

Grenade throwing" demands, first, accuracy; second, distance, and, 
as' a smaller factor, speed in throwing". 

The men are conditioned by any general physical training. The 
most practical method is that we would use in any other com- 
petitive event by the use of the grenade itself in throwing 1 . 



PROPER FORM FOR THROWING. 

(a) The grenade should be grasped tightly in the palm of the 
hand. 

(b) The left arm stretched out straight, pointing in the direction 
of the target. 

(c) The right arm extended so that the left arm, shoulders and 
right arm make a straight line. 

(d) Method of throwing: Bend back and to the right at the 
waist and hips, keeping same position of the shoulders and arms, 
being sure to keep the shoulders, arms and body in the vertical 
plane passing through the target. The right leg should be bent, 
the left leg straight and the left foot pointing toward the target 
and the right foot at right angles to the vertical plane through the 
target. The contestant is now in a position to throw. 



THROWING. 

When starting to throw, straighten out the right leg, as in the 
shot put, bending the left and swinging the body on the hips and 
waist, aiding and finishing the throw with the arms, keeping them 
in the plane already described. The contestant should be careful 
to keep the arms always straight and aid the swing of the right 
by swinging the left arm downward, close to the body, using the 
left to gain speed, just as is done in throwing the base ball or 
putting the shot. 

The grenade should be let go when the hand is at the highest 
point of the arc and it must travel so that it drops down as nearly 
vertical into the target as is possible with accurate throwing. 



MANNER OF COMPETITION. 

A very good manner of competition would be to follow the French 
army standard, which is to put 12 grenades out of 15 into a hole 
2 yards in diameter, at a distance of 40 yards, within a minute's 
time. A grenade rolling into the target does not count. A con- 
testant stands behind a line 40 yards from the center of the target 
and is not permitted to cross the line with any part of his person. 
The practicable way to handle this as a competitive event would 
be to count the number of clean hits out of 15 grenades in the 
time given. 

This could be varied by making the contest for the same target at 
20, 30 and 40 yards, throwing 5 grenades at each target and giving 
the contestant the same time as given in the preceding paragraph. 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



211 



COMMENTS. 

Free style should not be used, although the tendency of the 
Amjrican athletic coach would be to think that he could improve 
upon the method of throwing-, and for this reason the following- 
reasons for using the standard form of throwing ' should be ad- 
vanced: 

(a) Bombing lasts for hours, and this method of throwing uses 
the greatest number of muscles and is therefore least exhausting. 

(b) Very often the grenade is used for barrage work and in that 
work everyone must throw exactly in front of him. 

(c) A grenade thrown in the same way as the discus is very 
liable to be knocked out of the hand or dropped with fatal results. 

(d) This style of throwing always gives a plunging fire. 



SUGGESTIONS FOR TESTS 

Teams to be of four men or multiples of four men, the larger 

the team the better. Contests to be divided into four parts, as 
follows: 

1. Tests for distance and angle. 

2. Bullseye test. 

3. Cage test. 

4. Speed test. 



DISTANCE AND ANGLE TEST. 

Court to consist of three radiating lines, as shown in Fig. 1. 
Side lines to be 1% feet to right and left of center line at point 
of origin from which grenade is thrown and 5 feet each side of 
center line at a distance of 50 yards from the thrower. Distance 
arcs to be drawn every five yards. 



RULES. 

Contestant stands at narrow end of course and throws for dis- 
tance. Scoring: Best throw out of three. Point of first impact to 
be recorded and no throw to count unless grenade falls within 
the limits of the court. 

BULLSEYE TEST. 

Bullseye to be constructed as follows: In a crater, one yard in 
diameter; circle 4, three yards in diameter; circle 3, five yards in 
diameter; circle 2, seven yards diameter; circle 1, nine yards diam- 
eter. In a crater six inches deep, space between crater and circle 4, 
turf; from circle 4 to circle 3, skin, 6 inches deep; circle 3 to circle 
2, turf; circle 2 to circle 1, skin, 6 inches deep.. Throwing trench 
2 yards wide, 6 inches deep, in form of circle, in radius 35 yards, 
as shown in Fig 2. 

RULES. 

Point of original contact recorded. Scoring: Value of hits — 
bullseye, 5; circles, 4, 3, 2 and 1, in succession from the center. 
Ten throws per contestant. 

CAGE TEST. 

Throwing cage, boarded in front, wire netting on sides and open 
at back; 9 feet long, 4 feet wide, and of adjustable height, three 
inches greater than the height of the contestant. 



212 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



Receiving- cages: One with near edge 25 yards directly in front of 
center of throwing cage screen. Dimensions: 10 yards long, 1 yard 
wide and 1 yard high. Two receiving- cages, at angle of 45 degrees 
to right and left, each 20 yards from middle point of cage screen 
and of same dimensions at center receiving cage. (See Fig. 3.) 



RULES. 

Ten throws per cage per contestant. Scoring: one point for each 
grenade which falls within the receiving cage. 

SPEED TEST. 

Court consists of throwing position and band of turf, 8 feet wide 
and 32 yards long. Targets: four individual craters one yard in 
diameter and eight yards apart at points 4, 12, 20 and 28, respec- 
tively, from left edge of throwing position produced to the front. 
(See Fig. 4 on last page.) 

RULES. 

Each contestant throws as many grenades as he can deliver in 
sixty seconds. Between throws contestants must touch both knees 
and chest to the ground. Scoring: Each grenade falling by original 
impact in contestant's assigned crater counts 1. 

Each test to have value of 25 per cent, in computing score for 
the event. 

It is believed that if practicable, as teams are organized and this 
sport becomes popular, it should be developed into regular opera- 
tions of trench raid and trench mopping, in combination with the 
bayonet. 




CIATION RULES FOR HAND GRENADE THROW. 

The hand grenade used shall be the standard iron, unfilled, U. S. 
Army grenade, weighing about 18 ounces, approximately 3% inches 
long, about 2y 2 inches in diameter at the center and 1% inches in 
diameter at the ends. 

The grenade shall be thrown from a minature trench 3 feet wide 
by 4 feet long by 6 inches deep, and from behind a solid barricade 




Fig 5 -I agt leSl 



3 2 Yards > 




Fig 4 — Speed Test 



214 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



at least 6 feet 6 inches high, so that the targets cannot be seen 
by the contestant while throwing*. The manner of throwing shall be 
the prescribed military form, a brief description of which is given 
below. No free style throwing shall be allowed, and a judge shall 
be appointed to disqualify anyone using other than the approved 
form. The contestant faces at right angles to the line of throw 
with the grenade grasped firmly in the palm of one hand. This 
arm should be extended at the side, while the other arm is 
outstretched in the opposite direction toward the target so 
that both arms and Shoulders make a straight line. The feet 
should be aboat two feet apart, the foot and leg nearest the 
target being straight and pointing in the direction of the throw, 
while the other leg is bent at the knee, the foot being at right 
angles to the line of throw. The body is bent sideways at the waist 
and hip. To throw, the leg and body are straightened and the 
throwing arm is brought up in a vertical plane passing through 
the target, while the other arm is brought down sharply. The 
grenade is released at the highest point of the arc. The arms must 
be kept straight, the elbow being bent only slightly, if at all. 




Seventy-five feet from the throwing- line a bullseye target with 
five concentric circles, respectively 2, 4, 6, 8 and 10 feet in diameter, 
shall be marked on the ground. One hundred feet away a second 
target shall be laid out, the inner circle being 3 feet and the 
others 6, 9, 12 and 15 feet in diameter respectively. One hundred 
and twenty-five feet away from the throwing line a third target 
shall be laid out, the smallest circle being 4 feet and the others 
8, 12, 16 and 20 feet in diameter respectively. Each contestant shall 
have three throws at each target. Each grenade landing in the 
smallest circle shall score 5 points; between the smallest and the 
next largest circle, 4 points; between the second and the third 
circles, 3 points; between the third and the fourth circles, 2 points, 
and between the fourth and the largest circle, 1 point. 

This shall be a team event, with four men representing- each 
institution. The college obtaining the greatest number of points 
shall be declared the winner and shall score 5 points, the other 
positions counting 3, 2 and 1 points, as in the relay race. A medal 
shall also be given for the best individual score. 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 215 

Rules for Trench Ball, or Grenade Ball 

Reg, U. S. Pat, Off. 

By Lieut. Louis C. Schroeder, 

Air Service, National Army. 
FIELD. 

The lines at the ends of the field shall be parallel to each other 
and shall be known as trench lines. The length of the trench lines 
and their distance apart depends upon the number of players. 
Trench lines 150 feet to 300 feet long- and 500 feet to 900 feet 
apart are suggested for teams with 25 to 250 players on a side. 
Whenever there are more than 100 players on a side, the trench 
lines should be at least 300 feet long and 900 feet apart. 

The two lines for the "throw-off" shall be placed 50 feet on each 
side of the center of the field and parallel to the trench lines. 

EQUIPMENT. 

The ball shall be the Spalding Official Trench Ball. One ball 
shall be used for every twenty players. 

PLAYERS. 

Any number on a side; from 10 to 250 players. 

OBJECT OP THE GAME. 
To throw the balls over the opponent's trench lines, thereby scor- 
ing a point for every ball that crosses the trench line. The side 
with the greatest number of points wins. Whenever a ball has been 
thrown across the trench line it is not again put into play. 

LENGTH OP THE GAME. 
The length of the game shall be agreed upon by the captains 
before the game and may vary from 15 to 30 minutes. The teams 
shall change ends at the half. There shall be an intermission of 
5 minutes between halves. 

THE THROW-OPF. 
The winner of the toss has the choice of the goal or the throw- 
off. The loser of the toss shall have the same privileges at the 
beginning of the second half as the winner of the toss had at the 
beginning of the game. At the beginning of either half the ball 
shall be put into play from the throw-off line. Each side must be 
behind its own throw-off line. 

RULES GOVERNING THE COMPETITIONS. 
The sides shall throw alternately. The ball must be thrown 
similar to the throw that is used with "Hand Grenade" (straight 
over-arm throw). A player who catches a ball on the fly may 
advance three steps toward his opponent's trench and then throw 
it. If the ball is not caught, then it is returned from the spot 
where it stops. The ball must be thrown by the man who first 
secures it. 

OFFICIALS. 

There shall be a referee, who shall also act as a timekeeper. 

SUGGESTIONS Iff PLAYING Tflfe GAMfi. 
A fly ball that is caught should be immediately returned. 
Throw the ball into uncovered field space, so as to prevent a 
catch. 

Whenever an opponent fails to catch a ball the throwing side 
should immediately advance; whenever a catch is made the throw* 
ing side should retreat. 

Attack the weak spots in an opponent's line, 



2^ 



SPALDING'S LAWN TENNIS ANNUAL. 



How to Lay Out a Tennis Court 

q As a double court prac- 
tically includes every line to 
be found in a single court, it 
is best to take first the meas- 
ure for the latter. Having 
determined the position of 
your net, plant in the ground, 
in the line chosen, two pegs, 
27 feet apart (at the points 
A and B in the diagram). 
Then take two measures and 
attach their respective ends 
to the pegs A and B. On 
the first, which will measure 
the diagonal of the court, 
take a length of 47 feet 5 
inches ; on the other 39 feet • 
pull both taut in such direc- 
tions that at these distances 
they meet in a point C. This 
tC will give one corner of the 
court. At that point F, 21 
feet from B, put in a peg to mark the end of the service-line. The other corner, 
D, and the other end of the service-line G, may be found by interchanging the 
measures and repeating the process. The same" measurements on the other side 
of the net will complete the exterior boundaries of the court. Bv prolonging 
the base-line 4 feet 6 inches in each direction, and joining the four new points 
thus obtained, we can make the side-lines of a double court. It only remains to 
mark the central line. This 

is done by joining the middle Side-Line ? 78 feet 

points of the service-lines. If saline ' 78 

a double court alone be re- 
quired, the interior side-lines 
need not be prolonged to 
meet the base-lines. Remem- 
ber that in all cases the net- 
posts must stand at a dis- 
tance of three feet from the 
side-lines. 

For a court where a single 
or double game can be played. ■* 
the size is 78 feet in length 
by 36 in width. 4% feet in- 
side the side lines, and paral- 
lel with them are drawn the 
service lines. 




Half Court 


2 
• 

Line, 42 feet 




Net 



Diagram of Single and Double Court. 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



217 



Rules for Quoit Throwing 

1. All playing" to be on stiff clay ends, which must not be les3 
than two feet in diameter, nor less than 6 inches deep. 

2. The distance to be 18 yards from center to center of mott 
(head of pin). The players to stand at a distance not exceeding 
3 feet at right angles with the pin. 

3. All quoits to be circular in shape and. uniform in thickness. 
Each player to choose his own weight of quoits. 

4. The pin to be driven into the ground at an angle of 45 
degrees till the mott is level with the clay, and is not to be 
touched on any account before measurement. 

5. The removal of clay from quoits before measurement is allow- 
able provided the quoit is not moved by so doing. 

6. All measurements to be made with calipers or compasses and 
to reach from center of pin to the nearest part of quoit. If a quoit 
or quoits interferes with a measurement it or they may be removed 
provided its removal does ot interfere with the pin or quoits. 

7. Should any motter in removing- clay or quoits interfere with 
the quoits to his opponents' disadvantage the umpire to declare the 
ends null and void and his opponent to have the privilege of the 
lead. 

8. No players to be allowed to measure shots unless he mott for 
himself; should the motters fail to agree, the umpire to decide and 
his decision to be final. No quoit to count when the distance 
exceeds 20 inches from center of pin. 

9. Should a quoit be broken during a game the measure to be 
taken from the nearest portion of the quoit to the center of the pin 
and the player allowed another pair of quoits to finish the game. 

10. The player is allowed to follow his quoit after delivering- it 
and to see how his opponents' quoits lie. 

11. Each player to have a motter if he desires one. 

12. An umpire to be appointed whose decision shall be final. 

13. The lead to be decided by a toss and the winner of each end 
to lead at the next; playing alternately. 

14. When a number of players are to participate in a match the 
players shall draw for their opponents by lot. Two sets of figures 
to be used and the players drawing corresponding numbers to play 
together. 

15. When there is more than one rink they are to be numbered 
before drawing and the players to take their places according- to 
the numbers drawn. The umpire to have power to change this 
article if he thinks it necessary, and the players or player not com- 
plying- with his decision he shall have power to rule them out of 
the game. 

16. When there is an odd number of players the one drawing- the 
blank is called the "Bye." He lays off until all have pla,yed and 
draws in the next round. But no one shall be a "Bye" more than 
once in a match. 

17. When a match ends in three players to decide, two play off 
and the Bye then plays the winner; should the Bye then win that 
settles the match. But if the first winner of the round is successful 
then the Bye and the first loser play off for second and third places. 

18. When a match onds with four players and a third prize is 
g-iven the two players that are beaten shall play for it. 

19. Talking to players except by the motter and all improper 
language is strictly prohibited. 



218 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



Hand Ball Rules 

THE COURT OR ALLEY. 

1. A line called the short line must be drawn parallel to the front 
wall, not nearer to it than half the length, nor further from it than 
two-thirds of the leng-th of the floor. 

Note. — For alleys of courts with a clay floor the short lines should 
be two-thirds of the length from the front wall, but for concrete, 
flagged, or bricked floors the short line should be nearer the center. 

2. A line should be drawn at the extreme edge of the floor, if there 
be no back wall, six feet from the boundary, to keep off spectators, 
and parallel to the front wall. This line to be called the over line. 

3. Where there are no side walls, or where the side walls do not 
extend to the over line, lines should be drawn from the ends of the 
front wall or side wall to the extremities of the over lines. These 
lines to be called side lines. 

4. A floor should be sixty feet long-, or as near to it as possible. A 
tell-board four inches high should be placed at the base of the front 
wall. A ball striking- the tell-board should be considered as striking 
the floor. The upper edge of the tell-board should be beveled. 



THE BALLS. 
5. Spalding balls are official. 



THE PLAY. 

6. A game to consist of fifteen aces, and to be won by whichever 
player or team gets this number. 

7. A rubber may consist of any odd number of games, and will be 
won by whichever gains the greater number of games. 

8. A "home and home" rubber to be played in the two alleys or 
courts belonging- to the challenged and challenging- players — as many 
games as may be agreed on to be played in the one alley or court, 
and the remainder or a sufficient number of games to decide the 
rubber in the second alley or court. 

9. Before commencing- a rubber the opposing- players shall toss for 
choice of inside or outside ground. One "hand" shall be given for 
first innings of every game; two "hands" for second and succeeding 
innings, if there be two players on each side; and three "hands" for 
third and succeeding innings if there be three players on each side. 
When one game is finished the winners will have choice of ground. 

10. All balls served out from the front wall to the outside must be 
tossed — that is, hopped and struck with the hand against the front 
wall. Jerking not to be allowed in inter-alley, championship, or 
inter-county matches. 

11. An ace to count when an outside player misses a ball, fails to 
return one which has been tossed out or played to him, or makes a 
"foul." A "hand out" to count when an inside player misses a ball, 
fails to return one which has been played to him, or makes a "foul." 

12. Touching a ball to be considered as playing to it; should it be 
played to a second time by the player who struck it, or his partner, 
before reaching the front wall, it shall be foul, and count as an ace 
or hand out. Playing to a ball on the second succeeding hop to be 
foul, and an ace or hand out. 

13. Should a player catch, or deliberately stop a ball going to the 
front wall, a hand out or ace should be given according as the offender 
is an inside or outside player. 

14. A ball which crosses the side line or side wall will be an ace or 
hand out, according as the player who last played to it is an inside or 
outside player. When a ball crossing the side line be struck at and 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 



219 



missed before it hops, an ace shall be given against the player who 
missed. If the ball has hopped, and the player is not sure whether it 
is inside the line or not, he should call for judg-ment, an<? proceed as 
in Rule 23. 

15. Should a player strike a ball and it to go up off his partner it is 
foul, and shall count as an ace or hand out. Should a player strike at 
a ball with both hands tog-ether it is foul. 



SERVICE. 

16. The partner or partners of the player who is serving- must stand 
at side line or side wall and inside the short line until the ball is 
served. 

17. No ball to be tossed out until the outside players are in position 
outside the short line. The judge may disallow any ball tossed out 
before the outside players are prepared, or while a question of judg- 
ment is being decided. 

18. If the player who is serving tosses the ball over the side line or 
side wall, it will be a hand out. Should he fail to toss three successive 
balls between the short and over lines it will be a hand out. Should 
he strike the ball against the ground, the side wall, or his own person 
ere striking the front wall, it will be a hand out. Should he miss the 
ball when tossing it will be a hand out. Should he jerk the ball it 
will be a hand out. A ball hopping on a line to be over that line. 

19. All balls tossed out between the short and over line must be 
played to unless they have touched the player who served them or his 
partner after leaving the front wall, or unless the judge disallows 
them. Should the partner of the player who is serving prevent a ball* 
crossing the side line it will be foul. 

20. Should the player who is tossing, or his partner, catch the ball 
before it hops a second time, it will be a hand out. Should the outside 
player catch a ball before it hops a second time, unless he be standing 
four feet outside the over line, it will be an ace. 



HINDERS. 

21. Should a player strike a ball and it afterwards strike his oppo- 
nent, it shall be a hinder, and must be played over. 

22. Should a ball coming from the front wall strike the player who 
put it up, or his partner, it is a hinder. 

23. Should a player, while the ball is in play, think that a foul has 
occurred, he must call for judgment and play on. When the ball has 
been played out the judge will d-ecide if a foul has occurred, and give 
his decision accordingly. Should no foul have taken place the result 
of the play will count. The judge may, if he wishes, declare an ace 
or hand out when a foul occurs without waiting for the ball to be 
played out. 

24. Should a player obstruct another in such a manner that he can- 
not play, the judge may give a hinder. Should the obstruction be 
wilful, the judge may give an ace or hand out against the offender. 

25. Any ball brought off the front wall in play to or beyond the over 
line shall count dead and be played over. 

26. When a ball is over or short the player may, or may not, as he 
pleases, play to it. Should he try to play to it and miss, it will be an 
ace. Should he call "over" or "short," and put the ball up, he will be 
dead and must be played over. 

27. In a court, a ball brought off front wall in play over back wall 
shall be dead and shall be played over. 

28. The decision of the judge to be final. 



In BASE BALL— as in many 
other lines — the "just as good" 
substitute (and have you ever 
noticed that it is always "as 
SpaldingV 1 ?) is sometimes 
foisted upon defenceless play- 
ers ? Spalding Base Ball goods 
are Standard. Get the full 
enjoyment of play by insist- 
ing on having Spalding goods. 



When you get "over there," 
call at our Paris Store, 2y 
and 27 Rue Tronchet, head- 
quarters for the athlete who 
is "on leave." 




I 



N NO LINE of defensive para' 
phernalia is more care required in 
manufacture than in a boxing glove. 
Spalding gloves are made with due 
regard for the purpose intended.' 
You cannot afford to take chances 
and possibly be marred for life. 
Insist upon having Spalding's. 
May be higher in price, but safe. 



PARIS : and 27 Rue Tronchet. 
LONDON : J17, High Holborn, W. C, 
NEW YORK : 126 Nassau Street. 



The encouragement given to athletic 
sport in our Army and Navy is a recog- 
nition of the value of physical exercise 
aside from the benefit of recreation. 



In everything of Spalding manufacture, it 
is not " How cheap ?" but " How good ?" 

Are you playing with a Spalding?" 





\\/HEN Basket Ball was 
* * originated twenty-five 
years ago it was little realised 
that it would become a 
worldwide and wartime sport. 
Spalding basket balls have been 
made and improved upon with 
the game's growth. A quarter 
century's experience is bound 
up in every stitch of its sewing. 



There is a Spalding store in 
Paris — has been for years— at 
27, Rue Tronchet. Needless to 
say, all Americans are welcome. 



.N THE AIR, on sea and land, the heroes of 
the mimic wars on the gridiron made their 
prowess felt in the sterner realities of actual 
conflict. And in their deeds we always shall 
have a pardonable interest — equipping, as we 
have done for years, nine-tenths of the colleges 
and high schools of the United States. 





Over twenty-five years 
and not a ball "bust" in 
a championship contest 
is the remarkable record 
of the Spalding J5 ball. 
That means Quality — 
only to be obtained by 
incessant vigilance. 

Spalding's Paris store is conveniently 
(see outside back cover for map). 



I 



N TRACK AND FIELD 

sports Spalding implements 
have been pre-eminent. 
From the running shoes for 
Olympic winners to the mis' 
siles of hammer and weight 
throwers, Spalding goods are 
always in evidence when 
championships are won or 
records made. 

The ruling bodies in European track and 
field athletics certify to Spalding Quality in 
the recognition of Spalding implements for 
use in Olympic and Championship contests. 

Don't be led astray by the 
false cry of cheapness and 
"just as good." Remember 
that superiority in competi- 
tion is the result of Quality 
in equipment. 



It is just as natural to associate "Spalding" 
and "sport" as it is rain and an umbrella. 
When you attend a championship contest 
of any kind, you take it for granted — and 
nghtly — that the equipment is Spalding. 



^IG LEAGUE £ 
QUALITY" 

signifies BEST in anything. 




The Spalding Ball 
has been the 
Official Ball of the 
National League 
for forty years. 

It is the 

HIGHEST PRICED 
and the BEST. 

Are you using it ? 



JVWLDING 






PARIS 

25 & 27, Rue Tronchet 

LONDON 

3 17 High Holborn, W. (K 

NEW YORK 

126 Nassau Street 



HOW TO FIND YOUR 
WAY TO THE 
SPALDING STORE 



This map will show you how to find your way 
A. G. Spalding & Bros/ store in Paris. 

Our store is located at Nos. 25 and 27, Rue Tr 
chet, -just behind the Madeleine and not far fr 
the Opera House, two of the most famous la 
marks of Pans, in the center of the city's 1 
and activity. 




Will you please tell me where I may find A. G. Spalding & Bros. ' store ? 

Dites-moi, s'il vous plait, on est le mag-asm du sport Spalding? 
Deet mwah, seel voo play, oo eh leh magahzan doo spor Spalding ? 

It is near the Madeleine, at Nos. 25 and 27, Rue Tronchet, not far from the Open 

11 est pr&s dela Madeleine, aux numeros vingt-cinq et vingt-sept, Rue Tronchet, pas loin de l'Oper 

Eel eh pray dellah Mad-lain, o noomei ro vant sank eh vant set, i'il Tronshay, pah Iwan deloppayra. 



